„,-^-A m

•f

,*

0'

•j

vl

V

fc-iyf

int

3^

-£J 3*

?*

.a ^if. ^*^ v^y . /> •■<

y* . -

'-^

^rr-^*^/

----- *v* ^T

- JSjS* .V

£-*£,

4^ VtT&

**#$k

3pS

4*6

i. ^ , .

Hi

■

I

i

The President has received, through Sir Dighton
M. Pro by n, the following gracious message from
His Majesty the King:

Privy Purse Office,
Buckingham Palace

Sir.

28th June, 1901.

I have the honour to inform you that
I have submitted to The King your letter
of the igth instant, and, in reply, I am
commanded to say that His Majesty is
pleased to accede to the request contained
in it to continue his patronage to the
Royal Microscopical Society.

I am, Sir,
Your obedient Servant,

{Signed) /). M. PROBYN,

Genera/,
Keeper of H. M.'s Privy Purse.

The President of
The Royal Microscopical Society.

His Majesty's message will be formally com-
municated to the Society at the next Ordinary
Meeting on October 16th.

ll
1

1

1!

I

i

ill

i

i
i

;■
I

i
i

1
li
ii
li

i

W, The President of ill

ll

1

ill

ill
11

li

JOURNAL OF THE

Royal Microscopical Society

CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS

AND

A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

zooilog-'X' .a.:dt:d botany

(principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia)
MICBOSCOPY, <5cc.

EDITED BY

A. W. BENNETT, M.A. B.Sc. F.L.S.

Lecturer on Botany at St. Thomas's Hosirital

Instruction to Binder.

The Message from the King, the Plate facing page 353 in the August Part,
should be inserted as a Frontispiect to the Volume for 1901.— Editor.

1901

TO BE OBTAINED AT THE SOCIETY'S ROOMS,

20 HANOVER SQUARE, LONDON, W.

Messrs. WILLIAMS & NORGATE ; and of Messrs. DULAU & CO.

Ijjll I :,--,rrT77; ; i .,.M i , i Wi.;:',/i ' lvi l 17HVViVnvWvVi ' ATnT;iT) ' h.^.--.'jTn^ rrrrT:^Tr77 ' , rrrrrinvrnGlll.

i

The President

has received,

th

rough Sir Di

ghton

M. Probyn, the

fo 1 1 o w i n

g gracious message

fro m

His Majesty th

e King :

Privy Purse

Office,

Buckingham

Palace.

28th June,

1901.

Sir,

I have

tJie honour

to

inform yon

that

I have suhm.it ted In

Thr

k nt<r wniiv

l/irfrv

I

i
I
HI

II:

111:
10

ill!

Ill:

II!
II:
111:

II

I

11

General,

Keeper of

H. ,

U.'s Prh

y Purse.

The President of

The Royal Microscopical Society.

His Majesty's message will

be

formally corn-

munieated to the Society at

the

next

Orrli nary

Meeting on October 16th.

j ^^^^ -^^^^^-^ ^^^^^^^mfE

1
1

I

IS

II

II
h

ill

11

ill!

JOURNAL OF THE

Royal Microscopical Society

CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS ANO PROCEEDINGS

A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

ZOOLOGY -A-UKTID IB O T -A. :dt Y

(principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia)

MICBOSCOPY, <Scc.

EDITED BY

A. W. BENNETT, M.A. B.Sc. F.L.S.

Lecturer on Botany at St. Thomases Hospital

WITH THE ASSISTANCE OK THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE AND

B. G. HEBB, M.A. M.D. F.B.C.P.

Lecturer on Forensic Medicine at
Westminster Hospital

A. N. DISNEY, M.A. B.Sc.

J. AETHUR THOMSON, M.A. F.R.S.E.

Regius Professor of Natural History in
the University of Aberdeen

MARION NEWBIGIN, D.Sc.

Lecturer on Zoology, Edinburgh College of
Medicine for Women

FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY

Minimis partibus, per totum Naturae campum, certitudo omnis innititur
quas qui fugit pariter Naturam fugit.- Linn&us.

FO R TH E YEA R
1901

TO BE OBTAINED AT THE SOCIETY'S ROOMS,

20 HANOVER SQUARE, LONDON, W.

Messrs. WILLIAMS & NORGATE ; and of Messrs. DULAU & CO.

2

4-L

THE

(Established in 1839. Incorporated by Koyal Charter in 1866.)

The Society was established for the promotion of Microscopical and
Biological Science by the communication, discussion, and publication of observa-
tions and discoveries relating: to (1) improvements in the construction and
mode of application of the Microscope, or (2) Biological or other subjects of
Microscopical Besearch.

It consists of Ordinary, Honorary, and Ex-officio Fellows of either sex.

Ordinary Fellows are elected on a Certificate of Becommendation
signed by three Ordinary Fellows, setting forth the names, residence, and
description of the Candidate, of whom the first proposer must have personal
knowledge. The Certificate is read at two General Meetings, and the Candidate
balloted for at the second Meeting.

The Admission Fee is 21. 2s., paid at the time of election and the Annual
Subscription is 27. 2s., payable on election, and subsequently in advance on
1st January in each year, but future payments may be compounded for at any
time for 31/. 10s. Fellows elected at a meeting subsequent to that in February
are only called upon for a proportionate part of the first year's subscription.
The annual Subscription of Fellows permanently residing abroad is 1/. lis. 6d.
or a reduction of one-fourth.

Honorary Fellows (limited to 50), consisting of persons eminent in
Microscopical or Biological Science, are elected on the recommendation of five
Ordinary Fellows and the approval of the Council.

Ex-officio Fellows (limited to 100), consisting of the Bresidents for the
time being of any Societies having objects in whole or in part similar to those of
the Society, are elected on the recommendation of ten Ordinary Fellows, and the
approval of the Council.

The Council, in whom the management of the property and affairs of
the Society is vested, is elected annually, and is composed of the Bresident.
four Vice-Presidents, Treasurer, two Secretaries, and twelve other Ordinary
Fellows.

The Meetings are held on the third Wednesday in each month, from
October to June, at 20 Hanover Square, W. (commencing at S p.m.). Visitors
are admitted by the introduction of Fellows.

The Journal, containing the Transactions and Proceedings of the
Society, and a Summary of Current Besearches relating to Zoology and Botany
(principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), Microscopy, &c, is published
bi-monthly, and is forwarded post-free to all Ordinary and Ex-officio Fellows
residing in countries within the Bostal Union.

The Library, with the Instruments, Apparatus, and Cabinet of Objects,
is open for the use of Fellows daily (except Saturdays), from 10 a.m. to 5 p.m.
It is closed for four weeks during August and September.

Forms of proposal for Fellowship, and any further information, may be obtained hy
application to the Secretaries, or Assistant-Secretary, at the Library of the Society,
20 Hanover Square., W.

a 2

fWron

HIS MAJESTY THE KING.

||ast-|)rcsitttnts.

E lected

*Sir Richard Owen, K.C.B., D.C.L., M.D., LL.D., F.R.S. 1840-1

*John Lindley, Ph.D., F.R.S 1842-3

*Thomas Bell, F.R.S 1844-5

♦James Scott Bowebbank, LL.D., F.R.S 1846-7

♦George Busk, F.R.S 1848-9

*Abthub Fabbe, M.D., F.R.S 1850-1

*Geobge Jackson, M.R.C.S 1852-3

♦William Benjamin Cabpenter, C.B.,M.D., LL.D., F.R.S.. 1854-5

*George Shadbolt 1856-7

♦Edwin Lankesteb, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S 1858-9

♦John Thomas Quekett, F.R.S 1860

*Robert James Fabeants, F.R.C.S 1861-2

*Chables Bbooke, M.A., F.R.S 1863-4

* Jambs Glaisheb, F.R.S 1865-6-7-8

*Rev. Joseph Banoboft Reade, M.A., F.R.S 1869-70

♦William Kitchen Parker, F.R.S 1871-2

♦Charles Brooke, M.A., F.R.S 1873-4

Henry Clifton Sokby, LL.D., F.R.S 1875-6-7

♦Henby James Slack, F.G.S 1878

Lionel S. Beale, M.B., F.R.C.P., F.R.S 1879-80

♦Petek Mabtin Duncan, M.B., F.R.S 1881-2-3

Rev. William Hy. Dallingeb, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S. 1884-5-6-7
Chaeles Thos. Hudson, M.A., LL.D. (Cantab.), F.R.S. 1888-9-90

Robeet Bbaithwaite, M.D., M.R.C.S 1891-2

Albebt D. Michael, F.L.S 1893-4-5-6

Edward Milles Nelson 1897-8-9

* DeoeajBea.

COUNCIL.

Elected 16th January, 1901.

prestbent.

*William Carruthers, Esq., F.R.S., F.L.S., F.G.S.

$tce-|)resibcnts.

♦Robert Braithwaite, Esq., M.D., M.E.C.S., F.L.S.
*A. D. Michael, Esq., F.L.S.
*E. M. Nelson, Esq.
The Right Hon. Sir Ford North, P.C., F.R.S.

("Treasurer.

J. J. Vezey, Esq.

Secretaries.

Rev. W. H. Dallinger, LL.D., F.R.S.
R. G. Hebb, Esq., M.A., M.D., F.R.C.P.

(Orbinary glembers of GLanntxL

James Mason Allen, Esq.

Conrad Beck, Esq.

Alfred W. Bennett, Esq., M.A., B.Sc, F.L.S.

E. T. Browne, Esq.

Rev. Edmund Carr, M.A., F.R.Met.S.

Edward Dadswell, Esq.

A. N. Disney, Esq., M.A. B.Sc.
*George G. Karop, Esq., M.R.C.S.

Henry George Plimmer, Esq., M.R.C.S., F.L.S.

Thomas H. Powell, Esq.

Prof. Urban Pritohard, M.D., F.R.C.S.
*Charles F. Rousselet, Esq.

Curator.

Charles F. Rousselet, Esq.

librarian anb Assistant S-etretarn.

Mb. F. A. Parsons.

F Members of the Publication Committee.

CONTENTS.

TRANSACTIONS OF TEE SOCIETY.

PAGE

I. — Report on the Recent Foraminifera of the Malay Archipelago collected by
Mr. A. Durrand, F.R.M.S.— Part X. By Fortescue William Millett,
F.R.M.S. (Plate I.) 1

II— The President's Address. By William Oarruthers, F.R.S., F.L.S., F.G.S. 113

III.— On Tube Leugth. By Edward M. Nelson. (Figs. 18 and 19) 123

IV. — List of Some of the Rotifera of Natal. By Hon. Thomas Kirkman,

M.L.C., F.R.M.S. (Plate VI.) 229

V.— The Working Aperture. By Edward M. Nelson 242

VI. — Ou a Method of Increasing the Stability of Quiuidine as a Mounting
Material. By H. G. Madan, M.A., F.O.S., Fellow of Queen's College,
Oxford 246

VII. — An Examination of the Abbe Diffraction Theory of the Microscope By

J.W.Gordon. (Figs. 65-94 and Plate VII.) 353

VIII. — Report on the Recent Foraminifera of the Malay Archipelago collected by
Mr. A. Durrand, F.R.M.S.— Part XI. By Fortescue William Millett,
F.R.M.S. (Plate VIII.) 485

IX. — Fungi found on Farm Seeds when tested for Germination ; with an Account

of two Fungi new to Britain. By A. Lorrain Smith. (Plate XIII.) . . 613

X. — Report on the Recent Foraminifera of the Malay Archipelago collected by
Mr. A. Durrand, F.R.M.S.— Part XII. By Fortescue William Millett,
F.R.M.S. (Plate XIV.) 619

NOTES.

Resolution of Am phipleura pellucida. By A. Eliot Merlin and E. M. Nelson .. 397
Note on a Travelling and Sea-side Microscope. By Mr. A. A. C. Eliot Merlin.

(Fig. 103) 498

The Abbe Diffraction Theory. By J. W. Gordon, F.R.M.S 629

OBITUARY

George Shadbolt .. ^49

John Ware Stephenson 398

Vlll CONTENTS.

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES

Relating to Zoology and Botany (principally Invertebrata and
Cryptogamia), Microscopy, &c, including Original Communications
from Fellows and Others.* 12,133,250,401,500,630

ZOOLOGY.

VERTEBRATA.

a. Embryology. pagh

Barthelet — Experiments on Telegony 12

Cuenot, L. — Sex in Pigeons 12

Bouin — Histogenesis of Ovary in Rana temporaria 12

Loisel, G. — Defences of the O cum 13

Giardina, A. — Alleged Amoeboid Movements of Germinal Vesicle 13

Wetzel, G. — Abnormal Eggs of Tropidonotus natrix 13

Loisel, Gustave — Periodicity in Spermatogenesis 14

Meves, Friedr.— " Nebenkern " of Sperm-cells 14

Herfort, Karl — Fertilisation in Petromyzon fluviatilis 15

Hill, J. P. — Foetal Membranes of Dasyurus 15

Tonkoff, W. — Chondrocranium of Chick 16

Bertelli, D.— Air-sacs of the Chick 16

Gregory, Emily Ray — Development of Excretory Organs in Turtles 16

Wilson, H. V. — Blastopore of Frog 17

Beard, J. — Thymus-Element in Spiracle of Baia 17

Fischel, A. — Regeneration of Lens 17

Winkler, Hans — Can Extract of Sperm act as a Fertilising Agent? 133

Gemmill, J. F. — Does Nutrition influence the Determination of Sex? 133

Vernon, H. M. — Reaction of Developing Sea-Urchins to Environment 133

Galloway, T. W. — Accelerating Effect of Heat upon Growth 134

Tonkoff, W. — Production of Double Embryos from Neict's Eggs 134

Cutore, G. — Experimental Embryology 134

Poljakoff, P. — Maturation and Fertilisation 135

Carnoy, J. B., & H. Lebrun — Germinal Vesicle of Amphibian Eggs 135

Honors, Oh. — Pluriovular Follicles in the Rabbit 135

Harrison, R. G. — Peripheral Nervous System of Salmo salar 136

Raffaele, F. — Development of Peripheral Nerves 136

Hoffmann, C K. — Development of Sympathetic System 136

Moore, J. Percy — Post-Larval Changes in Vertebral Articulations in Salamanders 137

Ussow, S. — Development of Teleostean Vertebral Column 137

Weil, R. — Ear-Bones of Opossum 138

Constantinescu, C. I. — Two Hearts in a Pigeon 138

Nusbaum, J., & Th. Prymak — Origin of Lymphoid Elements of the Thymus in

Teleosts 138

Allis, E. P. — Pseudobranch of Amia calva 138

Cunningham, J. T. — Sexual Dimorphism among Animals 250

Heape, Walter — Sexual Season in Mammals 252

Jenson, A. S. — Eggs of Myxine 254

Loisel, G. — Blastoderms without Embryos 255

Boveri, Th. — Merogony and Ephebogenesis 255

Rondeau-Luzeau — Influence of Saline and Saccharine Solutions on Frogs 7 Eggs . . 255

Reese, A. M. — Artificial Incubation of Alligator Eggs 255

* In order to make the Contents complete, the papers printed in the ' Transactions '
and the Notes printed in the 'Proceedings' are included here.

CONTENTS. IX

His, W. — LecithobJast and Angioblast in Vertebrates 255

Burckhard, G. — Fixation of Egg in Mouse 256

Weigner, K. — Development of Acusticofacial and Semilunar Ganglia 257

Blanc, H. — Epiphysis and Paraphysis in Salamandra atra 257

Hill, Charles — Two Epiphyses in a Four-Day Chick 257

Rex, H. — Development of Eye-muscles in Duck 258

Chomjakoff, M. — Development of Skull in Falconidx 258

Harrison, H. Spencer — Dentition of Hatteria 258

Martin, H. — Intermaxillary Tooth in Viper a asp is 259

Helly, K. — Development of Pancreas in Mammals 259

Semon, R. — Development of Excretory System in Dipnoi 259

Bellesme, Jousset de — Reproduction of Salmon in Fresh Water 260

Bataillon, E. — Teratogenic Influence of Saline and Saccharine Solutions .. .. 401

Bonnet, R. — Is there Parthenogenesis in Vertebrata'l -101

Wilcox, E. V. — Division of Chromosomes 401

Eisen, Gustav — Spermatogenesis of Batraehoseps 402

Peter, Karl — Differences in the Development of the same Ectodermic Structures .. 402

Bataillon, E. — Development of Immature Ova of Rana fusca 403

Minot, Charles Sedgwick — Somatopleure and Splanchnopleure 403

Hill, J. P. — Female Urinogenital Organs of Marsupialia 403

Krause, R. — Development of Ductus Endolymphaticus 404

Fabre-Domergue & E. Bietrix — Artificial Rearing of Soles 404

Schdltze, O. — Development and Significance of the Ora Serrata 404

Loeb, Jacques — Artificial Parthenogenesis 500

Vigdier, Camille — Parthenogenesis or Chemical Fertilisation 501

Delage, \'ves & Marcel — Chemical Composition of Germ-Cells and that of Solu-
tions inducing Parthenogenesis 502

Adami, J. G. — Heredity and Disease 502

Beard, J. — Morphological Continuity of Germ-Cells in Skate 504

Marshall, F. H. A. — QZslrous Cycle in Sheep and the Formation of the Corpus

iuteum .. ... 505

Kopsch, Fr. — Cleavage of Frog's Ovum 505

Ebner, V. von — Division of Spermatocytes in Mammals 505

Loisel, Glstave — Spermatogenesis in the Domestic Sparroio 506

Selexka, E. — Uniformity of the Embryos of Primates 506

Nussbaum, M. — Retrogressive Changes in Embryonic Primordia 506

Economo, Constantin J. — Development of the Hypophysis in Birds 507

Yoeltzkow, A. — Development of Crocodilus madagascariensis 507

Peter, K. — Visceral Clefts of Lacerta 507

Glas, Emil — Development of Spleen in Tropidonotus Natrix 508

Kohlbrugge, J. H. F. — Development of Egg in Mabuia multifasciata 50S

Voeltzkow, A. — Germ-layers of Podocnemis madagascariensis 508

„ „ & L. Doderlein — Abdominal Ribs in Reptiles 509

Gerhardt, U. — Development of the Permanent Kidney in Amniota 509

Wendelstadt, H. — Regeneration of Bone in Urodela 509

Fox, H. — Tympano-Eustachian Passage in the Toad 509

Gemmill, J. F. — Symmetrical Double Monstrosities in the Trout 510

Wilson, Cregg — Development of Ceratodus 510

Delage, Yves — Discovery of Merogony 630

„ „ Cytoplasmic Maturation and Experimentally Induced Partheno- 630

genesis 631

Nussbatjm, M. — Origin of Germ-cells in Chick Embryo 316

Hammar, J. AcG. — Structure of Embryonic Bone-marrow 631

Gronberg, Gosta — Brain of Erinaceus 631

Schoenfeld, H. — Mammalian Spermatogenesis 631

Godlewski, E. — Development of Striped Muscle 632

Adloff, P. — Development of Teeth in Sus scrofa 632

Tims, H. W. Makett — Tooth-genesis in the Caviidse 632

Korff, K. v. — V-shaped Centrosomes 633

Rex, H. — Cephalic Mesobl a st in Lar us ridibundus 633

Kuleztcki, Wlodzimierz — Development of Shoulder- Girdle in Birds 633

Peter, Karl — Development of Nostrils in Lizard 633

X CONTENTS.

PA.CS

Hinsberg, V. — Development of Nasal Cavity in Amphibia 634

Rothig, Paul — Dorsal Groove in Egg of Triton tseniatus 634

Bocke, J. — Function of Infundibulum in Larval Fish 634

Minckebt, W. — Lorenzini' 's Ampullse in Selachians 634

Swaen, A., & A. Bkachet — Development of Teleosteans 634

Kerr, J. Geaham — Development of Lepidosiren paradoxa 635

6. Histology.

Oppel, A. — Comparative Histology of Vertebrata 17

Mere, Ludwig — Structure of Human Epidermis 17

Golgi, C. — Fine Structure of Glandular Cells 18

Heidenhain, Martin — Structure of Gastric Epithelium 18

Vignon, P. — Classification of Epithelial Cells 18

Zimmermann, K. W. — Anastomoses of Gland-tubules 19

Eggeling, H. — Skin-glands of Mono'tremes 19

Burckhardt, R. — Luminous Organs of Selachians 19

Vincenzi, Livio — Structure of Nucleus of Trapezoid Body 19

Holmgren, Emil — Canaliculi of Nerve-cells 19

Aguerre, A. J. — Structure of Human Neuroglia 20

Schulze, Walter — Islands of Langerhans in Pancreas '20

Butschli, O. — Histological Study of Cry stals 138

Yung, E., & O. Fuhrmann — Intestinal Mucous Membrane of Lota vulgaris .. .. 139

Schreiner, K. E. — Alimentary Canal of Birds 139

Scott, F. H. — Micro- Chemistry of Nerve-cells 140

Sihler, Chr. — Relation of Nerves to Muscle 140

Ehrlich, P., & A. Lazarus — Histology of the Blood 140

T.schistowitsch, N., & W. Piwowarow — Blood of Rabbit 141

Waldeyer, W. — Nomenclature of Connective-Tissue Elements 141

Arnold, Julius— Fat-Absorption 141

Alt, A. — Glands of the Eye 141

Matthews, A. P. — Artificially induced Mitosis 142

Boveri, Th. — Centrosome and Cent riole 260

Gurwitsch, Alexander — Development of Ciliated Cells 261

Krause, K., & M. Phillippson — Central Nervous System of Rabbit 261

Thom, Waldemar — Hypophysis Cerebri in Man 262

Botezat, Eugen — Nerves of Hard Palate in Mammalia 262

Embden, Gustav — Primitive Fibrillm of Retina 262

Weidenreioh, Franz — Structure of Stratum Corneum in Man 263

Young, E. — Histological Effects of Prolonged Fast 263

Minot, Charles Sedgwick — Blood-Circulation ivithout Capillaries 404

Vincenzi, L. — Structure of Nerve- Cells 405

Schaffer, Josef — Elements of Connective-Tissue 405

Jagodowski, K. P. — Endings of the Olfactory Nerves in Fishei .. , 405

Smirnow, A. E. von — Innervation of the Mammalian Kidney , 406

Maximow, A. — Salivary Glands 406

Coco, Motta — Histology of Thyroid Gland 406

Overton, E. — Absorption of Anilin Stains by Living Cells 511

Vignon, P. — Basilar Granulations of Cilia 511

Alexander, G. — Ganglion Vestibulare of Mammals 511

Bernard, H. M. — Structure of Retina 511

Heidenhain, M. — Cellular Differentiations 511

Bauer, M. — Minute Structure of the Gizzard in Birds 513

Hoyer, H. — Shin of Hippocampus 513

Jagodowski, K. P. — Nerve-endings in the Pike 513

Ottolenghi, Donato — Histology of Functional Mammary Glands 635

Moll, Alfred — Histochemistry of Cartilage 636

Kytmanof, K. A. — Nerve-endings in Lymphatics of Mammals 636

Muhlmann, M. — Degeneration of Nerve-cells in Guinea-pig 636

PiACHmanow, A. W. — Nerve-endings in Arteries .. ■■ 636

Dekhuyzen, M. C, & others — Structure of Blood-plates (Thrombocytes) .. .. 636

Plehn, Marianne— ikh'nwfe Structure of Gills in Teleosteans 637

Schaffer, Josef — Minute Structure of Cartilage 637

Strassen, O. zur — Position of Centrosome in Resting Cells 637

Jaquet, M. — Comparative Anatomy of Cervical Sympathetic System 638

* CONTENTS. XI

c. General. ■ pag»

Fedde, F. — Symbiosis 21

Pilsbry, H. A. — Genesis of Mid-Pacific Fauna* 21

D5derlein, L. — Power of Flight in Vertebrate* 21

Osborn, H. F. — Relation of Dinosaurs to Birds 22

Paulli, Simon — Pneumaticity of Skull in Mammal* 22

Loewenthal, N. — Orbital Gland* of White Rat 23

Bardeen, C. R. — Variation in Vertebral Column in Man 23

Loweg. Theodor — Integument of Erethizon dor*ali* 23

McClure, C. F. W. — Variation in Didelphy* virginiana 23

Barrows, A. I. — Respiration in Lungless Salamander* 24

Tornier, G.— Forked Tails in Amphibian* 24

Brindley, H. H. — Abnormalities in Lepidosiren 24

Allis, E. Phelps, Jun. — Teeth and Breathing Valve* of Fishes 24

Guitel, Frederic — Nephrostomes and Segmental Canals in Selachians 25

Dollo, Louis — New Abyssal Fish 25

Puowazek, S. — Development of Pigment 25

Bcuchardt, Eugen — Structure of Amphioxus 26

Quinton, R. — Osmosis between Hxmolymph and Sea- Water 26

Rodier, E. — Osmotic Pressure in Internal Fluids of Selachians 26

L'Annee Biologique 26

Waller, A. D. — Index of Vitality H2

Hertwig, U. — Growth of Biology in Nineteenth Century 142

Murray, Sir John — Fauna of Black Sea 142

AVildiers, Et gene — Alleged Effect of Lethicin on Growth 142

Osborn, H. F. — Occipital Condyles and the Origin of Mammals 143

Fere, Ch. — Papillary Lines on the Foot 143

Regalia, E. — Claws on Birds' Hands 143

Dwight, Jonathan, Jun. — Change of Colour and Moult in Birds 143

Wigglesworth, J.— Flightless Birds 143

Benham, Blaxland — New Zealand Lancelet 26H

Willey, Arthur — New Amphioxus 263

Rclot, Hector — Hibernation of Dormouse 264

Fischer, Eugen — Persistent Thymus 264

Onodi, A. — Ciliary Ganglion 264

Ortmann, A. E. — Theories of the Origin of Antarctic Faunas and Floras .. .. 264

Noudenskiold, Erland — Influence of Alterations in Salinity 265

Genkin, M. — Action of Neutral Salts on Ciliated Cells 265

Quinton, R. — Behaviour of Nucleated and Non-Nucleated Red Blood-corpuscles . . 265

Fredericq, Leon — Permeability of Branchial Membranes 265

Brown, Arthur E. — Phytogeny of Anthropomorpha 266

Klaatsch, H. — Descent of Man 266

Cori, C. J., & Adolph Steoer — Plankton of Gulf of Trieste 266

Cleve, P. T.— Southern Plankton 266

„ „ Red Sea Plankton 267

Issel, R. — Fauna of- Hot Springs 267

Zschokke, F. — Fauna of Mountain Torrents 267

McIntosh, W. C. — Coloration of Marine Animals ,, 267

Bohn, Georges — New Theory of Coloration 268

Pfeffer, G. — Relations of Arctic and Antarctic Faunas ., 406

Pilsbry, H. A. — Genesis of Mid-Pacific Faunas 406

Eigenmann, C. H.—Eyes of Cave Animals 407

Dwight, T. — Variations in Vertebral Column of Man 407

Parker, G. H. — Variation in Chelopu* insculptus 407

Cajierano, L. — Variations of the Toad • 407

Eigenmann, C. H., & U. O. Cox— Variation in Catfish 408

Marage— Otoliths of the Frog .. .. 408

Zolotnitsky, N.— Do Fishes distinguish Colours f 408

Trouessart, E. — Hygienic Habits of Animah 408

Raspail, Xavier— Maternal Devices 408

Thompson, D' Arcy W. — Marks on Dolphins made by Cuttlefish 408

Finn, Frank— Tracheal Bulb in Male Anatidx 409

Xll CONTENTS.

I'AGK

Sbmon, R. — Position of Dipnoi 409

Hartog, Marcus — Mechanism of Tongue in Frog 410

Kidd, VV. — Hair Slope in Man .. 513

Bidewood, W. G. — Hairs of South American Edentates .. .. . .. 514

Martin, C. J. — Body Temperature and Respiratory Exchange in Monotremes and

Marsupials 514

Broom, B. — Variation in Echidna 515

Gadow, H. — Evolution of the Auditory Ossicles 515

Bonnier, Pierre — Otoliths and Hearing .. .. 515

Marage, M. — Otoliths of the Frog 516

Weidenreich, E. — Circidation in Spleen .. .. 510

Werner, F. — Reptiles of the Pacific Islands 51G

Srdinko, O. V. — Suprarenals of Amphibians 517

Prowazek, S. — Regeneration in Amphibia 517

Popta, Oanna M. L. — Appendages of the Branchial Arches in Fishes 517

Handrick, Kurt — Nervous System and Luminous Organs of Argyropelecus Tiemi-

gymnus 517

Punnett, B. C. — Variations of Pelvic Plexus in Acanthias vulgaris 517

Joseph, H. — Structure of Amphioxus 518

Jennings, H. S. — Significance of Spiral Swimming 518

Davenport, C. B. — Quantitative Study of Variation 638

Wiesel, Josef — Accessory Adrenal Bodies in Mammals 638

Bles, E. J. — Breeding-habits of Xenopus Ixvis 638

Abraham, N. — Breeding-habits of Chromis philander 639

Lydekker, B. — Algse, on Hair of Sloth 639

,, „ Adaptation in a Deer 639

Edinger, L. — Cerebellum of Scyllium canicula 639

Boulenger, G. A. — Superbratichial 'Organ in Hypophthalmichthys 639

M'Intosh, W. V. — Life-history of Littoral Fishes 040

Wasmann, E. — Biology and Ethology 640

Tunicata.

Metcalf. Maynard M. — Morphology of Tunicata 27

Michaelsen, W. — Magellan Ascidians 27

Todaro — Follicular Cells of Salpa 27

Longchamps, Marc de Selys — -Development of Heart in Ciona intestinal!* .. ■■ 28

Selys-Longchamps, Marc de, & D. Damas — Molgula ampulloides 145

„ „ Development of Ciona intestinalis 145

Herdman, W. A. —Structure of Ascidi a 145

Bankin, James — New Tunicates from the Clyde 146

Schultz, L. S.— Heart of Salpa 26S

Pizon, Antoine — Pigmentation in Tunicates 269

Dahlgrun, Wilhelm — Excretory Organs of Tunicates 269

Bitter, Wm. E. — Social and Compound Ascidians 270

Willey, Arthur — Protostigmata of Molgula manhattensis De Kay 270

Vignon, P. — Histology of Ascidians 410

de Selys Longchamps, Marc — Development of Branchial Sac in Corel! a .. ■■ 410'

Dahlgrun, Wilhelm — Excretory Organs of Tunicates 64Q

INVERTEBRATA.

Butschinsky, P. — Metazoa of Salt Lakes 28

Allen, E. J., & others — Fauna of Salcombe Eduary 28

Gurich, G. — Tentaculites and Nowakia 28

McArdle, A. F. — Indian Ocean Dredging 29

Minkiewicz, B. — Limnoplanldon of Russia 144

Zykoff, W. — Potamoplankton of Volga 144

Lauterborn, B. — " Sapropelic" Fauna 144

Meek, Alexander, & others — Northumberland Marine Investigations 144

Jorgensen, E. — Plankton of West Coast of Norway 410

Voigt, Max — New Fresh-teater Organisms 411

Korotneff, A. — Fauna of Baikal-Lake 518

Pruvot, G. — Distribution of Marine Organisms 519

CONTENTS. Xlll

Mollusca. t-^oB

IMHOF, O. S. — Aquatic Mollusca of Switzerland 411

Mobius, K. — Esthetic Appreciation of Molluscs 519

a. Cephalopoda.

ScHiMKEwrrsOH, Wl. — Effect of Reagents on Segmenting Egg* 29

(J-arstaxg, W. — -Plague of Octopus 29

Schimkkwitsoh, Wl. — Experiments on Eggs of Squid 146

Kabl, Hans — G7j?-oma/op/wres of Cephalopoda 519

Griffin, L. E. — Arterial Circulation of Nautilus pompili us 520

y. Gastropoda.

Wallace, W. S. — Locomotion of Fulgur 29

Carazzi, D. — Development of Aplysia 30

GuiART, J. — Tectibranchs 30

Andre, Emile — Phylacites of Hyalina 146

Woodward, M. F. — Structure of Pleurotomaria beyrichii 270

Robert, A. — Cleavage in Trochus 270

Vatssiere, A. — Monograph on Phurobranchidse 271

H. Smidt — Ganglion-cells in the Gullet Musculature of Pulmonates 271

Bouvier, E. L., & H. Fischer — Pleurotomaria beyrichi 411

Robert, A. — Spawning and Oviposition in Trochus 412

Hilgendorf, Franz — Variations of Planorbis 520

Thiele, Joh. — Evolution of the Gastropod Form of Body 520

Conklin, E. G. — Centrosome and Sphere in Crepidula 521

Beegh, R. — Genus Harpa 521

Smidt, H. — Structure of Neuroglia in Snail 521

Prowazek, S. — Spermatogenesis in Helix pomatia 522

Lacaze-Dcthiers, Henri de — Nervous System of Capulus hungaricus 522

Plate. Ludwig H. — Anatomy and Phytogeny of Chitonidx 522

Willcox, M. A. — Notes on Acmasa testudinalis 640

Conant, H. 8. — Conchometer 641

Heath, Harold, & M. H. Spaulding — New Pteropod 641

5. Lamellibranchiata.

Johnstone. J. — Structure of Cardium edule 146

Hesse, Richard — Eyes of Mollusca 146

Ihering, H. von— Cruciform Muscle of Tellinacea 147

Meisenheijier, J. — Development of Dreissensia polymorpha Pall 271

„ „ Development of Cyclas 272

Bloomer, H. H. — Malformed Specimens of Anodonta cygnea 272

Drew, Gilman A. — Development of Nucula delphinodonta 523

Mitra, S. B. — Crystalline Style of Lamellibranchiata 641

Arthropoda.

a. Insecta.

Supino, F. — Metamorphosis of the Blow- Fly 30

Vanf.y, C. — Pupal Histolysis in Diptera 'M

Berlese, Antonio — Role of " Phagocytes " in Insect Metabolism 31

Henneguy, F. — Histolysis in Muscidx 31

Bachmetjew, P. — Freezing of Body Fluids in Insects 31

Dubois, R. — Silk of the Procession-Caterpillar 31

Berg, C. — Alleged Termitophily 32

Doerstling, P. — Aphis of the Sugar-Beet 32

d'Hercclais, J. Kunckel — Colour-Changes in Locusts 32

Xamben — Habits and Metamorphoses of Beetles 32

Reh. L. — German Species of Aspidiotus 32

Seurat, L. G. — Parasites of Oaks 32

Wasmann, G. — New Genus of Flies 33

XIV • CONTENTS.

Cholodkowsky, N. — Structure of Insect Testes 33

Netter, Abraham — Bees as Reflex Machines 33

Janet, Charles — Morphology of Insect's Head 147

Folsom, J. W. — Mouth-parts of Insects 148

Verson, Enrico — (Enocytes of Insects 148

Redikorzew, W. — Structure of Ocelli 148

Hesse, Richard — Simple Eyes of Insects 149

Imhof, O. E. — Insect with Many Eyes 149

Bordas, L. — Male Genitalia in Voleopt era 119

Gahan, C. J. — Stridulating Organs in Beetles 150

Handlirsch, A. — Stridulating Organ of Rhynchota 150

Meijere, J. C. H. de — Prothoracic Stigmata in Dipt era 150

Speiser, P. — Nycteribiid.se 151

Meijere, J. C. H. de — Larva of Lonchoptera 151

Stitz, H. — Male Genitalia of Microlepidoptera 151

Gross, J. — Amitosis in Ovary of Hemiptera 151

Surveyor, N. F. — Parasites on Cockroaches' Eggs 151

Bengstsson, Simon — Cardiac Body in the Larva of Phalacrocera replicata .. .. 152

Burner, C. — German Collembola 152

Wasmann, E. — Guests of Dorylinse 152

Paulcke, Wilhelm — Oogenesis in Queen Bee 272

Forel, A. — Studies on Ants 273

Shomann, H. — Symbiosis of Caterpillars and Ants 278

Fischer, T. — Artificially-produced Colour-change in Butterflies 273

Handliksch, Anton — Stridulating Organs in Rhynchota 274

Absolon, Iv. — Collembola from Caves 274

Enderlein, Gunther — New Kerguelen Insect 274

Rengel, C. — Diet of Hydrophilus piceus 274

Plateau, F. — Constancy of Insects in their Visits to Flowers 412

Lesne, P. — Periodic Pcecilandry 412

Imhof, O. E— Ocelli 413

Kellogg, V. L. — Phagocytosis in Postembryonic Development of Diptera .. .. 413

Villem, Victor — Cephalic Glands of Collembola 413

Lecaillon, A. — Formation of Eggs in Apterygota 413

Petrunkewitsch, A., & G. von Giaita — Sexual Dimorphism in the Sound-pro-
ducing Apparatus of Orthoptera .. 414

Kirkaldy, G. W — Stridulating Organs of Corixi dm 414

Champion, G. C, & T. A. Chapman — Viviparous Beetles 414

Wheeler, W. M., & W. H. Long — Sexual Forms of Texan Ecitons 415

Walton, L. B. — Metathoracic Pterygoda 415

Imhof, O. E. — Antennas of Odonata 415

Coutiere, H., & J. Martin — New Marine Hemiptera 415

Dickel, Fekd., & August Weisman — Are Drone I ggs Fertilised ? 415

Petrunkewitsch, A. — Maturation in the Eggs of Hive-Bees 524

Escherich, K. — End oderm of Insects 524

Guenther. K. — Nerve-endings in Butterflies' Wings 524

Poljanec, L. — External Sexual Organs in Male Lepidoptera 525

Christophers, S. R. — Structure of Adult Female Mosquito 525

Holmgren, Nils — Spermatogenesis in Staph ylinus 525

Schroder, L. — Development of Male Genitalia in Scolytidx 525

Bordas, L. — Alimentary Canal of Dytisc idee .. 526

Montgomery, T. H. — Chromosomes of Hemiptera Heteropter -a 52G

Sondheim, Maria — Taming a Larval Dragon-Fly 526

Martynow, Andreas — Peculiar Glands in Trichoptera Larvse 526

Patterson, R. W., & others — Scale Insects 527

Bordas, L. — Defensive or Odoriferous Glands of Cockroach 527

Leger, L., & O. Duboscq — Intestinal Secretion in Crickets 52S

Carl, Joh. — Collembola of Switzerland 528

Noack, W. — Development of Muscidas 641

Absolon, Karl — Sense-organs in Collembola 642

Flammarion, C. — Determination of Sex in Silhnritli 642

Howard, L, O. — Mosquitoes 642

CONTENTS. W

Langley, S. P., & F. W. Yery— Fire-fly's Light the Cheapest Form of Light .. 642

Tannreether, G. W.— Supernumerary Wings in Pieris rapie 642

Ueh.L. — Development of Coccidse 64:5

B. Myriopoda.

Phisalix, C, & Behal— Volatile Foison of lulus terrestris 33

Jourdain, S. — Poison of Scolopendra morsitans . .. 34

Bkolemann, H. W. — Male Dimorphism in Diplopoda 152

Verhoeff, Karl "\V. — Paleearctic Myriopoda 153

Merlin, A. A. — Tracheae of Centipede 153

Meves, Fr., & K. V. Korff — Cell-division in Myriopoda 274

Mauck, A. V. — Absence of Variation in a Swarm of Myriopods 528

Rossi, G. — Ventral Nerve-Cord of Myriopods 528

Verhoeff, K. W. — Coxal Sacs of Diplopoda 643

Ltjdwig, F. — Supposed Phosphorescence of Millipedes 643

Rossi, G.—Nest of lulus 64: J

-y. Protracheata.

Bocvier, E. L. — Peripatopsis blainvillei 153

Montgomerry, T. H. — Spermatogenesis of Peripatus balfouri 275

Evans, Richard — New Species of Peripatus 643

„ ., Development of Eoperipatus weldoni 644

Bouvier, E. L. — Peripatopsis blainvillei 644

5. Arachnida.

Wheeler, W. M. — Koznenia mirabilis in Texas 34

Wallace, L. B. — Accessory Chromosome in Sperm-cells of Spider 34

Foa, Anna — Is there Polymorphism and Parthenogenesis in Gamasidse ? . . . . 34

Lewis, R. T. — Copulation of Ixodes reduvius 153

Soar, C. D. — British Species of Arrenurus 153

„ „ Scottish Hydrachnida 153

TragIrdh, Iyar — Patagonian Mite 154

Pocock, R. I. — Palasophonus hunteri sp. n 275

Koenike, F. — Genera of Hydrachnids 276

Pocock, R. I. — Adaptation of Instinct in a Trap-door Spider 276

Richters, F. — Mites and Tardigrades 276

Wagner, W. — Habits of Water Spider 416

Kathariner, L. — Parental Care in a Spider 416

Wheler, E. G. — Stigmatic Organ of Nymph of Ornithodoros megnini 417

Soar, Chas. D. — Larval Hydrachnida 417

Hanstein, Reinold v. — Genus Tetranychus 644

e. Crustacea.

Ekman, Sven — Patagonian Cladocera 34

Muller, G. W. — Fresh-water Ostracods of Germany 35

Samter, Max — Development of Leptodora hyalina 35

Radl, Em. — Arthropod Vision 36

Entemann, M. M. — Variations in Crest of Daphnia hyalina 36

Owsiannikow, Ph. — Nervous System of Crayfish -u

Thompson, I. C. — Tropical Plankton 154

Verhoeff, Karl W.—Pal&arctic Isopods 154

Scodrfield, D. J. — Swimming Movements of Entomostraca 154

Kaufmann, A. — Ostracod a of Switzerland 154

Scocrfield, D. J. — Daphnia hyalina .. .. 154

Samter, M., & W. Weltner — Marine Crustacea in a German Lake 155

Vosseler, J. — Position of the Scinidse 155

Chilton, Charles — Subterranean Amphipoda of Britain 155

Vejdoysky, F. — Antennal Glands and Shell-Glands in Crustacea 276

XVI CONTENTS.

PAGE

Harris, J. A. — Habits of Cambarus immunis Hagen 276

Vebhoeff, Karl W. — Palxarctic Isopods 277

Embleton, Alice L. — New Entozoic Copepod 277

Lindstrom, G. — Alleged Hypostomial Eye* in Trilobites 277

Vigier, P. — Paranuclei in Cells of Digestive Gland of Crayfish 417

DubOSCQ, O. — Spermatogenesis in Sacculina 417

Bouvier, E. L. — Deep-sea Isopods 418

Scourfield, D. J. — Ephippium of Bosmina 418

Stebbing, T. R. E. — Giant Ostracods 418

Samter, Max — Marine Crustacea of German Lakes 418

Williamson, H. G. — Contributions to Life-History of Edible Crab 529

Prentiss, C. W. — Otocyst of Decapod Crustacea 529

Lenz, H. — Pacific Crustacea . . . . 530

Kunstler, J., & Ch. Gineste — Eyes of Entomostraca 530

„ „ Structure of Amoeboid Corpuscles in Crustacea .. 530

Embleton, A. L. — New Entozoic Copepod 531

Warren, E. — Development of Leptodora hyalina 531

Lilljeborg, W. — Swedish Cladocera 531

Przibram, H. — Experiments on Regeneration (345

Yerkes, R. M. — Variation in Fiddler Crab 645

Walker, A. O. — Malacostraca from Mediterranean, 645

Coctiere, H. — Fresh-icater Palsemonidie from Madagascar 646

Vavra, W. — Ostracoda from the Bismarck Archipelago 646

Annulata.

Mktalnikoff, S. — Sipuncidus nudus 37

Hodgson, T. V. — Study of English Channel Polychxts 38

Fauvel, P. — Arenicola 38

Gamble, F. W., & J. H. Ashwortii — Anatomy and Classification of Arenicolidse .. 38

Gravier, Ch. — Affinities of Procerastea Langerhans 38

Goodrich, E. S. — A Viviparous Syll id 39

Sweet, Georgian a — Spermiducal Glands of Australian Earthworms 39

Wagner, Franz yon — Regeneration in Lumbriculus variegatus Gr. 39

Foot, K., & E. C. Strobell — Egg of Allolobophora fcetida 40

Moore, J. Percy — Structure of Leech Somite 40

Sukatschoff, Boris — Protonephridia of Leeches 40

Bernard, H. M. — Origin of Segmented Worms 155

Bolsius, H. — Ciliated Organs of Hasmenteria officinalis 156

Newbigin, M. I. — Notes on Clyde Polychxles 156

Nusbaum, J. — Fresh-water Polychsete 156

Bretscher, K. — Srciss Oligochsetes 1 57

Beddard, F. E. — Spermatophorcs of Oligochseta 278

„ „ New Form of Spermatophore in an Earthworm 278

Ehlers, E.— Atlantic Palolo 278

Berg, R. S. — Histological Observations on Annelids 279

Skorikow, A. S. — Bamingia arctica 279

Smith, Frank — North American Oligochasta 279

Maclaren, N. H. W. — Blood System of Malacobdella grona 280

Bolsius, H. — Impregnation in Hxmenteria emtata 280

Bock, M. de — Histology of Oligochxtes 419

Rosa, D. — Malayan (Jligochmtes 419

Bolsius, H. — Hypodermic Impregnation of Hxmenteria costata 419

Moore, J. Percy — Leeches of HI inois 419

Meyer, E. — Origin of Annelid Mesoderm 531

Zykoff, W., & Nusbaum — Notes on Dyhowscella baicalensis 532

Watson, A. T. — Structure and Habits of Ammocharidm 532

Bounhiol, M. — Respiration in Spirographis spallanzanii 533

Goodrich, E. S. — Structure of Saccocirrus 533

Embleton, A. L. — Structure and Affinities of Echiurus unicinctus 533

Ehlers, E. — Annelids from Patagonia and Chile 534

Meyer, J. de — Supra-cesophageal Ganglia of Lumbricus agricola 534

CONTENTS. xvn

PAGX

Brf.tscher, K. — Oligochzeta of Switzerland 534

Benham, W. Blaxland — Ceelomic Fluid in Acanthodrilids 646

Fo.)T, Katharine, & Ella Church— /v/;?.s- of Allolobophora fcetida (ill!

Rand, H. W. — Regeneration of the Nervous System of Lumbricidse 647

Bretschek, K. — Habits of Earthworms .. .. .. .. K47

Prentiss, C. W. — Incomplete Duplication of Parts in Nereis virens 647

Sikatsciioff, B. — Cocoon of Hirudo '147

Nematohelminthes.

Grassi, B., & G. Noe — Mode of Filarial Infection II

C'onte, A. — Development of Sclerostomum equinum .. 41

Rhombler, Ludwig — Segmentation in Nematode Embryos .. .. .. . . 410

Con te, A. — Germinal Layers in Nematodes 420

Jerke, Max — Oxyuris curvula and 0. mastigodes 420'

Ma upas, E. — Modes of Reproduction in Nematodes .. . f>34

Noe, G. — Propagation of Blood Filar ise 536

Rizzo, A. — Fixation of Intestinal Parasites .. .. 530

Looss, A. — Method of Infection with Vhcinaria duodenalis 047

Platyhelminthes.

Sabussow, H. — Euterostoma mytili v. Graff 41

Buttel-Reepen, H. v. — Two Large Species of Distomum 41

Odhner, Th. — New Genus of Distomidas 41

Nickerson, W. S. — Distomum arcanum ... .... 42

Luhe — Genus Podocotyle (Duj.) Stoss 42

Braun, M. — Genus Clinostomum Leidy 42

Couvreur, E. — Hydatid Fluids 42

Ratz, St. von — New Cestodes 43

Voigt, W. — Influence of Temperature on Reproduction of Polycelis cornuta .. .. 157

Ha vet, J. — Nervous System of Distomum hepaticum 157

Looss, A. — Names of Genera of Distomidee 157

Dadat, E. von — Forms of Cercocystis .. .. 158

Wolffhugel, K. — Drepanidotxnia < lunceolata Bloch. 158

Saint- Kemy, G. — Development of Taenia serrata 158

Thompson 1 , Caroline B. — New Nemertean 158

Zykoff, \V. — Fresh-water Nemertine .... .... 280

Fuhrmann, O. — Avian Cestodes .. 280

Sekera, Emil — Marine Species of Gyrator . . 280

Shipley, A. E. — Syndesmus echinorum Franc 280

Mingazzini, P. — Poison of Parasites . . 420'

Vaney, C, & A. Coste-^- Histolysis and Histogenesis in Cercurue 421

Rosseter, T. B. — Structure of ' Dicranntsenia coronula 421

Braun, M. — Trematodes from Bursa Fabricii, Oviduct, and Eggs of Birds .. .. 421

Luhe, M. — Monostomum orbieulare 421

Haswelv,, "\V. A. — New Species of Temnocephalese 421

Fuhrmann, O. — Gyrator reticulatus Sekera .. 421

Haswell, W. A. — New Rhabdoeozle Turbellarian 122

Schockaert, R. — Oogenesis in Thysanozoon brocchi 530

Gei.ard, O. — Oocyte of Pro&thecerxus vittatus 530

Curtis, W. C. — Reproductive Organs of Planaria maculata 537

Steel, T. — Tasmanian Land Planarians 537

„ „ Australian Land Planarians .. 537

Volz, W. — Turbellarians of Switzerland 537

Ariola, V. — Revision of the Family Bothriocephalida: 537

Brezzano, A. — Rostellum of Davainea 538

Isler, E. — Nemertea from Chili . . . . 538

Schultz, E. — Regeneration in Leptoplana atomata 648

Odhner, Th. — Revision of Species of Allocreadium Lss 648

Looss, A. — New Trematoda from the Labridse 040

Braun, M. — Avian Trematoda 04!)

Dec. 18th, 1901 b

XV111 . CONTENTS.

PACK

Linstow, O. VON — New Tapeworm in Man 64'.l

Shipley, A. E. — Bothriocephalus histiophorus up. n •• •• 649

Miuzek, Al. — Position of Nerve-cord in Aboihrium rectangulum <j4I>

Saint-Remy, G. — Development in Cestoda . 64'.)

Mrazek, Al. — Larva of Caryophyllseus mutabilis .. .. 65(1

Punnett, R. C. — New British Nemertea 650

Bekgendal, D. — Callinera burger i 650

Incertee Sedis.

Nickerson, W. S. — Double Forms of Loxosoma 48

Roule, Louis — Development of Phoronis sabatieri 158

Ritter, W. E. — New Enter opneuston 159

T>avenport, C. B. — Variations in Statoblasts of Pectinatella magnified 150

Harmer, S. F. — Classification of Chilodomatous Bryozoa 159

Caullery, M., & F. Mesnil — Life-history of Orthonectids 422

Masterman, A. T. — Development of Phoronis 422

Gineste, Ch. — " Ciliated Urns" of Gephyreans 538

Schulz, Karl — Structure of Potyzoa 651

Rotatoria.

Lauterborn, Robert — Variation Cycle of Anurea cochlearis 159

Jennings, H. S. — Rotatoria of the United States 160

Hilgendorf, F. W. — Rotifers of New Zealand 160

Rousselet, C. F. — Specific Characters of Asplanchna intermedia 422

Dixon-Ntjttall, F. R., & M. F Dunlop — New Rotifers 42:;

Jennings. H. S. — North- American Rotatoria 651

Echinoderma.

Kcehler, R. — Antarctic Echinoids and Ophiurids 43

Russo, Achille — Genital Organ of Larval Antedon 415

■Chadwick, H. C. — Structure of Echinus esculentus 161

Griffiths, A. B. — Pigment of Echinus escidentus 161

Dawydoff, C. — Regeneration in Ophiuroids 161

Klem, Mary — Development of Agaricocrinus 161

Tower, W. L. — Abnormal Sea-urchin 281

Clark, H. L. — Holothuria of Pacific Coast 281

Boveri, Th. — Polarity in Egg of Sea- Urchin 42,"

Graye, Caswell — Development of Ophiur a brevispina .. 53S

Masterman, A. T. — Development 'of Cribrella oculata 539

Pfeffer, \V. — Optic Organs of Starfishes 539

Boveri, Th. — Polarity of Oocyte, Ovum, and Larva of Strongylocentrotus lividus .. 540

Clark, H. L. — North American Holotliuroidx 540

Mead, A. D.— Natural History of Starfish 651

Strassen, O. zur — Oral Skeleton of Ophiuroids .. .. 652

Przibram, H. — Regeneration in Antedon rosacea 652

Herouaro, Edgard — Antarctic Holothurians 652

Coelentera.

M'Murrich, J. Playfair — Mesenterial Filaments 4:!

Duerden, J. E. — Anemones from Jamaica .. 44

Parke, H. H. — Variation and Regulation of Abnormalities in Uydra 162

( arlgren, Oskar — Mesenteries of Actiniaria 281

Kassianow, N. — Nervous System of Lucemaridx 282

Nutting, C C. — Plumularidx 282

Garbe, A. — Origin of Reproductive Organs in Ctenophora 42:!

Wryagevitch, Th. A. — Halcumpella in the Black Sea 424

Hargitt, Charles W. — North-American Uydromedusse 424

CONTENTS. XIX

1'AliS

Mayer, A. G. — Variations of a Newly- Arisen Species of Leptomedusoid 540

Hartlaub, Cl. — Hydroids from the Pacific 541

Bigelow, R. P. — Anatomy and Development of Cassiopea xamachana 541

Uexkull, J. von— Movements of Medusas 542

Lacaze-Duthiers.II.de — Alcyonarians of the Gulf of Lyons 512

Carlgren, O. — Protection of the Young in Actiniaria 542

Duerden, S. E. — Septa and Mesenteries of Madreporaria 543

Studer, Th. — Madreporaria from the Sandwich Islands and Samoa 543

Vignon, P. — Cilia of Ctenophora and Ciliary Insertion in General 544

Billard, Armand — Scissi 'parity in II 'ydrozoa 652

„ „ Asexual Reproduction in Hydrozoa 653

Hakgitt, C W. — Variation* in Hydromedusse .. 653

Vaney, C., & A. Conte — Limnocodium sowerbii at Lyon 653

Friedemann, O. — Post-Embryonic Development of Aurelia aurita 05:;

Immekmann, F. — Attachment of Young Sea- Anemones to an Adult (353

Porifera.

Butschli, O. — Minute Structure of Sponge Spicules 162

Evans, Richard— Ephydatia blembingia 282

Topsent, E. — Antarctic Sponges 2S3

MacKay, A. H. — Fresh-water Sponge from Sable Island 284

Maas, Otto — Development of Sponge Spicules 284

Isao, Ijima — Studies on the LTexactinellida 424

Protozoa.

Lankester, E. Ray— Sexual Zygosis in Protozoa 44

Dangeakd, P. A. — Karyokinesis in Vampyrella 44

Harrington. N. R., & E. Leaking —Reaction of Amoiba to Different Colours . . 45

Schubert, R. J. — Foraminifera from Singapore . 45

Leger, Louis — Ccelomic Coccidia in Insects 45

Ross, Ronald, & R. Fielding-Ould — Life-history of H se.mamazbidse 45

Christophers, S. R., & J. W. W. Stephens — Malaria and Natives 4(5

Dangeakd, P. A. — Zoochlorellse of Paramecium bursaria 46

Gunther, Adolf — Parasitic Infusoria 46

Leger, Louis — New Sporozoon in Dipterous Larvse 46

„ „ & Paul Hagenjiuller — New Species of Ophryocystis 47

„ „ Reproduction of Ophryocystis 47

Doflein, F. — Cell-Division in Protozoa .. 162

Dangeard, P. A. — Nuclear Division in Protozoa 163

Stolc, Amo'si'S—Physiohgy of Pelomyxa 163

Penard, Eugene — Experiments on Difflugia 164

Pearcey, F. G. — Deep-Sea Rhizopods in Clyde Area 164

Roux, Jean — Infusoria of Lake Geneva 1 64

Dani;eard, P. A. — Structure and Development of Colpodella pugnax 164

Doty, H. A. — Apparent Commensalism of Conochilus and Vorticellids 165

Iwanoff, L. — New Species of Gonyostomum .. .. 165

Voirin, Valentin — Coccidium fuscum 165

Facciola, L. — Psorospermic Tumours of Xiphias 166

Tyzzer, E. E — New Myxosporidian in Fishes 1 66

Borgert, A. — Reproduction of Radiolaria Tripylx 284

Chapman, F. — Foraminifera from the Lagoon at Funafuti .... .. 285

Massart, Jean — Trichocysts of Paramecium aurelia 285

Minkiewicz, R. — Seasonal Dimorphism of Ceratium f urea Duj 285

Sand, Rene — Monograph on Tentaculif era 285

Siedlecki, M. — Life-History of Monocystis Ascidiae, 2S6

Siedlecki, Michel — Influence of Gregarines on the Cells of their Host 286

Caullery, Maurice, & Felix Mesnil — Asexual Multiplication of Gregarines .. 286

Stem pell, W. — Plistophora mutter i (L. Pfr.) 286

Borner, Carl — Genus Hsemogregarina 287

b 2

XX CONTENTS.

PAGE

Stassano, H. — Parasite found in Syphilides 2S7

Prowazek, S. — Protozoa and Bacteria 424

Senn, G. — Systematic Work on Flagellata 424

Forti, Achille — New Genus of Peridiniex 425

Ouenot, L. — Life-history of Gregarines 425

Koninski, Karl — Trypanosoma sanguinis in Batrachians 425

Lignieres, J. — La Tristeza 426

Prowazek, S. — Intra-vitam Staining 544

Penard, E. — Bhizopods of the Lake of Geneva 544

Borgert, A. — Badiolaria Tripylea of the Mediterranean 544

Stevens, N. M. — New Infusorians 545

Prowazek, S. — Cell-division in Polytoma 545

Brunnthaler, J., & E. Lemmerjiann — Genus Dinobryon 545

Huitfeldt-Kaas, H. — Peridinieas of Norwegian Lakes 545

Sand, Rene — Tentaculifera 546

Nuttall, G. H. F. — Mosquitoes and Malaria 546

Leger, L. — New Gregarine 546

Cecconi, G. — Sporulation of Monocystis agilis 546

Billet, A. — Gregariniform Stage in the Cycle of the Malarial Hxmatozoon .. .. 546

Leger, Louis — Gametes of Stylorhynchus 547

Plate, Lddwig, H. — Chifonicium simplex 547

Florentin, Ii. — New Infusoria 654

Wallengren, Hans — Division of Hypotrichous Infusoria 654

Lutz, Adolph — Drepanidium in Snakes .. 654

Bazxosano, Popovici A. — H&matozoa of Frog and Tortoises 654

Leger, L., & O. Dubosq — Development of Polycystid Gregarines .. 655

Fence, M. — Exciting Cause of Vaccinia and Variola 655

CONTENTS. XXI

BOTANY.

A. GENERAL, including the Anatomy and Physiology
of the Phanerogamia.

o. Anatomy.
(1) Cell-structure and Protoplasm-

PAGE

Timberlake, H. G. — Development and Function of the Cell-plate .. .. ... .. 48

M'Comb, Amanda — Development of the Karyokinetic Spindle in Vegetative Cells .. 48

Lawson, A. A. — Cones of the Multipolar Spindle 48

Nemec, B. — Formation of Vaciwles 49

Boulet, V. — Membrane of Hydroleucites 49

Steinbrinck, C. — Permeability of the Cell-wall for Air 49

Bernard, Ch. — Attractive Spheres in Angiosperms 167

Kohl, F. G. — Dimorphism of Protoplasmic Connecting Threads 167

Dixon, H. H. — First Mitosis of Spore-mother-cells of Lilium 168

Ott, Emma — Hardness of Vegetable Membranes 168

Steinbrinck, C. — Shrinking of the Cell-wall 168

Miehe, H. — Movements of the Nucleus 288

Byxbee, Edith, S. — Development of Karyokinetic Spindle in Pollen-mother-cells of

Lavatera 2S8

Hill, Arthur W. — Connecting Threads of Protoplasm in Pinus 289

Schutt, F. — Centrifugal and Simultaneous Thickenings of the Membrane . . . . 289

Kornicke, M. — Movements of Nuclei 548

Nemec, B. — Centrosome-like Structures in the Vegetative Cells of Vascidar Plants.. 548

Sonntag, P. — Lignitication of the Cell-wall 549

Nemec, B. — Fibrillar Structure of Protoplasm 656

Yamaxocchi, S. — Cenfrosomes in the Pollen-mother-cells of Lilium longiflorum . . 656

Josixg, E. — Influence of External Conditions on the Streaming of Protoplasm . . 657

Schaffner, J. H. — Cytology of Erythronium 657

Claussen, P. — Permeability of the Walls of Tracheids for Atmospheric Air .. .. 658

Dkyaux, H. — Fixation of Metals by the Cell-ioall 658

(2) Other Cell-contents (including- Secretions).

Tstett — Blue Chlorophyll 50

Kroemer, K. — Alleged Violet Chromatophores 50

Bokorny, Th. — My rosin in Plants 50

H arlay, V. — Proteolytic Enzyme of Germinating Seeds 50

Loew, O. — Neiv Enzyme 50

Schlagdenhauffen & — . Beeb — New Glucoside from Erysimum 50

Laurent, J. — Exosmose of Diastases 51

Bourquelot, E., & H. Herissey — Seminase in Seeds 51

Martinaud, V. — Presence of an Inverting Sugar in Grapes 51

Bourquelot, E., & H. HeribSEY — Simultaneous Occurrence of Two Sugars .. .. 51

Tschirch, A., & H. Kritzler — Composition of Aleurone-grains 168

Peter, A. — Compound Starch-grains 169

Moebius, M. — Anthophsein, a Brown Pigment of Flowers 169

Greshoff — Alkaloids of the Composite 169

Butkewitsch, W. — Proteolytic Enzyme in Germinating Seeds 1 69

Hazewinkel, J. J. — Indican and its Enzyme 1 < « 1 »

Wolff, J. — Presence of Methyl-alcohol in the Ferments of Certain Fruits .. .. 169

Tsvett, M. — Chlorophyllins and Metachlorophyllins 290

Bokorny, Th. — Myrosin .' 290

XX11 CONTENTS.

Clatjtrian, M. — Digestive Secretion of Nepenthes 290

Trabct, M.— Manna of the Olive 290

Schwabach, E., & A. Tschirch — Excretion of Resin by the Leaves of Conifers . 290

Schroder, B. — Mucin 291

Linsbauer, L. — Formation of Anthocyan 427

Molisch, H. — Latex and Mucilage- Sup .. .. 427

CLAtTRiAU, G. — Nature of the Vegetable Alkaloids .. 428

Miyare, K. — Starch in Evergreen Leaves 428

Schlotterbeck, J. 0. — F ' rotopine-bearing Plant 428

Tailleur, P. — Glycoside present during Germination in the Beech 428

Parkin, J. — Reserve Carbohydrate producing [ Mannose 428

Winterstein, E. — Nitrogenous Contents of Green Leaves 549

Molisch, H. — New Chromogen producing a Red Pigment 549

Vines, S. H. — Leptomin 549

Weiss, K. — Albuminoids of the Seeds of Leguminosve 658

Schunck, C. A. — Yellow Colouring Matters of Leaves 658

Kirkwood, J. E., & W. J. Giks — hndosperm and Milk of the Cocoa-nut 659

Starke, J. — Solanine in Tobacco-Seeds 659

Hombergeb, K. — Barium in Plants 659

Labaud, L. — Zinc in Plants 659

(3) Structure of Tissues.

Bonnier, G. — Order of Formation of the Elements of the Central Cylinder in the

Root and Stem 51

Hering, L. — Anatomy of MonopodialjOrchids 51

Cannon, W. A. — Gall of the Monterey Pine 52

Bonnier, G. — Differentiation of the Vascular Tissues in the Leaf and the Stem .. 170

Plot, L. — Common Origin of the Tissues of the Leaf and Stem in Phanerogams .. 170

Busse, W. — Conducting Tissue in the Ovary of Orchidese 170

Brenner, W. — Succulent Plants 170

Chacykaud, G. — Structure of Vascular Plants 291

Baranetzky, J. — " Bicollateral Bundles" 291

Gaucher, L. — Function of Laticifers 291

Chauyeaud, M. G. — Formation of Sieve-Tubes in the Roots of Dicotyledons .. .. 292

Will, A. — Duramen and Dealing-Tissue .. 292

Sargant, Ethel — New Type of Transition from Stem to Root 292

Dorner, Herman B. — Resin- Ducts and Strengthening-Cells of Abies and Picea . . 293
Matruchot, L., & M. Molliard — Injury to Vegetable Cells caused by Cold, Plas-

molysis, and Desiccation 293

Goebel, K. — Structure of the Malaxidex .. .. 293

Wallace, W. — Stem-structure of Aetinostemma biglandulosa 293

Jost, L. — Peculiarities in the Cambium of Trees 428

Decrock, E. — Anatomy of the Primulacese 429

Nemec, B. — Effect of Low Temperatures on Meristematic Tissues 549

Petersen, O. G. — Sanio's Tracheids 550

Guignard, L. — Laticifers of Euonymus 550

Col, M. — Secreting Apparatus of Composite 550

Hill, T. G. — Stem of Dalbergia paniculata 550

Bargagli-Petrucci, G — Stomatiferous Cavities in the Leaves of Ficus 659

Mangin, L. — Production of Gummy Thyllx 660

Thiskltox-Dyer, W. T. — Persistence of Leaf-traces 660

Vidal, L. — Apex of the Axis in the Floioer of Gamopetalx 660

Perredes, Pierre E. F., & F. B. Power — Bark of Robinia Pseudacacia .. . . 660

Ursprung, A. — Formation of Annual Rings in Tropical Trees 660

Gioon, F. — Conducting Apparatus of Nyctaginese 661

(4) Structure of Organs.

Ule, E. — Underground Flowers 52

Villani, A. — Nectaries of the Cruciferx 52

Arcangeli, G. — Nectaries of the Cucurbitacfiii 52

CONTENTS. XX111

l'AOE

Lendner — Colour of Juniper-" Berrie* " 53

Pitard, A. — Anatomy of Pedicels . . 53

Murbach, L. — Mechanism of the Awns of Stipa 53

Chooat, R. — Colour of Box-leaves 53

Roux, J. A. Cl. — Chlorosis caused by the Nature of the Soil 53

Molliard — Viridescence and Fasciation caused by a Parasite 54

Kuhne, E — Stomates on the Upper Side of Leaves 54

Chodat, R., & Bernard— Stomates of the Box 54

Devaux, H. — Lenticels 54

Terras, J. A. — Relation between Lenticels and Adventitious Boots in Solanum

Dulcamara 55

Hirsch, W.— Development of Hairs 55

Keller, Ida A. — Structure of Hyacinth Boots 55

Bernard, N. — Formation of Tubercles in Plants 55

Mattirolo, O. — Influence of the Bemoval of the Flowers on the Boot-tubercles of the

Leguminosm 55

Barnhart, J. H. —Heteromorphic Flowers of Helianthemum 171

Ludwig, F. — Bud-blossoming of Deutzia gracilis ... 171

Hayek, A. vox — Peculiarity of Alpine Composite 171

Tieghem, Ph. van — Inversion of the Ovule in Statice .. .. .... 171

Pammel, L. H. — Seeds of Leguminosse .. .. 171

Raciborski — Branching of the Vegetative Organs ... .. .. .. 172

Arnoldi, W. — Causes of the Vernation of Leaves 1"2

Perrot, E. — Appendicular Organs of the Leaves of Myriophyllum 172

Macohiati. L. — Glandular Hairs of Salvia glutinosa 172

Preston, C. E. — Roots of Cad aceae 172

Beulaygue, L. — Influence of Darkness on the Development of Flowers 293

Lovell, J. H. — Colour of Apetalous Flowers 294

Schwendener, S. — Divergences in the Co pituJe of the Sunflower 294

Lindman, C. A. M. — Amphicarpous Plants .. .. 294

Celakovsky, L. J. — Fruit-scales of Coniferx .. ... .... .. 294

Velenovsky. J. — Axillary Buds of the Hornbeam 295

Linsbauer, L. — Translucency of Leaves 295

I.indman, C. A. M. — Morphology of Tropical Leaves 295

Thomas, J. — Underground Leaves 295

Tbupe, H. — Variegation . . . . 296

Ledoux P. — Phyllodes of Acacia 296

Fritsch, K. — Tendrils of Lathy r us 296

Dale, Elizabeth — Outgroirths of Hibiscus vitifolius .. .. 296

Gatn, E. — Tricotyledony 296

Hiltner, L. — Boot-Tubercles of the Leguminosse 297

Passerini, N.— Boot-Tubercles of Medicago saliva 297

Bernard, N. — Tuberculi sat ion of the Potato 298

Petrucci, G. B. — Anatomy of Phoenix dactylifera and Chamserops humilis .. .. 298
Meissner, R. — Relationship between the Length of the Stem and of the Leaves in

Conifer se 429

Warming, E. — Forms of Leaves 429

Winkler, 14. — Theory of Phyllotaxis .. 429

Rodrigue — Variegated Leaves .... 430

Goffart, J. — Organs of Exudation . 4HO

Freidenfelt, 'J'. —Boots of Herbaceous Plants .... 430

Life, A. C. — Tuberous Rootlets of Cycas .. 430

Coulter, J. M., & C. J. Chamberlain — Morphology of Gymnosperms 431

Burgerstein, A. — Opening and Closing of Flowers 550

Beille, L. — Floral Organs of the Disciflorie 551

Malme, G. O. A. — Inflorescence of the Asclepiadeie .. 551

Cavara. F. — Heterogyny of Ephedra campylopoda 551

Frier, R. — Pappus of Composite 551

Burkill, I. II. — Ovary of Par nassia .... .... 552

Heckel, E. — Seed of Hernandia 552

Westermaier. M. — P ueumatophores 552

Dubard, M. — Structure of the Sprouts of Woody Plants 552

XXIV CONTENTS.

pack

Lang, F. X. — Polypompholyx and Byblis 552

Weberbaueb, A. — Fruit of the Scrophulariacese 661

Billings, F. H. — Structure of Seeds 661

Peirce, G. J. — Suckers of Sequoia sempervirens 661

Schwendeneb, S., & H. Winkles — Theory of Phyllotaxis 662

liiNZi:, G. — Unfolding of Leaves 662

<;< iebel, K.—" Fore-runner Point" of Leaves 662

Meyer, W. — Anatomy of Caryophyllacese and Primulacefe 662

0. Physiolog-y-
(.1) Reproduction and Embryology.

Dangeard, P. A. — Sexual Reproduction 56

Strasburger, E. — Double Impregnation in Angiosperms 57

Thomas, Ethel N. — Double Impregnation in Caltha 57

Arnoldi, W. — Archegones and, Pollen-tubes of Sequoia 57

Burgagli, Marchese, & G. W. Okd — Cross-Pollination and Self -Pollination .. 58

Werth, E. — Or nithophilous Flowers 58

Sablon, Leclebc du — Cleistogamous Flowers 58

Hildebrand, F. — Hybridisation of Hepatica .. .. 59

Tieghem, Ph. van — Female Prothallium of the Stigmatx 173

Land, W. J. G. — Double Fertilisation in Composite 173

Brunotte, 0. — Embryogeny of Impatiens and Tropxolum 174

Burns, G. P. — Fertilisation of Stylidiacese 174

Lotsy, J. P. — Embryology and Fertilisation of Rhopalocnemis 174

Chodat, R., & C. Bernard — Embryo-sac of Helosis 175

(Jelakovsky. L. J. — Multiplication of the Sporanges in Salisburia 175

Strasburger, S. — Distribution of the Sexes in Dioecious Plants 176

ROSSLER, W. — Cleistogamous Floicers 176

(Jorrens, 0. — Influence of the Number of Pollen-grains on Fertilisation 176

Macchiati, L., & others — Cross-Pollination and Self-PoUination .. .. ■■ 177

Vries, Hugo de — Unequal Results of Hybridisation 177

Ernst, A. — Polyembryony 298

Juel, H. O. — Formation of Tetrads 299

Murrill, W. A. — Development of the Archegone and Impregnation in Tsuga

canadensis 299

Ernst, A. — Embryo-sac and Embryo of Tulipa .. .. 300

Sajo, K. — Crossing of Varieties 300

Johow, F. — Ornithophilous Flowers .. .. 301

Fritsch, K. — Gynodicecism of Myosotis palustris 301

Garjeanne, A. J. M. — Proterogyny of Lychnis flos-cuculi HOI

Sarg ant, Ethel — Impregnation in Angiosperms 301

Pirotta, R., & B. Longo — Basigamy, Acrogamy, a7id Mesogamy 431

Jiel, H. O. — Parthenogenesis in Antennaria alpina 431

Murbeoe, Sv. — Parthenogenesis and Chalazogamy in Alchemilla 432

Tischler, G. — Development of the Endosperm and Testa of Corydalis 432

Longo, B. — Impregnation in Cucurbita Pepo 433

Dumee, P. — Embryo-sac of Orchidese 433

Cavaua, F. — Oogenesis in Abies pectinata 434

Cokes, W. C. — Gametophyte and Embryo of Taxodium .. .. 434

Werth, E., & F. Daul— Visits of Birds to Flowers 435

Burck, W. — Protection against the Germination of Foreign Pollen 435

Kobnioke, M. — Division of Embryo-sac Mother-cells 553

Campbell, D. H. — Embryo-sac of Peperomia 553

Taliew, W., & others— Cross-Pollination and SelJ '-Pollination 554

Marloth, R. — Ornithophilous Plants 555

Tschermak, E. — Hybridisation of Peas and Beans 555

Klebs, G. — Physiology of Reproduction 555

Gdignabd, L. — Double Fertilisation in Maize 662

Lyon, H. L. — Embryology of Nelumbium 663

Dunn. Louise B. — Embryo-sac of Delphinium ^o

Hewins, Nellie P. — Embryology of the Caprifoliaceas <',63

CONTENTS. XXV

IWCiR

Ikeno, S. — Fertilisation of Salisburia 061

Holfeuty, G. M. — Ovule and Embryo of Potamogefon .. ■ 064

LoNQO, B. — Endotropio Course of the 1'nlli it-tiihi- 664

Ferguson, M. 0. — Pollen-tube of Pinus 064

(2) Nutrition and Growth (including- G-ermination,
and Movements of Fluids).

Waller, A. D. — Electrical Effect of Light upon Green Leaves 59

Seelhorst, — . v. — Influence of the Water of the Soil on the Development of Plant* 59

Volkaert, A. — Parasitism of Pedicular is 60

Heckel, E. — Parasitism of Ximenia americana 60

Rimpacu, A. — Germination of some Perennial Herbs 60

Terras, J. A. — Germination of the Winter-buds of Hydrocharis Morsus-Ranx .. 60

Schloesing, Th., Fils — Absorption of Nitrogen by Plants 61

Daniel, L. — Conditions for successful Grafting 178

RicC.me, H. — Development of Etiolated Plants when replaced in the Light . . .. 178

Prianischnikow, D. — Absorption of Phosphoric Acid by Plants 179

Hildebrand, F. — Germination of Hxmanthus tig rinus 179

Friedel, J. — Influence of Pressure on Chlorophyll Assimilation 301

Tompa, A. — Grafting of the Vine 302

Kovessi, M. L. — Ripening of Shoots of the Vine 302

Waller, A. D.— Vitality of Seeds 302

Boehm, M., & others — Sensitiveness of Plants to Mineral Substances 302

Goldflus, M. — Chlorophyll-Assimilation through the Bark 43G

Friedel, J. — Chlorophyll-Assimilation outside the Living Plant 436

Beijerinck, W., & K. Latjbert — Cytisus Adami 436

Kraetzer, A. — Growth in Length of Petals and Fruit . .. 436

Laurent, E. — Grafting the Potato on the Potato 436

Preston, E. — Non-sexual Propagation of Opuntia .. .. 437

Nabokich, A. — Capacity of Plants to live without Oxygen .. . 555

Czapek, F. — Carbon-dioxide Assimilation of Leaves in Winter 555

Arber, E. A. N. — Effect of Mineral Salts on Assimilation 556

TJrsprung, A. — Excentric Growth in Thickness 556

Coupin, H. — Sensitiveness of Plants to small amounts of Potassium Salts .. .. 556

Andre, G. — Absorption of Phosphorus and Sulphur during Germination .. .. 556

Jencic, A. — Action of Low Temperatures on the Germination of Seeds 556

Watson, W. — Germination of Bertholetia 557

Burgerstein, A. — Recent Work on Transpiration 557

Dixon, H. PL.— Vitality of Seeds 665

Tammes, T. — Influence of the Solar Rays on the Germination of Seeds 6ti5

Kovessi, F. — Ripening of Shoots of the Vine 066

Kusano, S. — Parasitism of Buckleya 066

Hammerle, J. — Periodicity in the Growth of the Root 666

Macmillan, C. — Periodic Growth in the Potato 606

Fuchs, K. — Movement of Water in Plants 606

Curtis, C. C. — Transpiration and the Resistance of Stems 006

(3)] rritability.

Nemec, B., & G. Haberlandt — Perception of Geotropic Irritation 61

Czapek, F. — Geotropic Sensitiveness of the Root-tip 179

Usteri, A. — Irritability of the Stamens of Berber is 179

Livingston, B. E. — Nature of the Stimulus which causes the Change of Form in

Polymorphic Green Algm 1 79

Montemartini, L. — Sensitiveness of the Nodes of Grasses 3u3

Gcillon, J. M. — Geotropism of the Roots of the Vine 303

Nemec, B. — Perception of Gravitation by Plants 437

Darwin, F. — Geotropic Function of the Hoot-tip 437

Pantanelli, E. — Motile Cushions of Robinia and Porliera 437

Neljcbow, D. — Horizontal Nutation of the Stem of Pisum sativum, &c 437

GtIOVAnnozzi, U. — Hygroscopic Movements in Plants 557

XXVI CONTENTS.

PAGE

Nemec, B. — Plagiotropic Change of Orthotropous Roots 558

,, „ & G-. Haberlandt — Conduction of Irritation in Plants 667

Rothert, W. — Phenomena of Tactic Sensitiveness 667

Borzi, A. — Senso-motory Apparatus of the Tendrils of Cucurbitaceee 66S

Pantanelli, E. — Motile Cushions of Bobinia and Porliera 669

Minden, von — Sensitive Style of Arctotis 669

Copeland, E. B. — Geotropism of Stems 669

(4) Chemical Changes (including Respiration and Fermentation).

Prianischnikow, D. — Influence of Temperature on the Decomposition of Albumen . . 61

Epstein, S. — Lactic Acid Fermentation 62

Kozai, Y. — Preparation of Sake" . . 62

Andre, Ot. — Chemical Transformations during the Development of the Burl .. 180

Pollacci, G. — Photosynthesis . .. 180

Maliniak, M. — Formation of Albuminoid Substances in the Dark .180

Lotsy, J. P. — Formation of the Cwchona Alkaloids 180

Gruss, J. — Production of Transitory Starch 181

Kraemer, H. — Origin of Tannin in Galls 181

Ortloff, H. — Influence of Carbonic Acid on Fermentation 181

Jensen, O. — Enzymes in Cheese 181

Babcock, S. M., & H. L. Russell — Belation of Bennet Enzymes to Bipening of

Cheddar Cheese * .. 182

Klocker, A. — Formation of Enzymes in Alcoholic Ferments 182

Pdriewitsch, K. — Bespiration of Plants 303

Bokornt, Th. — Sensitiveness of Ferments and Protoplasm to Physical and Chemical

Agencies 304

Schulze, E., & Itvanoff — Formation of A spar agin and Proteids in Plants . . .. 43S
Palladine, W. — Influence of Nutrition by various organic substances on the Bespira-
tion of Plants 438

Andre, G. — Migration of Ternary Substances in Annual Plants 439

Benecke, W. — Halophytes and their Chlorine-contents 439

Prior, E., & H. Schulze — Physics of Fermentation .. .. 439

Zaleski, W. — Formation of Proteids in Plants .. .. 558

Shibata, K. — Growth of the Bamboo 558

Peirce, G. J. — Normal and Intramolecular Bespiration •• •. 558

Kolkwitz, R. — Bespiration of Dormant Seeds 559

Gehber, C. — Bespiration of the < Hive 559

Morris, G. H. — Combined Action of Diastase and Yeast, on Starch-Granules .. .. 559

Iwanoff, L. — Appearance and Disappearance of Phosphorus-Compounds .. .. 669

Hettlinger, A. — Influence of Injury to the Tissues on the Production of Proteids . . 670

Bourquelot, E., & H. Herisset — Germination of Phoenix canariensis 670

Eijkmann, C. — Enzymes of Bacteria and. Moulds 670

Purjewicz, K. — Bespiration of Plants 671

Godlewski, E., & F. Polzeniusz — Intramolecular Bespiration and Production of

Alcohol by Seeds placed in water 671

Morkowine, N. — Influence of the Alkaloids on Bespiration 671

7-

General.

Scott's" Fossil Botany 62

Macchiati, L. — Aphides and Flowers 182

Taliew, W. — Myrmecophilous Plants .. .. 182

Daniel, L. — Effect of Annular Decortication on Herbaceous Plants 182

Ludwig, F. — Slime on Trees 183

Woods, Albert F. — Stigmonose 183

Moll, J. W.—Mufaf ion Theory 439

Passerini, N. — Development of Heat by Plants 440

Wjasemsky, T. — Influence of the Electric Current on the Resistance of Vegetable

Tissues to Conduct /an 44

Townsend, C. 0). — Effect of Hydrocyanic Acid Gas on Seeds 440

Wettstein, R. v. — Production of New Forms 559

Ule, E.— Ant-Gardens 672

CONTENTS. XXV11

l'ACK

KRONFELD, M. — Contrivances for Distribution in Plants 672

d'Arsonval, M. — Osmotic Pressure as a Defence against Cold .. .. 672

B. CRYPTOGAMIA.

Seckt, H. — Phyllotaxis in Musci and Florideas 672

Bohlin, K. — Phytogeny of the Green Algae and Archegoniatse 673

Cryptogamia Vascularia.

Scott, D. H.. & T. G. Hill— Structure of Isoetes 62

Boodle, L. A. — Anatomy of the Hymenophyllacese ... .63

Shove, R. F. — Stem of Angiopteris .. .. 63

Thom, C. — Fertilisation in Aspidium and Adiantnm 183

Palisa, J. — Regenerating Buds of Cystopteris 183

Smith, R. Wilson — Achromatic Spindle in the Spore-mother-cells of Osmunda .. 184

Scott, D. H. — Fructification of Palkozoic Lycopods 184

Buller, A. H. R. — Spermatozoids of Ferns 304

Britton, Elizabeth G., & Alexandrina Taylor — Schizxa pusilla 304

Dangeard, P. A. — Relation of the Zoospore to the Spermatozoid 440

Gwynne-Vaughan, D. T., & K. Giesenhagen — Anatomy of Loxsoma 560

Chauveaud, G. — Roots of Vasctdar Cryptogams 673

Goebel, K. — Sporange and Inflorescence of Selaginella 674

Bower, F. O. — Imperfect Sporanges in Pteridophyta 674

Boodle, L. A. — Anatomy of the Schizseacese 674

Muscineae.

Fleischer — Ephemeropsis Tjibodensis Goeb. 185

Braithwaite's British Moss-Flora 185

Van Hook, J. M. — Cell- and Nuclear-Division in Hepaticse 185

Muller, K. — Classification of Mosses . . . . 305

Geneau de Lamarliere, L., & J. Mareu — Cave Mosses 441

Geheeb, A. — Fossil Moss 441

Warnstorf, C. — Rhizoid-rudiments on the Ventral Scales of Marchantiacese .. .. 441

Tansley, A. G., & Edith Chick — Conducting Tissue-System of Bryophyta .. .. 5R0

Dayis, B. M., & J. B. Farmer — Nuclear Division in Pellia 561

Schiffner, V. — Makinoa 562

Stephani, F. — Elaterophores of Calycularia 562

Massolongo, 0. — Viviparity in a Liverwort 562

Cardot, J. — Anatomy of the Leucobryaceie. 675

Characeae.

Ernst, A. — Pseudo- Hermaphroditism in Nitella 305

Giesenhagen, K. — Geotropic Curvature of the Roots of Chara 562

Algae.

Chodat, R.— Cell-Division in Fresh-water Ahjsc 63

Batters, E. A. L. — New Genera of Floridese, 63

Heydrich, F. — Classification of Corallinucese 64

biRN, Karl E.— GUdogoniacea: 65

Golenkin — Fertilisation of Sphieroplca. 65

Winkler, H. — Division of the Oosphere in Cystosira 65

Palmer, T. C. & F. J. Keeley — Structure of the Diatom Girdle 65

Nelson, E. M. — Actinocyclus Ralfsii 66

Schmidt's Atlas der Diatomaceen-Kunde 66

Iwanoff, L. — Stigeoclonium & >

Lemmermann, E., & others — Plankton Algm '17

Dangeard, P. A. — Development 'of Pandorin a morum 67

Gaidukoy, N. — Chromulina Rosanoflii 68

Moore, T. — Chlorocystis Cohnii Reinhardt 68

Agardh's Analecta Algologica 185

■XXV 111 CONTENTS.

Kosenyinge, L. Kolderit — Wiodocliorton islandicum, a new) terrestrial Floridea 18t">

Hirn, Karl E. — Rings in (Edogonium 187

Macmillan. C. — Bessonia 187

Wisselingh, C. yan — Nuclear Division in Spirogyra 187

„ „ Multinucleated Cells of spirogyra 187

Norlhausen — Branching of Cladophora and of some Monosiphonous Algse. .. . . 18S

Winkler. H., & F. Noll — Polarity and Regeneration of Bryopsis 188

C'hodat, R., & Cretier — Nuclei of the Bower Algse 188

Chodat, R., & Grintzesco — Pure Cultures of the Bower Algee 189

Matrixhot, L., & Molltard — Variations in the Structure of a Green Alga in

Different Media 18!'

Barton, Ethel, S. — Galls on Seaweeds 305

Hansteen, B. — Fucosan 306

Muller, O. — Chambers and Pores in the Cell-wall of Diatoms 300

Voigt, M. — Gelatinous Membrane of Diatoms 306

Benecke, W. — Colourless Diatoms 306

Gran, H. H. — Arctic Diatoms •• ■• 307

Schmidle, W. — Gongrosira 307

„ „ Coccomyxa g. n 307

Z^charias, O. — Winter-Plankton of Barger and Smaller Balces 307

Blackman, F. F. — Primitive Algx and Flagellata 308

Trotter, A. — Galls on Algse 441

Sebor, J. — Carbohydrate of Carrageen-moss 442

Timberlake, H. G. — Swarmspore Formation in Hydrodictyon 442

Richards, H. M. — Ceramothamnion, a Neiv Genus of Floridese 562

Heydrich, F. — Tetrasporange of Polysiphonia 563

Mt ller, O. — Cltambers and Pores in the Cell-wall of Diatoms 563

Foslie, M. — Melobesiese 675

Letts & J. Hawthorne — Uha lalissima and its relation to the Pollution of Sea-
Water 676

Merbeck, S. — Dictyosiphon 676

Bessey, C. E. — Classification of Desmidiacese 676

Keeley, F. — Structure of Diatoms 676

Liburnau, Lorenz y. — JEgagropila 677

Prowasek, S. — Transplantation and Structure of Protoplasm in Bryopsis .. .. 677

Howe, M. A. — Acicularia and Acetabulum 677

Galdieri, G. A. — Thermal Alga 677

Fungi.

Dangeard, P. A. — Sexual Reproduction in Fungi 68

Wehmer, C. — Chinese Yeast and Amylomyces 68

Brefeld, O. — Parasitism of the Ustilagineas 69

Penzig, O. — Mycosyrinx 69

Harper, R. A. — Sexual Reproduction in Pyronema and the Morphology of the

Ascocarp 69

Starback, K., & others — New Genera of Fungi 70

Salmon, E. S. — Erysiphacex 72

Beauverie, J., & C. Yaney — Isaria arbuscula 72

Salmon, E. S., & others — Parasitic Fungi 72

Macfadyen, A., & others — Expressed Yeast-cell Plasma 72

Allescher, A. — RabenhorsVs Cry ptogamic Flora of Germany 73

Scofield, C. S. — Dictyophora Ravenelii 73

Dangeard, P. A. — Reproduction of Polyphagus Euglenx 189

Raciborski & others — New Genera of Fungi 189

Rothwell, T. A. — Experimental Aspergillosis 190

Teknetz, Charlotte — Movements of the Protoplasm and Formation of Hie Repro-
ductive Organs in Ascophanus car neus 190

Montemartini, L. — Structure of the Melanconiese 190

Hodson, E. R., & others — Parasitic Fungi l !)l

Schrenck, H. yon — Fungus Diseases of Conifers 192

CONTENTS. XXIX

Gobi, C. — Fungi Parasitic on Green Alga 192

Hansex, E. C. — Variation of Saccharomyces 192

Maibe, JJ. — Cytology of the Gasteromyeetes .. 192

Klocker, A., & II. ISciiionning — Boring Growth and the Abnormal Formation of

Conids in Dematium pullulans 19$

Magnus, Werner — Endotrophic Mycorhiza of Neottia nidus-avis 193

Kohnstamm, P. — Enzymes of Fungi ■• • 308

Sitnikoff, A., & W. Rommel — Amylomyces 308

Descours-Desacke, M. — Propagation of Nedria ditissitna 308

Golden, K. E. — Saccharomije.es anomalus 309

„ „ Proteolytic Enzyme of Yeast 309

Bokorny, Th. — Sensitiveness of certain Yeast Enzymes to Protoplasm Poisons . . 309

Klein, E. — Pathogenic Yeast in Milk - 309

Meissnek, R. — Appearance and Disappearance of Glycogen in the Yeast-cell .. .. 309

Guilliekmond, M. — Oidiumlactis 310

Klebahn, H. — Culture of Dredinem 310

Brunstein, A. — Decomposition of Glucosides by Mould-Fungi 310

Gueguen, F. — Myceles in Pharmaceutical Solutions 310

Thiselton-Dyer, W. T., & A. Howard — Sugar-Cane Diseases 310

Guilliekmond, M. — Structure of the Lower Fungi •. •• 311

Pirotta, R., & A. Albini — Development of Terfezia 311

Lagerheim, G. — New Fungus Pathogenic to Tylenchus agrostidis 311

Duggar, B. M. — Germination of Fungus-spores 442

Smith, Mary H. — Sources of Nitrogen for Fungi 442

Hennings, P., & others — New Genera of Fungi 442

Berlese, A. N. — Peronosporacem 443

Pall a, E. — Pilobolus 443

luVDu'R.— Chytridiacex 443

Jaczewski, A. von, & others — Parasitic Fungi 444

Gcilliermond, A — Histological Researches on the Sporulation of Yeasts .. . . 445

Kayser, E. — Intracellular Nutrition of Yeast 445

Hennings, P. — Adaptation of the Urediueas to their Substratum 445

Gobi, C. — Fulminaria mucophila g.n 445

Maire, R. — Cytology of the Hymenomycetes 446

Marpmann, G. — Merulius lacrymans 446

Kindermann. V. — " Bleeding" of Stereum sanguinolentum 446

Biffen, R. H. — Spore-formation of Acrospeira 446

Foulerton A. — Sporothrix Schenckii 447

M" Alpine, D. — Phosphorescent Fungi 564

Went, F. A. F. O. — Enzyme of Monilia sitophila 564

Dangeard, P. A. — Sporange of Cystopus Tragopogonis 564

(i ruber, E. — Behaviour of tlie Cell-nucleus in the Zygospores of Sporodinia grandis . . 564

Kolkwitz, R. — Biology of Leptomitus lacteus 56."!

Dangeard, P. A. — Tihizophagus populinus 565

„ „ Chytridium transversum 565

Biffen, R. H. — Biology of Bulgaria 5H5

Thaxter, R. — New Genus and Species of Laboulbeniacex 565

Barker, B. T. P. — Conjugating Yeast, Zygosaccharomyces g. n. 565

Guilliermond, A. — Sporulation of Schizosaccharomycetes 566

Lindner, P. — Fermentation Experiments with Different Yeasts and Sugars .. .. 567

Bokorny, Th. — Albumin in Yeast 567

IjOMMEL — Yeast Cultivated from Intestinal Contents .. 567

Arthur, J. G, & others — Parasitic Fungi 567

Fischer, E. — Vredinese 568

Allescher, A. — Babenhorst's Cryptogamie Flora of Germany. &c. (Fungi im-

perfecti) 568

Banker, H. J. — Hydnum 568

Hesselman, II . — Mycorhiza of Arctic Plants 568

Vuillemin, P. — Trichosporum Beigelii 56'.)

Oltmanns, F. — Sexuality of Fungi 677

Moller, A. — Phycomycetes and Ascomycetes 678

Trow, A. H. — Biology and Cytology of Pythium ultimum sp. n 67S

XXX CONTEXTS.

PAGE

Wildeman, E. de — New Chytridiacex 079

Lesage, P. — Germination of the Spores of Penic ill turn 679

Wehmbr, C. — Aspergillus 679

Neger, F. W. — Biology of the Erysiphem 679

Gosio, B. — Arsenic Fungi 680

Massee, G., & E. S. Salmon — Coprophilous Fungi 680

Patouillakd, N., & others — New Genera of Fungi 681

Ikeno, S. — Formation of Spores in Taphrina 681

Boudier, E., & others — Parasitic Fungi 682

Baur, E. — Origin and Development of the Apothece of Lichens 683

Wehmer, C, & T. Chrzaszcz — Chinese Yeast .." 683

Holtz, W., & F. Ludwig — Fungus-slime of Trees 683

Maopadyen, A. — Agglutination of Yeast ' 6S4

Droba, St. — Place of the Parasite of Tuberculosis among Fungi 684

Pound, R. — Sterigmatocystis Candida Saccardo 684

Vuillemin, P. — Microspore um Audouini 684

Mycetozoa.

Gorini, C. — Mycetozoic Infection of the Cornea 74

Harper, W. A. — Cell and Nuclear Division in Fuligo carta us 194

Tovmey, J. W.— Crown- Gall 194

Sturgis, W. C. — Type-Specimens of Myxomycetes 311

Olive, E. W. — Affinities of the Mycetozoa 447

Ensch, N. — Culture of Myxomycetes 447

Harshberger, J. W. — Feeding Plasmodes of Fuligo 447

Jaiin, E. — Dictydium unibilicatum 569

Protophyta.

a. Schizophyceae

Zopf, W. — Polycystin 312

Wille, N. — Chlorogloza, a New Genus of Cyanophyceie 312

(Juodat, R. — New Genera of Prolococcoidex 448

Macchiati, L. — Phormidium 448

Brand, F. — Boundary-cells and Cell-contents of the Cyanophyceie 570

Moore, G. T. — Eremosphsera viridis 684

Hegler, R. — Cell-structure of Phycochromacese (jCyanophycese) .. .. .. .. 684

Bouilhac, It. — Nostoc punctiforme 685

B. Sckizomycetes.

Maux, H., & F. Woithe — Colourable Granules in the Bacterial Cell 74

Cowie, D. M. — Occurrence of Acid-resisting Bacilli in the Lower Animals .. .. 74

Aoyama & Miyamoto — New Patliogenic Streptothrix 74

Klein, E. — 1'ico new Pyogenic Microbes 74

Weinzirl, J. — Bacterial Flora of American Cheddar Cheese 75

Hellstrom, F. E. — Bacillus microbutyricus 75

Schipin, D. — Koumiss Bacillus .. 75

Thomann, J.— Microbe of Stringy Bread 76

Lubarsch, O. — Tubercle Bacilli in Frogs 76

Flexner, S. — JEtiology of Tropical Dysentery 76

Bern ivr, E. — Changes in Anthrax in Decomposing Blood 77

Danysz, J. — Immunisation of Anthrax against Rat Serum 77

Nikolsky — Feeding Animals on Food contaminated with Anthrax Spore* .. .. 77

Matzuschita, T. — Lass of Liquefactive Power of Anthrax 77

Merlin, A. A. — Structural Division of the Endoplasm in Plague Bacilli .. .. 78

(Jaldas, P. — Relations of the Coli Bacillus to Plague and Yelloio Fever .. . . . . 78

Hayashi, H.— Chemical Nature of Tetanus Toxin 78

Mi'LLER, P. — Bactericidal and Agglutinative Properties of Pyocyaneus Serum .. 78

Strada, F., & R. Traina — Bacterium pneumonia caviarum 78

CONTENTS. XXXI

Uobbett, L. — Diphtheria in Horses 79

Cottet, J., & H. Tissier — Streptococcus decolorised by Gram's Method 79

Napias — Action of Anthrax on Carbohydrates 79

Mayer, G. — Effect of Acid-resisting Bacteria of the Tubercle Group on Animals .. 79

Esuheuich — ^Etiology of Dysentery 80

Cantani, A., Jun. — Influence of One Organism on the Growth of Another .. .. J 94

Jordan, E. 0. — Bacterial Self -Purification of Streams 195

Hansen, E. C. — Vitality of Acetifying Bacteria 195

Kalischer, 0. — Biology of Peptonizing Milk Bacteria 195

Hefferan, Mary — New Chromogenic Micrococcus 195

Chodat, R., & N. 0. Hofman-Bang — Lactic Acid Bacteria and Cheese Ripening . . 196
Schierbeue, N. P. — Variability in Lactic Acid Bacteria in relation to their Fer-
mentative Power 196

Smith, R. Greig — Bacterial Flora of the Sydney Water Supply 196

Weinzirl, J. — Bacterial Flora of New Mexico 197

Stein, W. — Bacteriology of Ozsena 197

Ramrousek, J. — Diagnosis of Bacterium typhi from Barter ium coli 198

Rf.my, L. — Antagonism of the Bacillus coli and the Bacillus typhosus 198

Reed, W., & J. Carroll — Relations of Bacillus X, Bacillus icteroides, and the

Bacillus of Hog-Cholera 198

Oalli-Valerio, B. — Morphology of the Plague Bacillus and Transmission of the

Bacterium by the Fleas of Mice and Rats 1 99

Leent, J. B. van — Behaviour of Anthrax in the Peritoneal Sac 199

Bibliography 199

Smith, Lorrain, A. — Myxobacteria .. .. 312

Macfadyen, A. — Effect of Physical Agents on Bacterial Life .. .. .. .. 312

Burrage, S. — Insects as Factors in the Spread of Bacterial Diseases 312

Ransome, A., & A. G. R. Follerton — Influence of Ozone on some Pathogenic and

other Bacteria 312

Scholt, A. — Penetration of the Intestinal Wall by Bacteria 313

Schmidt-Nielsen, S. — Biology of Marine Bacteria .. .. 313

Matzuschita, Teisi — New Bacteria 313

Lagerheim, G. — Sai-cinastruin Urosporx g. et sp. n 315

Stutzer, A., & R. Hartleb — Micro-organisms of Nitre-formation 315

Wright, A. E. — Bactericidal Power of the Blood 316

Oarriere, G. — Soluble Ferment 'in Cultures of Bacillus tuberculosis 316

Klein, E. — Pathogenic Microbes in Milk 316

Smith, E. F. — Pseudomonas hyacinthi 317

Potter, M. C, & others — Bacterial Disease of the Turnip 317

Jones, L. R. — Bacillus car otovor us s p. n 318

Chamot, E. M., & G. Thiry — Pigment of Bacillus polychromogenes 318

Durham, H. E., & W. Myers — New Bacterium found in Yellow Fever 318

Grimbekt, L. — Production of Acetylmethylcarbinol by Bacillus tartar icus .. .. 318

Bezancon & others — Cultures of the Microbe of the Soft Chancre 319

Addario, C — Bacteriological Investigations on Trachoma 319

Berard, L., & J. Nicolas— Resistance of Spores of Actinomyces 319

Schultz, N. K. — Vitality of the Plague Bacillus 319

Uhlenhuth & A. Westphal — Distribution of Leprosy Bacilli 319

Mayer, G. — Morphology of the Glanders Bacillus 320

Nepfeld, L. — Smegma Bacilli 320

Copeman, S. M. — Micro-organism of Distemper and Distemper Vaccine 320

Lode, A. — Immunity of Mice to Micrococcus tetragenus 320

Bibliography 320

Beijerinck, M. W. — Hereditary Varicdion of Microbes 448

Bendix, E. — Chemistry of Bacteria 448

Matzuschita, T. — Influence of Temperature and Nutriment on the Motility of

Bacteria 449

Saltet, R. H. — Reduction of Sulphates in Brackish Water by Bacteria 449

Ford, W. W. — Aerobic Spore-bearing. Bacilli 449

Reich enbach, H. — Branching of Spirilla 449

Stutzer, A. — Organisms of Nitrification 450

Ford, W. W. — Bacteriology of Normal Organs 450

XXX11 CONTEXTS.

PAGE

Beijerinck, M. W. — New Urea-Bacteria 45U

Santschi, F. F. — Parasites on the Seals of " Cabinets d'aisance" 451

Klein, E. — Behaviour of certain Pathogenic Microbes in Milk, Cream, and Cheese . . 451

Thompson, J. A. — ^Etiology of Plague 451

Nicolai, K. H. — Bacteriological Researches on the Boots and Seeds of Hedysarum

coronarium 451

Pierce, Nkwton B. — Bacteriosis of Walnut 452

Ivanowski — Mosaic Disease of the Tobacco Plant 452

Perez, F. — Bacteriology of Ozsena 452

Borrel, A. — Parasitic Theories of Cancer .. .. .. 452

Lewkowicz, X. — Enterococcus of Dysentery 452

Klein, E. — Pseudo-tuberculosis 453

„ „ Negative Acid-fast Phase of Tubercle Bacilli 453

Bodin, E., & C. Lenormand — Production of Casease by a Parasitic Streptothrix .. 453

Harris, N. — New Pathogenic Anaerobic Bacillus 454

Sacquepee, E. — Secondary Infection by Bacillus mesentericus 454

Harden, A. — Chemical Action of Bacillus coli communis and Similar Organic, ms

071 Carbohydrates and Allied Compounds 454

Pakes, W. (J. C. — Life- History of Bacillus coli communis 455

Grimbert, L., & G. Legros — Modification of the Functions of Bacillus coli .. .. 455
Horrocks, W. H. — Varieties of Bacillus coli isolated from Typhoid and Normal

Dejecta 455

Gushing, H. — Pathogenic Bacilli intermediate between the Typhoid and Colon

Groups 455

Martin, T. — Growth of the Typhoid Bacillus in Soil 450

Sacqcepee, E. — Variability of the Agglutinative Aptitude of the Typhoid Bacillus . . 456
Beijerinck, M. W. — Accumulation Experiments with Bacteria Decomposing Car-
bamide 456

Ostrianine — Bactericidal Properties of Blood Serum 457

Tarchanoff, G. — Light of the Phosphorescent Bacteria of the Baltic 570

Smith, E. F. — Bacterial Diseases of Plants 571

Hiltner, L. — Bacteroids of Leguminosx Nodules 571

Rodella, A. — Acidophilus Bacteria .. 571

Klein, E. — Differential Diagnosis of certain Anaerobes 572

Holscher — Acid-fast Tubercle-like Schizomycetes 572

Greig-Smith, R. — Clouding of White Wine 573

„ „ Bacterial Flora of Sydney Water Supply 573

Jordin, E. O. — Relative Abundance of Bacillus coli communis in River Water . . 573
Bertrand, G., & R. Savehnac — Biochemical Difference between tivo principal

Vinegar Ferments 574

Kling, A. — Oxidation of Propylglycol by Mycoderma Aceti 574

Paladino-Blandini — Active Principle of Typhoid Cultures . . . . 574

Rullmann, W. — Bacillus terrestris sporigenes 574

Saul, E. — Morphology of Staphylococcus albus .. .. 574

Greig-Smith, R. — Vibrio bresmix 575

Freymuth — Action of Grass Bacillus ii. on Cold-blooded Animals 575

Arkovt, J., & J. Madzsar — Bacillus gangrasme pulpae 575

Gache, Ar. — Branched Filaments in Diphtheria Cultures 576

Gottstein, A., & H. Michaelis — Destruction of Tubercle Bacilli in Oil 576

Lesage & Delmer — Microbe of the D iarrhcea of Young Calves 576

Edington, A. — Rat Plague 576

Malpeaux, L.— Inoculation of the Soil with Alinit 577

Nakanishi, K. — Structure of Bacteria 685

Geklach & Vogel — Albumen-forming Bacteria 686

Meyer, A. — Branching of Bacteria 687

Beijerinck, M. W. — Oligonitrophilous Microbes and the Genus Azotobacter .. .. 687
Metchnikopf, O. — Influence of Microbes on the Development of Tu dpi >b ■>• .. .. 688
Harrison, F. C. — Ripening of Cheese and the role of Micro-organisms in the process 688
Beijerinck, M. W. — Photo-bacteria as a Reagent in the Investigation of the Chloro-
phyll Function 688

Delacroix, G. — Bacterial Disease of the Potato 689

Ray, M. J. — Bacillus putrefaciens sp. n., a new Parasite on Plants 689

Klett, A.,& E. Jacobitz — Spore-formation of Anthrax under Anaerobic Condition* (89

CONTENTS. XXX111

Lemherhann, O., & others — Be nitrification 689

Zilberberg, A., & J. Zeliony — Negative Chemiotaxis of Leucocytes 690

Harrison, F. C. — Agglutinating Substance 690

Friedberger, E. — Importance of Inorganic Salts and Organic Crystalloids in the

Agglutination of Bacteria 690

Edel, P. — Presence of Typhoid Bacilli in Sputum 690

Moreno, J. M. — Neio Species of Ascobacillus .. 691

Meyer — Bacteriology of Acute Articular Rheumatism 691

De Lille & Jcllien — Bacillus isolated from the Bh>o<l of Syph Hides 691

Galli-Valerio, B. — Colon Bacillus of Hamster 691

Rahnor, R. — Bacterium coli gallinarum 691

Reed, Dorothy M. — Streptothrix from the Pathogenic Action of Bacillus Pseudo-
tuberculosis Murium 692

Bain, J. B. — Pseudotetanus Bacillus 692

Richardson, O. — Pseudopneumococcus 692

Harris, N. M., & W. T. Longcope— Micrococcus zymogenes 692

Harris, N. — Bacillus mortiferus 693

Bibliography 693

Dec. ISth, 1901

XXXI V CONTENTS.

MICROSCOPY.

A. Instruments, Accessories, &c.

(1)J Stands. page

Le Chatelier's Microscope for Examination of Opaque Bodies (Fig. 1) 81

Gilbertson's Microscope (Figs. 2 and 3) 82

Bausch & Lomb's Duplex Substage (Fig. 4) 83

IjEITz' Large Travelling Microscope (Figs. 20 and 21) 200

„ Thermometer Microscope (Fig. 22) 202

„ New Cheap Stand (Fig. 23) 202

Wilson's New Heating Stage (Figs. 39-11) 321

Queen Microscope for Physical Laboratory Metal Examinations (Fig. 95) .. .. 458

Benda, C. — Giinther's New Loup Stand 459

Special Stand and Specimen-holder for the Microscopical Examination of Metals

(Fig. 96) 459

Dippel, L. — Ordinary Microscope arranged for Axial Images of Doubly Refracting

bodies (Fig. 104) .. .' " -'. 578

Zeiss' Focussing Microscopes (Fig. 105) 578

„ Focussing Glass (Fig. 1 0(J) 579

Bibliography 579

Seibert's New Microscope for Crystallography and Petrography (Fig. 144) .. .. 694

Becks' London Microscope (Fig. 145) 694

Baker's Engineering Microscope (Fig. 146) 697

Seibert's New Microscope, No. 5 A (Fig. 147) 697

„ Preparation Microscope (Fig. 148) 699

Marpmann, G. — Micrometer Screws and Fine Adjustments as applied to Modern

Stands (Figs. 149 and 150) ' 699

(2) Eye-pieces and Objectives.

Malassez' New Micrometer Eye-piece (Figs. 42-44) 322

„ Movable Ocular Diaphragms (Figs. 45-50) . . . . 323

Bibliography .. .. 461

Hartwich's New Ocular Micrometer (Figs. 107 and 1 OS) .. 580

„ New Micrometer Ocidar with Fixed Object Stage (Fi^s. 109 and 110) 580

Bibliography .* 581

Kreidl's New Stereoscopic Loup (Figs. 151-154) 701

Seibert's New Demonstration Loup (Fig. 155) 703

Loup Stand (Fig. 156) 703

(3) Illuminating: and other Apparatus.

Ashe's Camera Lucida (Fig. 5) 84

Rousselet, C F. — Electric Focus Lamp for the Microscope (Fig. 6) 86

Ward, R. H. — Resolution of Strise. 86

Druner's New Magnifying Stereoscopic Camera (Fig. 24) 202

Ross' "No. 1 Model" 'Projection Lantern (Fig. 25) 204

„ Arc Lamp " A " (Fig. 26) 206

"-B" 200

„ " Radiant" Jet (Fig. 27) 206

Koristka's Abbe Camera Lucida (Fig. 28) 206

Leitz' Large Project ion Apparatus (Figs. 51 and 52) 325

Liesegang's Universal Projection Apparatus (Fi^s. 53 and 54) 327

Patterson, W. L. — Combined Condenser and Polariser for Petrographical Micro-
scopes (Big. 55) ' 329

Rheinberg, J, — New Arrangement for Viewing Diffraction Spectra (Fig. Ill) .. 582

CONTENTS. XXXV

PAGE

Sanger, Shepherd, & Co.'s Improved Optical Lantern (Fig. 1 12) 582

„ „ „ Safe Lights for Dark Boom Illumination (Fig. 113) .. 583

Muller's Rotary Slide Carrier (Figs. 114 and 115) 583

Berger's Drawing Apparatus for Small Magnification* (Figs. 110 and 117) .. .. 585

Higgins, C. H. — Acetylene Gas for Bacteriological Laboratories 586

Bibliography 587

Seibert's Illuminating Apparatus (Fig. 157) 704

Watson's Universal Condenser (Fig. 158) 704

Seibert's Cylinder Iris Diaphragm (Fig. 159) 705

Weinschenk's Guide to the Use of the Polarising Microscope 705

(4) Photomicrography.

Waugh & Macparland— Photography in Botany and in Horticulture (Figs. 7

and 8) 86

Bibliography 87

Queen's Photomicrography of Metals (Fig. 29) .... ... .. 207

Piper, C. Welborne — A First Book of the Lens 461

Lambert, F. C. — Lantern-Slide Making 461

Bibliography 461

Richards, Th. W., & E. H. Archibald — Instantaneous Photography of Growing

Crystals 587

Sanger, Shepherd, & Co.'s Process of Natural Colour Photography (Fig. 118) .. 587

Buxton's Photomicrographic Apparatus (Fig. 119) 588

Sanger, Shepherd, & Co.'s Filters for Photomicrography (Fig. 120) 588

Wandolleck's New Object-holder for Photomicrography (Figs. 160 and 161) .. 705
Aspinwall, J. — Methods of Producing Enlargements and Lantern Slides of Micro-
scopic Objects for Class Demonstrations 707

(5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation.

Rheinberg, J.— Imitation of Polarised Light Effects by Diffraction (Figs. 9 and 10) 87

Bibliography 461

(6) Miscellaneous.

Bibliography 89

Malassez— New Form of Loup-holder (Figs. 56 and 57) 329

Bibliography 461,590

B. Technique.

(1) Collecting- Objects, including Culture Processes.

Epstein, St. — Simple Method for Cultivating Anaerobic Bacteria in Capsrdes

(Fig. 11) 89

Debrand, L. — New Method of Cultivating the Tetanus Bacillus 90

Lister, A., & Clara Langenbeck — Culture of Mycetozoa 208

Thomann, J. — Medium for the Bacteriological Examination of Water 208

Wright, J. H. — Simple Method of Cultivating Anaerobic Bacteria 209

Paul, Th.— Sand- Filter for Agar (Fig. 58) 330

Schouten, S. L. — New Method of obtaining Pure Cultures 331

Whipple, G-. C— Ventilated Dish for Bacterial Cultures (Fig. 59) 332

Bosc, F. J. — Incoagulable Blood as a Culture Medium 332

Chamot, E. M., & G. Thiry — Medium for Cultivating Chromogenic Bacteria .. 332

Markchal, G., & others — Cultivation of Dticrey's Bacillus 333

Copeman, S. M., & M. Funck — Cultivation of Microbes of Vaccinia and Variola .. 333

Muller, P. — Medium for Bacteriological Examination of Water 334

Gertler, N.—New Incubat or (Fig. 97) 461

Hanfland, F. — Electrically heated Incubator 462

Deycke & Voigtlander — Improved Culture Media 463

Steel Gas Regulator (Fig. 98) 463

Robin, A. — Simple Device for Distributing Equal Quantities of Culture Media

(Fig. 99) ' 463

XXXVI CONTENTS.

PAGE

Rczicka, St. — Modification of KabrheVs Method of Anaerobic Cultivation .. .. 463

„ „ Method of Rapidly Filtering Nutrient Agar 464

Nicolaysen, L. — Cultivation of Gonococcus on Agar 464

Herman — Neiu Apparatus for Cultivating Anaerobes 709

Lepierre, C. — Glucoproteins as Cultivation Media for Micro-organisms 709

Eyre, J. W. H. — Method for Rapid Solution of Gelatin and Agar in the Prepara-
tion of Nutrient Media 709

Zaubitzer, H. — Cultivation of Amoebse 710

Jochmann, G. — Acid Media for Cultivating Tubercle Bacilli 710

Young, H. H., & others — Culture of Gonococcus 710

Holub, 0. von — Insects as Living Substratum for Cultivating Infectious Diseases of

Man and Animals 710

(2) Preparing Objects.

Sayoe, O. A. — Method of Preserving Crustacea 90

Mosso — Silvering Nerve-tissue 90

Kolster, E. — Dialyser for Histological Purposes (Figs. 30 and 31) 209

Oertel, T. E. — Synthetic Alcohol as a Fixative 210

Hennings, C. — Fluid for Softening Chitin 210

„ „ Depigmenting the Eyes of Arthropoda 210

Stephens, J. W. W., & S. R. Christophers — Technique for Malaria Blood, .. .. 211

Bryan, G. H. — Cleaning Desmids 211

Smith, R. Greig — Method for Isolating Bacterial Flora from Water 211

Paul, Th. — Permanent Preparations of Bacterial Cultures 334

Sohoneboom, 0. G. — Method for obtaining Sterile Blood-Serum (Fig. 60) .. .. 334

Whitney, W. F.— New Method of Fixing Blood-Films 38.1

Remy, L. — New Method for Isolating the Typhoid Bacillus from Water 335

Conn, 11. W. — Preparing Bacterial Cultures for Museum Specimens 464

Diederichs, K. — Preparation of Radulse 464

Retterer, E. — Fixation of Embryonic and Young Cartilage 590

Plenge, H. — Fixing Flagellata 590

Josue, O. — Fixing Mood Preparations with Chloroform 591

Redikozew, W. — Method for Examining Ocelli of Insects, 591

De Lannoise & A. GIirard — Method of Finding 'Tubercle Bacilli in Sputum .. 591
Meyer, A. — Behaviour of Spores and Fat-Drops in Bacteria to Eau de Javelle and

Chloral hydrate Solution 591

Willcox, M. A. — Rapid Method for Making Slides of Amcebx 711

Dowdy, S. E. — Preparation of Crystals as Microscopic Objects 711

Sabin, Florence R. —Modelling and Reconstruction Method 712

Goldfuss, O. — Killing and Preserviny Slugs 712

(3) Cutting - , including- Imbedding and Microtomes.

Blake, ¥.—Minot- Blake Microtome (Figs. 12 and 13) 91

Leake's Microtome (Fig. 14) 92

Hickey, P. M. — Irrigating Apparatus for Celloidin Sectioning (Figs. 32 aud 33) .. 213
Brookover, C. — Method of Procuring Ribands ivith a Microtome working Hori-
zontally 213

Pokkowsiu — Imbedding in Celloidin 213

Powers, J. L. — Improvised Microtome (Figs. 61 and 62) 335

Tschernischeff, S. — Method of Making Sections of Nervous Tissue 465

Imbedding Bath (Fig. 100) .. 465

Delepine Improved Microtome (Fig. 121) 592

Flora's Automatic Microtome (Fig. 122) 592

Bardeen, C. R. — New Freezing Microtome for use with Carbon Dioxide Tanks

(Figs. 123 and 124) 594

Minot Automatic Precision Microtome (Fig. 1 25; 596

„ Automatic Rotary Microtome (Fig. 1 26) 597

Btablingeb, J .—Microtome for Cutting under Water (Figs. 127 and 128) .. .. 597
Reichert's new Microtome with Inclined Plane and Endless-working Micrometer

Screw (Fig. 129) ' 598

CONTENTS. XXXV11

(4) Staining: and Injecting-.

l'AQB

Marpmann, G. — Mordants in Staining Technique 93

SciiafI'-nkk, J. H. — Differential Stain for Cell Structures 93

Weigebt, C. — Staining Elastic Fibres 94

Malloky, F. B. — Differential Stain for Connective-Tissue 94

,. „ Stahnng Neuroglia Fibres with Phosphotungdic Acid Hema-
toxylin 94

De Rossi — Simple Method for Staining Bacterial Flagella 213

Staining and Mounting Urinary Deposits 214

Moll, A. — Staining Embryonic Cartilage 214

Zollikoper, R. — Staining Fluid for Counting Leucocytes 214

Petroff, N. — New Staining Method for Med Corpuscles in Sections 215

Lewinson, J. — Fat Staining 215

Smith, J. B. — Modification of Pitfield's Method for Staining Flagella 215

Smith, R. Greig — Double Staining of Spores and Bacilli 216

Hellendall, H. — New Staining Trough for Serial Sections (Fig. 34) '217

Marx, H— Spore Staining 337

Peppler, A. — Simple Method for Staining Flagella 337

Guiradd & Gautie — Anilin-blue for Staining Bacteria 337

Hekz, R., & P. Richter — Staining Gonococci with Neutral Bed 337

Hunter, W. — Method of distinguishing Bacillus coli communis from Bacillus

typhosus by the use of Neutral Bed 338

Reinhold, R. — Diagnostic Staining of the Malaria Parasite 338

Piorkowski — Staining Diphtheria Bacteria 338

Hanna, W. — Modification of the Romanoioslci-Ruge Method of Staining Protozoa . . 338

Rosenberger, R. C. — New Blood Stain ^6

Willebrand, A. E. von — Staining Blood- Films 466

Rovaart, H. van de — Staining Diphtheria Bacilli 4*J6

Maule, 0. — New Reaction for Woody Tissue 600

Mayer, S.— Researches with Neutral Red 600

Haemers, A. Ch. — Mod ification of the •Iron Hematoxylin Staining Method .. .. 001

Cortes. A. — Intra vitam Staining of Micro-organisms 601

Mulleu, A. — Staining Tubercle Bacilli and Spores by the Aid of Potassium per-

carbonate and Hydrogen peroxide 001

Hickson, S. J. — Staining with Brazilin 601

Michaelis. L. — Methylen- Agar and the Bed Reaction of Methylen-Pilue 01 >2

Tandler, J. — Microscopic Injections with Cold, Fluid Gelatin 602

Richards, B. R. — Apparatus and Method for rapidly Staining large numbers of

Sputum Specimens (Figs. 162 and 163) •"•' 712

Pitfield, R. L. — Ammonium Persulphate as a Decolorising Fluid for Staining

Spores and Sputum 713

Spuler, A. — New Staining Method 714

Kisskalt, C. — Modification of Gram's Method 714

Hari, P. — Modification of Hoyers Thionin Stain 714

Leishman, W. B — Simple and Rapid Method of Producing Romanowslnj Staining

of Blood-Films 715

Makgill, R. H., & W. G. Savage — Neutral Red for Detecting Bacillus Coli in

Water 715

(5) Mounting-, including- Slides, Preservative Fluids, &c.

Schaffner, J. H. — Mounting in Glycerin 94

Tatham, J. F. W. — Media for Mounting Diatoms „. 94

Lavdovsky, M. — Neiv Fixative Solution and Method for Restoring Old Specimens 217

Scott, G. — Formalin as a Wet Method for Blood-Films .. . . 217

Bryan, G. H. — Mounting Desmids 218

Marpmann, G. — New Formula for Preserving Zoological and Anatomical Specimens 602
Madan. H. G. — Colloid Form of Piperine, its Refractive and Dispersive Powers

(Fig. 130) 603

xl CONTENTS.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

l'AC.K

Meeting, December 19, 1900 102

Annual Meeting, January 16, 1901 107

Keport of the Council for 1900 107

Treasurer's Account for 1900 109

Meeting, February 20, 1901 224

March 20 , 226

April 17, „ 346

May 15, „ 349

Special General Meeting, June 19, 1901 473

Meeting, June 19, 1901 .. . 474

October 16, 1901 723

November 20 „ 727

>»

Index of New Biological Terms 733

General Index to Volume 735

t

\

JOUmR.MCR SOC 1901 Pll.

FWMillettad.ad.nat-

West, N ewman litk.

FORAMINIFERA OF. MALAY ARCHIPELAGO.

* 7 if

JOURNAL

OF THE

ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

FEBRUARY 1901.
TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

I.— Report on the Recent Foraminifera of the Malay Archipelago
collected hy Mr. A. Durrand, F.R.M.S.—Part X.

By Fortescue William Millett, F.R.M.S.

(Read February 20th, 1901.)

Plate I.

Sub-family Cassidulininse.

Cassidulina d'Orbigny.

Cassidulina laevigata d'Orbigny.

Cassidulina laevigata d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii.
p. 282 (No. 1), pi. xv. figs. 4, 5 ;— Modele No. 41. C. laevigata
(d'Orb.) Bradv, Parker, and Jones, 1888, Trans. Zool. Soc, vol. xii.
p. 221, pi. xliii. fig. 11. C. laevigata (d'Orb.) Terrigi, 1889, Mem.
R. Accad. Lincei, ser. 4, vol. vi. p. Ill, pi. v. fig. 9. C. laevigata
(d'Orb.) Egger, 1893, Abhancll. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., CI. II. vol.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE.

Fig. 1. — Mimosina affinis sp. n. x 00.

In fig. J la, plate IV. the inferior aperture is wrongly depicted ; the
present figure is intended to correct it.
„ 2, 3. — Chilostomella ovoidea Reuss. Fig. 2 x GO; fig. 3 x 75.
„ 4. — Seabroohia pellucid a Bi&dy. x 135.

5. — Lagena ampulla-di 'stoma Ry. Jones, x 75.
rudis Reuss. x 75.
variata Brady, x 75.
costata Williamson sp. var. x 100.
spumosa sp. n. x 100.

Isevis Montagu sp., var. distoma Silvestri. x 100.
Chaster i sp. n. x 100.
pannosa sp. n. Fig. 12 x 110; fig. 13 x 90.

„ var. x 100.
foveolata Reuss. x 100.

1901 b

6.

7.

91

8.

9.

1*

10.

11.

I 9 13

A-, 1.). ,,

14.

It

15.

?*

Feb.

20th

2 Transactions of the Society.

xviii. p. 302, pi. vii. figs. 47, 48, 54-5G. C. laevigata (D'Orb.) Goes,
1894, K. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. xxv. p. 43, pi. viii. figs.
418-420. C. laevigata (d'Orb.) A. Silvestri, 1896, Mem. Pontif.
Accad. Nuovi Lincei, vol. xii. p. 103, pi. ii. fig. 10.

This is a very rare form in the Malay Archipelago, and has been
observed only at Station 10, in Area 1.

Cassidulina crassa d'Orbigny.

Cassidulina crassa d'Orbigny, 1843, Foram. Arner. Merid., p. 56,
pi. vii. figs. 18-20. C. crassa (d'Orb.) Egger, 1893, Abhandl. k.
bayer. Akad. Wiss., CI. II. vol. xviii. p. 303, pi. vii. figs. 35, 36.
G. crassa (d'Orb.) Goes, 1894, K. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol.
xxv. p. 43, pi. viii. figs. 421, 422. C. crassa Egger, 1895, Jahres-
bericht xvi. Naturhist. Ver. Passau, p. 19, pi. ix. fig. 19. G. crassa
(d'Orb.) A. Silvestri, 1896, Mem. Pontif. Acead. Nuovi Lincei, vol.
xii. p. 104, pi. ii. figs. 11, 12. G. crassa (d'Orb.) Morton, 1897, Proc.
Portland Nat. Hist. Soc, vol. ii. p. 116, pi. i. fig. 12. G. crassa
(d'Orb.) Flint, 1899, Kept. U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1897 (1899), p. 292,
pi. xxxviii. fig. 3. C. crassa (d'Orb.) Wright, 1900, Geol. Mag., dec. 4,
vol. vii. p. 100, pi. v. fig. 11.

This is less rare than C. laevigata, and is found at Stations in both
Areas.

Family CEILOSTOMELLIDM

GMlostomella Keuss.

Ghilostomella ovoidea Keuss, plate I. figs. 2, 3.

GMlostomella ovoidea Keuss, 1850, Denkschr. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien,
vol. i. p. 380, pi. xlviii. fig. 12. G. ovoidea (Keuss) Sherborn and
Chapman, 1889, Journ. R. Micr. Soc, p. 485, pi. xi. fig. 12. G. ovoidea
(Reuss) Dreyer, 1891, Jenaische Zeitschr. fur Naturwiss., vol. xxvi.
p. 271. G. ovoidea (Reuss) Egger, 1893, Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad.
Wiss., CI. II. vol. xviii. p. 305, pi. ix. figs. 1, 2. G. ovoidea (Reuss)
Silvestri, 1893, Atti e Kendic. Accad. Sci. Lett, e Arti dei Zelanti e
P.P. dello Studio di Acireale, vol. v. p. 201, pi. vi. fig. 2. C. ovoidea
(Keuss) Goes, 1894, K. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. xxv. p. 53,
pi. ix. figs. 512-516.

In the robust form, fig. 2, the shell is dense and opaque, with
a granular surface. The more attenuated specimens, fig. 3, are
sufficiently transparent to allow of the internal chambers being seen,
and the shell-wall is smooth, with a few opaque white dots scattered
over its surface.

The principal variation is in the relative length of the successive
chambers, and on this depends the comparative stoutness or attenua-
tion of the contour of the test.

I Report on Foraminifera. By F. W. Millett. 3

It is not uncommon at Station 25, in Area 2, but has not been
observed at any other locality in the region.

Seabroolcia Brady.
Seabrookia pellucida Brady, plate I. fig. 4.

Seabroohia pellucida Brady, 1890, Journ. R. Micr. Soc, p. 570,
figs. 60, la-c, 2. S. pellucida (Brady) Wright, 1891, Proc. li. Irish
Acad., ser. 3, vol. i. p. 476, pi. xx. fig. 5.

About twelve years ago Mr. W. H. Harris, then of Cardiff,
obtained from the late Captain Seabrook some dredgings from the
Java Seas. These were distributed amongst various rhizopodists, and
excited much attention from the number of interesting forms contained
in them. It was from these dredgings that Mr. Harris procured the
specimens of the new genus Seabrookia which formed the subject of a
paper by the late Dr. H. B. Brady, published in this Journal in the
year 1890.

The differences between Seabrookia and Chilostomella are so slight
that it is questionable if they are of generic value ; quite as much
variation exists amongst the forms assigned by common consent to the
genus Lagena. The chief difference is in the form and position of
the aperture ; whilst in Seabrookia these are remarkably uniform,
in Chilostomella they vary very much, as shown in the specimens
figured by Sherborn and Chapman, Kzehak, Franzenau, and Silvestri.
This is, however, a question which must be decided by future researches.

The 3Ialay specimens vary so slightly that it is difficult to dis-
tinguish one individual from another.

It occurs at several Stations in both Areas, but is nowhere
numerous.

The localities named by Brady and Joseph Wright are, off Cebu,
120 fathoms, Java Sea, 45 fathoms, and 'Challenger' material from
Station 33, off Bermudas, 435 fathoms.

Family LAGENIDM.
Sub-family Lageninae.

Lagena Walker and Boys.

Group of Lagena globosa.

Lagena globosa Montagu sp.

Serpula (Lagena) Isevis globosa Walker and Boys, 1784, Test.
Min., p. 3, pi. i. fig. 8. Vermiculum globosum Montagu, 1803, Test.
Brit., p. 523. Lagena globosa (Montagu) Brown, 1844, Illustr. Kec.
Conch. Gt. Brit., p. 126, pi. lvi. fig. 37. L. globosa var. major Uhlig,
1886, Jahrb. k. k. Geol. Keichs., vol. xxxvi. p. 167, fig. 1. L. globosa,
(Montagu) Sherborn and Chapman, 1886, Journ. K. Micr. Soc, p. 744,

b 2

4 Transactions of the Society.

pi. xiv. fig. 11. L. globosa (Montagu) Haeusler, 1887, Neues Jahrb.
fur Min., vol. i. p. 181, pi. iv. figs. 1-18. L. globosa (Montagu)
Brady, 1888, Geol. Mag., dee. 3,' vol. v. p. 481, pi. xiii. figs. 1-3.
L. globosa (Montagu) Mariani, 1889, Boll. Soc. Geol. Italia, vol. vii.
p. 285, pi. x. figs. 3. 4. L. globosa (Montagu) Terrigi, 1889, Mem.
K. Accad. Lincei, ser. 4, vol. vi. p. Ill, pi. v. fig. 10 ; pi. vi. figs. 4-6.
L. globosa (Montagu) Burrows, Sherborn, and Bailey, 1890, Journ.
R. Micr. Soc., p. 555, pi. ix. figs. 1, 4. L. globosa (Walker and Boys)
Haeusler, 1890, Mem. Soc. Pal. Suisse, vol. xvii. p. 84, pi. xiii. figs. 5-9.
L. globosa (Montagu) Terrigi, 1891, Mem. K. Com. Geol. Italia,
vol. iv. p. 77, pi. ii. fig. 1. L. globosa (Montagu) Mariani, 1891. Boll.
Soc. Geol. Italia, vol. x. p. 725, pi. xxi. fig. 7. L. globosa (Montagu)
Cbapman, 189. > >, Journ. B. Micr. Soc, p. 579, pi. viii. fig. 1. L.
globosa (Montagu) Mariani, 1893, Ann. Istit. teen. Udine, ser. 2,
vol. xi. (p. 22) pi. i. fig. 7. L. globosa (Montagu) Egger, 1893,
Abhandl. k. haver. Akad. Wiss., CI. II. vol. xviii. p. 323, pi. x. fig. 69.
L. globosa (Montagu) Haeusler, 1893, Abliandl. schweiz. pal. Gesell.,
vol. xx. p. 11, pi. i. figs. 1-13. L. globosa (Reuss) Grzybowski, 1894,
Rozprawy Wydz. Mat.-Przyr. Akad. Umiej-Krakowie, vol. xxix. p. 189,
pi. i. fig. 15. L. globosa (W. and J.) Goes, 1894, K. Svenska Vet.-
Akad. Handl., vol. xxv. p. 77, pi. xiii. fig. 741. L. globosa (Montagu)
Jones, 1895, Paleont. Soc, p. 177, pi. i. fig. 32 (1866). L. globosa
(Montagu) Perner, 1897, Ceska Akad. Cesare Frantiska Josefa
(Paleont. Bohemica, No. 4) p. 19, pi. vii. figs. 4, 6, and fig. 17 in
text. L. globosa (Montagu) Morton, 1897, Proc. Portland Sci. Nat.
Hist., vol. ii. p. 116, pi. i. fig. 1. L. globosa (Montagu) Egger, 1899,
Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., CI. II. vol. xxi. p. 102, pi. v. fig. 3.
L. globosa (Montagu) Flint, 1899, Rep. U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1897 (1899),
p. 306, pi. liii. fig. 4. L. globosa (W. and B.) Kiaer, 1900, Rep. on
Norwegian Fishery and Marine Investigation, vol. i. No. 7, p. 39,
pi. fig. 17. L. globosa (Montagu) Silvestri, 1900, Mem. Pontif.
Accad. Nuovi Lincei, vol. xvii. p. 244, pi. vi. figs. 30, 40.

Williamson, in his ' Recent Foraminifera of Great Britain,' having
regard to the resemblance in contour of the tests, associates L. lineata
with L. globosa ; Brady, in his ' Challenger ' Report on the Forami-
nifera, attaching greater importance to surface ornamentation, places
it with L. striata. There are advantages and disadvantages connected
with each method, but on the whole the Lagense seem to fall into
more natural groups when arranged in accordance with the general
shape of the test, than when the character of the surface is taken as
the basis of classification.

There are usually assigned to L. globosa two distinct forms ; in one
of these the test is thin and inflated, inclined to be opaque, and
possessing a well developed internal tube. In the other the test is
very thick and transparent, the shape pyriform, and the aperture
surrounded with radiating striae. Amongst these latter are doubtless

Report on Foraminifera. By F. W. Millet t. 5

included many specimens which are nothing more nor less than
arrested growths of Nodosaria and Polymorphina.

Both forms are to be found in the Malay Archipelago, and they
are evenly distributed over the whole of the region, although nowhere
abundantly.

Lagena apiculata Reuss.

Oolina apiculata Reuss, 1851, Haidinger's Naturw. Abhandl.,
vol. iv. Abth. 1, p. 22, pi. i. fig. 1. Lagena apiculata Reuss, 1862,
Sitzber. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. xlvi. (1863) p. 318, pi. i. tigs. 1,
4-8, 10, 11. L. apiculata (Reuss) Sherborn and Chapman, 1886,
Journ. R. Micr. Soc, p. 744, pi. xiv. fig. 14. L. apiculata (Reuss)
Haeusler, 1887, Neues Jahrb. fur Min., vol. i. p. 182, pi. iv. tigs. 19-30.
L. apiculata (Reuss) Mariani, 1889, Boll. Soc. Geol. Ital., vol. vii.
p. 2b5, pi. x. fig. 5. L. globosa (Montagu) Burrows, Sherborn, and
Bailey, 1890, Journ. R. Micr. Soc, p. 554, pi. ix. tig. 2 ; and L. api-
culata (Reuss), p. 555, pi. ix. figs. 6, 7, 9-11. L. globosa (Montagu)
Haeusler, 1890, Mem. Soc. Pal. Suisse, vol. xvii. p. 84, pi. xiii. figs.
3-lU ; and L. apiculata (Reuss) p. 85, pi. xiii. figs. 11, 12, 14, and
pi. xv. fig. 43. L. apiculata var. odontostoma de Amicis, 1893, Boll.
Soc. Geol. Italia, vol. sii. p. 352, pi. iii. fig. 9. L. apiculata (Reuss)
Haeusler, 1893, Abhandl. schweiz. pal. Gesell., vol. xx. p. 14, pi. i.
figs. 25-27, 34, 35. L. apiculata (Reuss) Chapman, 1893, Journ.
R. Micr. Soc, p. 581, pi. viii. figs. 2, 3. L. apiculata (Reuss) Goes,
1S94, K. Svenska Yet.- Akad. Handl., vol. xxv. p. 80, pi. xiii. fig. 747.
L. apiculata (Reuss) Jones, 1895, Paleont. Soc, p. 179, pi. i. fig. 27
(I860). L. apiculata ( Keuss) _Egger, 1899, Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad.
Wiss., CI. II. vol. xxi. p. 103, pi. v. fig. 32. L. apiculata (Reuss)
Chapman, 1900, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc, vol. lvi. p. 258, pi. xv. fig. 3.

Bearing in mind that most, if not all, of the Lagenee have their
apiculate condition, it seems unnecessary to endow each with a separate
name ; but pending an entire reform of the classification, it may cause
less inconvenience lor the present if these names be retained.

The form is rare in the Malay Archipelago, but is widely dis-
tributed.

Lagena ampulla- distoma Ry. Jones, plate I. fig. 5.

L. vulgaris var. ampulla- distoma Ry. Jones, 1872, Trans. Linn.
Soc, vol. xxx. p. 63, pi. xix. fig. 52. L. ampulla-distoma (Ry. Jones)
Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 458, pi. lvii. tig. 5.

This is a form of L. globosa which is not only apiculate, but
roughened on the surface.

The process at the base of the acuminate Lagense may be either
solid, or,;_as in; the present instance, tubular. Whether or not the
difference's worthy of varietal distinction is very doubtful.

It is by no means a rare form in the Malay Archipelago, and the

6 Transactions of the Society.

specimens are well developed. It occurs in considerable abundance
all over the Region.

Rymer Jones procured it from ten miles south of Sandalwood
Island, in the Java Seas, 1080 fathoms. The 'Challenger' Station
is Raine Island, Torres Strait, 155 fathoms. There seems to be
no other record of its occurrence.

Lagena hispida Reuss.

" Sphaerulae hispidee" Soldani, 1798, Testaceographia, vol. ii. p. 53,
pi. xvii. V, X. Lagena hispida Reuss, 1858. Zeitschr. deutsch. geol.
Gesell., vol. x. p. 434. L. hispida (Reuss) Haeusler, 1887, Neues
Jahrb. fur Min., vol. i. p. 185, pi. v. fig. 7-11. L. hispida (Reuss)
Haeusler, 1890, Mem. Soc. Pal. Suisse, vol. xvii. p. 88, pi. xiii. figs.
21-24. L. hispida (Reuss) Chapman, 1893, Journ. R. Micr. Soc,
p. 582, pi. viii. figs. 9, 10. L. hispida (Reuss) Haeusler, 1893,
Abhandl. schweiz. pal. Gesell, vol. xx. p. 16, pi. i. figs. 36-47. L.
hispida (Reuss) Flint, 1899, Rep. U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1897 (1899),
p. 307, pi. liii. fig. 8.

This variety occurs in considerable abundance, and is widely dis-
tributed in the Malay Archipelago. The specimens have all the usual
variations of form and structure, and comprise hispid conditions of
L. globosa, L. acuminata, and L. Imvis.

Lagena aspera Reuss.

Lagena aspera Reuss, 1861, Sitzungsber. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien,
vol. xliv. p. 305, pi. i. fig. 5. L. aspera (Reuss) Balkwill and Millett,
1884, Journ. Micr., vol. iii. p. 78, pi. ii. fig. 1. L. aspera (Reuss)
Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans. R. Irish Acad., vol. xxviii. (Sci.)
p. 337, pi. xiv. figs. 10-12. L. aspera (Reuss) Haeusler, 1887,
Neues Jahrb. fur Min., vol. i. p. 185, pi. v. figs. 14-18. L. aspera
(Reuss) Haeusler, 1890, Mem. Soc. Pal. Suisse, p. 89, pi. xiii. figs.
25, 26. L. aspera (Reuss) Terrigi, 1891, Mem. R. Com. Geol. Italia,
vol. iv. p. 77, pi. ii. fig. 3. L. aspera (Reuss) Haeusler, 1893,
Abhandl. schweiz. pal. Gesell., vol. xx. p. 15, pi. i. figs. 52-59. L.
aspera (Reuss) Woodward and Thomas, 1893, Final Rept. Geol. and
Nat. Hist. Survey of Minnesota, vol. iii. p. 35, pi. D, fig. 1. L. aspera
(tieuss) Chapman, 1893, Journ. R. Micr. Soc, p. 582, pi. viii. fig. S.
L. aspera (Reuss) Egger, 1899, Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., CI. II.
vol. xxi. p. 106, pi. v. fig. 10.

This form is widely distributed in the Malay Archipelago, although
more rare than L. hispida. The examples have the like variation of
form, the most common being that of L. lineata.

Lagena rudis Reuss, pi. I. fig. 6.

Lagena rudis Reuss, 1863, Bull. Acad. Roy. Belgique, ser. 2,
vol. xv. p. 145, pi. i. fig. 17. L. rudis Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsber. k.

Report on Foraminifera. By F. W. Millett. 7

Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. xlvi. (18G3) p. 336, pi. vi. fig. 82. Entosolenia
rudis (Reuss) Mobius, 1880, Meersfauna Insel Mauritius, p. 90,
pi. viii. tig. 10.

Viewed by reflected light the surface appears, as described by
Keuss, to be bedecked with knobs, between which lie weak and
irregular dimples. By transmitted light these dimples are resolved
into a reticulate system, which is continued over the entire test beneath
tbe protuberances.

It is a very rare form, and has been noticed only in Area 2.

Lagena variola Brady, plate I. fig. 7.

Lagena variata Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi. n.s.
p. 61. L. variata Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 461, pi. lxi. fig. 1.

This variety is not uncommon at Station 22, and occurs also at
Station 10. The examples are rather feeble.

The only ' Challenger ' Station is off East Moncceur Island, Bass
Strait, 38 fathoms.

Lagena lineata Williamson sp.

Entosolenia lineata Williamson, 1848, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.,
ser. 2, vol. i. p. 18, pi. ii. fig. 18. Lagena lineata (Will.) Reuss, 1862,
Sitzungsber. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. xlvi. p. 328, pi. iv. fig. 48.
L. caudata (d'Orb.) Balk will and Millett, 1884, Journ. Micr. vol. iii.
p. 78, pi. i. fig. 9. L. lineata (Will.) Balkwill and Wright, 1885,
Trans. R. Irish Acad., vol. xxviii. (Sci.) p. 336, pi. xiv. figs. 13-16.
L. lineata (Will.) Brady, Parker, and Jones, 1888, Trans. Zool.
Soc, vol. xii. p. 222, pi. xliv. fig. 33. L. lineata (Will.) Egger,
1893, Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., CI. II. vol. xviii. p. 326, pi. x.
figs. 29, 30.

The examples of this variety are typical, and are widely distributed
in the Malay Archipelago, but are nowhere abundant.

Besides various localities on the west coast of Europe, it has
been recorded from the Abrolhos Bank, Tristan d'Acunha, Kerguelen
Island, and West Australia.

Lagena costata Williamson sp., plate I. fig. 8.

Entosolenia costata Williamson, 1858, Rec. Foram. Gt. Britain,
p. 9, pi. i. fig. 18. E. costata (Will.) Dawson, 1859, Canad. Nat.,
vol. iv. p. 29, figs. 6, 7. Lagena costata (Will.) Reuss, 1862, Sitz-
ungsber. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. xlvi. (1863) p. 329, pi. iv. fig. 54.
L. costata (Will.) Wright, 1877, Proc. Relfast Field Club (App.),
p. 103, pi. iv. fiVs. 11-13. L. costata (Will.) Terquem, 1882, Mem.
Soc. Geol. Fr., ser. 3, vol. ii. p. 27, pi. ix. fig. 11. L. costata (Will.)
Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans. R. Irish Acad. vol. xxviii. (Sci.)
p. 338, pi. xiv. figs. 3-5. L. costata (Will.) Haeusler, 1887, Neues
Jahrb. fur Min., vol. i. p. 184, pi. v. fig. 5 ; and L. striata (d'Orb.)

8 Transactions of the Society.

p. 184, pi. v. tig. 6. L. costata (Will.) Haeusler, 1890, Mem. Soc.
Pal. Suisse, vol. xvii. p. 88, pi. xv. fig. 42. L. gracilis (Will.) Egger.
1893, Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., CI. II. vol. xviii. p. 328, pi. x.
fig. 33.

This form varies very much in the character of the sculpture of its
surface. The figured specimen resembles the L. mucronulata of Eeuss.*

It is not very numerous in the Malay Archipelago, but occurs at
several Stations in both Areas.

Lagena acuticosta Reuss.

L. acuticosta Reuss, 1861, Sitzungsber. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol.
xliv. p. 305, pi. i. fig. 4. L. sulcata var. acuticosta (Reuss) Brady,
Parker, and Jones, 1888, Trans. Zool. Soc, vol. xii. p. 222, pi. xiiv.
figs. 26, 31. L. acuticosta (Reuss) Chapman, 1893, Journ. R. Micr.
Soc, p. 583, pi. viii. fig. 11. L. acuticosta (Reuss) Egger, 189:!,
Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., CI. II. , vol. xviii. p. 329, pi. x. figs.
47, 48, 82, 83. L. acuticosta (Reuss) Jones, 1895, Paleont. Soc,
p. 188, pi. i. figs. 42, 43 (1866). L. acuticosta (Reuss) Egger, 1899,
Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., CI. II. vol. xxi. p. 106, pi. \i. fig. 62.

This variety, which can hardly be separated from L. costata, has in
the Malay Archipelago the same distribution, and occurs in about
equal quantities.

Lagena melo d'Orbigny sp.

Oolina melo d'Orbigny, 1843, Foram. Arner. Merid., p. 20, pi. v.
fig. 9. Lagena melo (d'Orb.) Jones, Parker, and Brady, 1866,
Paleont. Soc, p. 38, pi. i. fiir. 35. L. melo (d'Orb.) Brady, Parker,
and Jones, 1888. Trans. Zool. Soc, p. 222, pi. xliv. figs. 21, 24. L.
melo (d Orb.) Jones, 1895, Paleont. Soc, p. 192, fig. 20.

This variety is but poorly represented , the examples being few and
insignificant.

Lagena hexagona Williamson.

Entosolenia squamosa var. hexagona Williamson, 1848, Ann. and
Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 2, vol. i. p. 20, pi. ii. fig. 23. Lagena hexagona
(Will.) Jones, 1895, Paleont. Soc, p. 193, pi. vi. fig. 7, and w.c fig. 21.
L. hexagona (Will.) Wright, 1900, Geol. Mag., dec 4, vol. vii. p. 100,
pi. v. fig. 15.

In the Malay Archipelago this is the best represented of the
reticulated forms. The specimens are well grown, abundant, and
are distributed all over the Region.

Lagena reticulata Macgillivray sp.

Lagenula reticulata Macgillivray, 1843, Hist. Moll. Animal.
Aberdeen, &c, p. 38. Lagena reticulata (Macgill.) Reuss, 1862,

* Sitzuugsber. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. xlvi. 1862 (18G:]) p. 329, pi. iv. fig. 52.

Report on Foraminifera. By F. W. Millett. 9

Sitzungsber. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. xliv. p. 335, pi. v. figs. 67, 68.
L. hexagomi ? (Will.) var. Balkwill and Millett, 1884, Journ. Micr.,
vol. iii." ]>. 79, pi. i. fig. 10. Entosolenia squamosa (Montagn)
Dawson, 1886, Handb. Zool., p. 44, fig. 33. L. hexagona (Will.)
Egger, 1893, Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., CI. II. vol. xviii. p. 326,
pi. x. fig. 60. L. hexagona (Will.) Goes, 1891, K. Svenska Vet.-
Akad. Handl., vol., xxv. p. 80, pi. xiii. fig. 746. L. reticulata (Macgill.)
Jones, 1895, Paleont, Soc., p. 195, pi. iv. fig. 7 (1866). L. hexagona
(Will.) Silvestri, 1896, Mem. Pontif. Acad. Nuovi Lincei, vol. xii.
p. 117, pi. ii. fig. 19.

This variety, distinguished by the irregularity of its meshes, is
very rare in the Malay Archipelago, and the examples are by no
means well developed.

Lagena squamosa Montagu sp.

Vermiculum squamosum Montagu, 1803, Test. Brit., p. 5*26, pi.
xiv. fig. 2. Lagena squamosa (Montagu) Brown, 1827, Illustr. Rec
Conch. Gt. Brit., pi. i. fig. 32. L. squamosa (Montagu) Balkwill and
Wright, 1885, Trans. R, Irish Acad., vol. xxviii. (Sci.) p. 340, pi. xiv.
fig. 9. L. squamosa (Montagu) Egger, 1893, Abhandl. k. bayer.
Akad. Wiss., CI. II. vol. xviii. p. 326, pi. x. figs. 58, 59. L. squamosa
(Montagu) Goes, 1894, K. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl, vol. xxv. p. 79,
pi. xiii. fig. 745. L. squamosa (Montagu) Jones, 1895, Paleont. Soc,
p. 196, w.c. fig. 19.

Although not abundant, the examples are pretty evenly distributed
over the whole of the Eegion, and have all the characters of the species,
with little or no variation.

Lagena spumosa sp. n. plate I. fig. 9.

Test pyriform ; shell substance a thick covering of vesicular
matter overlying a dense internal layer. Aperture a conical transparent
tube situated at the apex of the test. Length "25 mm.

'This is a very interesting form, having the shell substance in two
distinct layers, and differing from all the other species of the genus in
its spongy outer coating.

It is very rare, and has been found only at Station 25 in Area 2.

Group of Lagena Isevis.
Lagena Isevis Montagu sp.

" Serpula (Lagena) Isevis ovalis " Walker and Boys, 1784, Test.
Min., p. 3, pi. i. fig. 9. Vermiculum Iseve (W. & B.) Montagu, 1803,
Test. Brit., p. 524. Lagena Isevis (W. & J.) Williamson, 1848, Ann.
and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. ii. vol. i. p. 12, pi. i. figs. 1, 2. L Isevis
(W. & J.) Jones, 1884, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc, vol. xi. p. 769, pi.

10 Transactions of the Society.

xxxiv. fig. 3. L. vulgaris Giimbel, 1 885, Geol. Bayern, Th. 1 ,
Lief. 2, p. 422, fig. 266°. L. Isevis (Montagu) Haeusler, 1887, Neues
Jahrb. far Min., p. 181, pi. iv. figs. 31-38. L. Isevis (Montagu)
Malagoli, 1887, Atti Soc. Nat, Modena (Rend.), ser. 3, vol.iii. p. 109,
pi. i. fig. 7. L. Isevis (Montagu) Brady, 1888, Geol. Mag., dec. 3,
vol. v. p. 482, pi. xiii. figs. 6-10. L. Isevis (Montagu) Fornasini,
1889, Minute forme Rizopod. Retio, pi. fig. 8. L. Isevis (Montagu)
Haeusler, 1890, Mem. Soc. Pal. Suisse, vol. xvii. p. 86, pi. xiii. fig. 20.
L. Isevis (Montagu) Fornasini, 1890, Mem. R. Accad. Sci. 1st. Bologna,
ser. 4, vol. x. p. 466, pi. fig. 1. L. Isevis (Montagu) Mariani, 1891,
Boll. Soc. Geol. Italia, vol. x. p. 725, pi. xxi. fig. 9. L. Isevis
(Montagu) Fornasini, 1893, Mem. E. Accad. Sci. 1st. Bologna, ser. 5,
vol. iii. p. 431, pi. ii. fig. 1. L. tubulifera Egger, 1893, Abhandl. k.
bayer. Akad. Wiss., CI. II., vol. xviii. p. 324, pi. x. figs. 6, 7. L.
Isevis (Montagu) Mariani, 1893, Ann. E. 1st. Udine, ser. 2, vol. >:i.
p. 22, pi. i. fig. 8. L. Isevis (Montagu) Chapman, 1893, Journ. R.
Micr. Soc, p. 581, pi. viii. fig. 5. L. Isevis (Montagu) Haeusler, 1893,
Mem. Soc. Pal. Suisse, vol. xx. p. 13, pi. i. figs. 14-16. L. Isevis
(Montagu) Goes, 1894, K. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. xxv. p. 74,
pi. xiii. figs. 719-722. L. Isevis (Montagu) Egger, 1895, Jahres-
bericht xvi. Naturhist. Ver. Passau, p. 24, pi. ii. fig. 11. L. Isevis
(Montagu) Jones, 1895, Paleont. Soc, p. 181, pi. i. fig. 28 (1866).
L. Isevis (Montagu) Fornasini, 1898, Mem. R. Accad. Sci. 1st. Bologna,
ser. 5, vol. vii. p. 210. pi. fig. 19. L. Isevis (Montagu) Egger, 1899,
Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., CI. II. vol. xxi. p. 102, pi. v. fig. 2 ;
and L. clavata (d'Orb.) p. 103, pi. v. fig. 16. L. Isevis (Montagu)
Flint, 1899, Rep. U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1897 (1899) p. 306, pi. liii.
fig. 6. L. Isevis (Montagu) Chapman, 190C Quart. Journ. Geol.
Soc, vol. lvi. p. 258, pi. xv. fig. 2. L. Isevis (Montagu) Wright, 1900,
Geol. Mag., dec. 4, vol. vii. p. 100, pi. v. fig. 12. L. Isevis (Montagu)
Silvestri, 1900, Mem. Pontif. Accad. Nuovi Lincei, vol. xvii. p. 244,
pi. vi. fig. 56.

This ubiquitous form occurs in great profusion at nearly all the
Stations, and exhibits the usual variations of form between L. glcbosa
and L. apiculata.

Lagena Isevis var. distoma Silvestri, plate I. fig. 10.

Lagena Isevis (Montagu) Silvestri, 1900, Mem. Pontif. Accad.
Nuovi Lincei, vol. xvii. p. 244, pi. vi. figs. 74, 75.

This apiculate variety is by no means uncommon at Station 25,
and has been observed at other Stations. Some of the examples are
very finely striated, indicating an affinity with L. (Amphorina) Lyellii
Seguenza.*

Prof. Silvestri's examples are from a neogene deposit, supposed to
be miocene, in the Alta Valle Tiberina.

* Foram. Monotal Mioe. Messina, 1862, p. 52, pi. i. fig. 40.

Report on Foraminifera. By F. W. Millett. 11

Lagena Chasteri sp. n., plate I. fig. 11.

Test flask-shaped ; rounded at the base. Shell substance consist-
ing of a mass of vesicular matter enclosed between two layers of dense
clear substance. Surface smooth and polished. Length - 28 mm.

That this is closely allied to L. spumosa is shown by the tendency
of the two forms to coalesce.

The vesicular matter sparkling through the transparent outer
layer causes the test to resemble the mineral avanturine.

It has been observed only at Station 25, where it is not uncommon.

Lagena pannosa sp. n., plate I. figs. 12-14.

Test flask- or decanter-shaped, with usually a constriction at the
place where the neck joins the body. Shell substance composed of an
inner layer of hard matter, on which rests a thick coating of opaque
granular substance, which exhibits a strong tendency to disintegrate.
Between the middle and base of the body are two zones of irregular
indentations. Length 0*30 mm.

This interesting member of the com pound- wall series is well marked
by the tendency of the granular portion to disintegrate and expose
portions of the internal layer ; to a less extent this feature is apparent
also in L. spumosa.

In the variety fig. 14 the disintegration is more irregular, and the
zones are not produced.

The L. tubifero-squamosa Parker and Jones,* fossil from Grrignon,
with its "decaying outer layers," appears to be a member of this
group.

It occurs at many Stations in both Areas, but is most abundant at
Station 25, which appears to be the headquarters of the compound -
wall series.

Lagena foveolata Reuss, plate I. fig. 15.

Lagena foveolata Reuss, 1862 (1863) Sitzungsber. k. Akad. Wiss.
Wien, vol. xlvi. p. 332, pi. v. fig. 65. Lagena No. 25, Von Schlicht,
1870, Foram. Septarienthones von Pietzpnhl, p. 10, pl.iii. fig. 25.

This is a very beautiful form, the minuteness and regularity of
the sculpture causing the test to shine with great lustre.

The cells are smaller, and have less space between them than in
the example figured by Reuss.

It occurs, very sparingly, at Station 25, and has not been observed
elsewhere.

* Phil. Trans., 1862, p. 354, pi. xviii. fig. 7.

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES

RELATING TO

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY

(principally invertebrata and cryptogamia),

MICROSCOPY, Etc.*

ZOOLOGY.

VERTEBRATA.

a. Embryology. t

Experiments on Telegony4 — Mile. Barthelet has made experiments
with white and grey mice (Mus domesiicus), in regard to which it is
known that if white females are crossed by grey males, the offspring
are in the great majority of cases grey.

Fuur white virgin females were paired with as many grey males ; the
(25) young were all grey. The females were then paired with white
males ; the (28) young were all white.

A white virgin female was paired thrice with a grey male ; the (17)
young were all grey. The female was then paired with a white male ;
the (6) young were all white. Further experiments yielded similar
results ; there was no hint of telegony.

Sex in Pigeons.§ — L. Cuenot points out the error of the common
opinion that the two offspring in pigeons are ordinarily of opposite
sexes. In 65 clutches the results were — 17 cases of two males, 14 cases
of two females, 34 cases of opposite sexes. Nor is it the case that the
first laid egg usually becomes a male. Out of 30 clutches, the first
laid egg gave rise to a male in 15 cases, and to a female in the other
fifteen. The normal proportion of the sexes in the carrier pigeon is
115-87 male to 100 females — a notable hyperandry — as Darwin also
remarked in regard to the adults.

Histogenesis of Ovary in Rana temporaria.!|— M. Bouiu finds that
the primordial genital organ in the tadpole consists of small germinative
cells, and of large primordial genital cells which are filled with yolk-
plates. The primordial genital cells arise from the peritoneal* and
mesenchymatous cells in the vicinity of the genital zone, and the same

* The Society are not intended to be denoted by tlie editorial " we," and they do
uot hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers noted,
nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of this part of
the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually published, and to
describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, &c, which are either new or have
not been previously described in this country.

t This sectiou includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so called,
but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, Reproduction, and allied subjects.

J Comptes Eendus, cxxxi. (1900) pp. 911-2. § Tom. cit., pp. 756-8.

|| Arch. Biol., xvii. (1900) pp. 201-381 (4 pis.).

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES. 13

cells also give rise to germinative cells. The formation of primordial
genital cells is due to the absorption by the cells named above of a large
amount of yolk, and the gradual assimilation of this yolk. During the
process there is no division of the primordial cells, their increase in
number being due to the transformation of the peritoneal and mesen-
chymatous cells. When the yolk is completely assimilated, however,
the primordial genital cells, which may now be called the primordial
ova, are surrounded by small germinative cells, and begin to divide by
mitotic division. This division, which is synchronous with changes
in the ovary itself, is associated with a remarkable degeneration and
expulsion of a certain number of primordial ova into the body-cavity ;
a phenomenon more striking in future males than in the females. At
the same time certain of the small germinative cells are converted into
primordial ova. At the same stage the mesenchymatous Wolffian tissue
grows into the developing ovary, and forms the medullary cords in
which the cavities of the ovary appear. These cavities are therefore
the homologues of the tubules of the testis in the male, and are more
numerous in the tadpole than in the adult. The corpora adiposa develope
at the expense of a part of the genital organ which contains no primor-
dial ova, and are homologous with the interstitial cells of mammals.
The primordial 'ova give rise by repeated division to nests of oogonia,
each nest lying within the primordial follicle formed by the germinative
cells. The nuclei of the oogonia then undergo remarkable changes,
suggesting the approach of division ; but this does not occur, the nuclei
are reconstituted, and the oocytes are thus differentiated from the
oogonia. Thus the oocytes each arise from a single oogonium (con-
trast Goette, Nussbaum, &c). All the oogonia do not give rise to
oocytes, for a certain number degenerate and disappear, but in each nest
of oogonia several oocytes are generally formed. The author has not
carried his researches beyond this point.

Defences of the Ovum.* — Dr. G. Loisel has published an interesting
essay on the various ways (by reserves, envelopes, ivc.) in which the
ovum may be protected against drought, extreme humidity, heat, cold,
microbes, and other injurious influences. The protection enables the
ovum to survive in its struggle for existence, which is particularly keen
in the period between liberation from the ovary and the beginning of
development. All the ova of the same age are not identical ; they vary
partly in the adequacy of their protection ; those that succeed are, often
at least, the most effectively protected. In short, there is important
selective action and also modification in the earliest stages of life.

Alleged Amoeboid Movements of Germinal Vesicle.f— A. Giardina
is entirely sceptical as to the occurrence of active amoeboid movements
in the germinal vesicle. The apparent movements are passivo, and
are due to differences of concentration in the surrounding substances.

Abnormal Eggs of Tropidonotus natrix. J — G. Wetzel describes
three cases of abnormality in developing eggs of this snake. In one of

• Journ. Anat. Physiol., xxxvi. (1900) pp. 438-63.

t Rivista Sci. Biol., ii. (1900) pp. 1-11 (2 figs.). See Zool. Centralbl , vii. (1900>
pp. 786-7.

X Anat. Anzeig., xviii. (1900) pp. 425-40 (5 figs.).

14 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

these, four germinal discs were present in the egg, two quite distinct
from each other, and two connected. The author believes that this must
have been the result of the presence of four germinal vesicles in the egg.
The other two eggs were in the gastrula stage, and showed two invagina-
tions instead of a single one. From the appearances presented, the
author believes that the spreading of the blastoderm over the yolk
during the process of invagination arises not only from a direct con-
version of the material at the spot into protoplasm, but also by an ex-
tension of the already formed blastoderm, due to a spreading-out of
elements originally near together.

Periodicity in Spermatogenesis.* — Dr. Gustave Loisel finds, from a
study of spermatogenesis in the sparrow, that periods of spermatogenetic
activity alternate with periods of testicular repose. The latter are at
first associated with cellular regression and partial or total absorption
of the formed elements. As maturity approaches the periods of repose
are shorter. It may be, the author suggests, that we have here to seek
for an interpretation of sexual precocity and periodicity in mammals and
man.

"Nebenkem" of Sperm-cells.f — Dr. Friedr. Meves has studied, in
the male cell of Paludina vivipara and Pygsera bucephala, the structure
called by von la Valette St. George the Nebenkem. Meves believes
that this term should lapse, and himself employs for the separate granules
Benda's term mitocJiondria, and for the Nebenkem which may be
formed by their union, the term mitochondrial corpuscle. In Paludina,
as is well known, there are two kinds of spermatozoon, the difference
being first obvious during the growth-period of the respective spermato-
gonia. In the spermatogonia irom which the "hair-like sperms" ulti-
mately arise, there are a number of minute scattered mitochondria,
which at tie approach of the first maturation division arrange them-
selves first in filaments and then in rings. At first small, the rings
increase in size, and are as it were pulled out lengthwise, so that they
form double threads. At the division equal numbers of those double
threads pass into the daughter-cells, and this is repeated at the second
division. As the spermatozoon is formed, the threads unite into little
vesicles, at one stage four in number, which are the equivalents of
the Nebenkem. These vesicles surround the middle-piece of the de-
veloping sperm, and by fusion form a complete envelope for it. In the
development of the " vermiform sperms " the mitochondria do not fuse,
but remain throughout in the granular form. They accumulate about
the middle-piece of the developing sperm as granules, and give rise to
the appearance of cross-striping.

In Pygsera bucepliala there are also two kinds of spermatozoon. The
development of the sperms is described, but in the absence of figures it
may be sufficient to note the chief point of importance — that the mito-
chondria after the second maturation division fuse to form a single
corpuscle, which is the Nebenkem in von la Valette St. George's sense.
In an exhaustive survey of the literature the author points out how
these results aid in the interpretation of the more or less isolated
observations of other authors on granules and so forth in the sperm.

* Compt< j 6 Rendus, cxxxi. (1900) pp. 725-7.

t Arch. Mikr. Auat., lvi. (1900) pp. 553-606 (2 pis. and 2 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 15

Especially lie notes that the spiral thread of the mammalian sperm is
formed of mitochondria, and is therefore the equivalent of the envelope
of the middle-piece, and so of the Nebenkern of Invertebrates. He
figures various structures liable to be mistaken for mitochondria or
mitochondrial corpuscles, notes that they may both occur in other cells
besides spermatozoa, e.g. in Sertoli's cells in the testes of Vertebrates,
and discusses the question whether the mitochondria are to be regarded
as identical with the microsomata of tissue-cells. This last point, as
well as the question of function, is left undecided.

Fertilisation in Petromyzon fluviatilis.* — Dr. Karl Herfort has
studied the maturation and (artificial) fertilisation of the eggs of the
lamprey, and gives his general results as follows. In all stages of the
egg foam-structure of the cytoplasm in Biitschlrs sense was clearly
detected. The same structure was made out in the spheres and their
radii, while no indication of contractile threads in the sense intended
by Van Beneden, Boveri, &c. was observed. The sperm-head, before it
is reconstructed as a pronucleus, consists of a group of small vesicles
which are identical with Platuer's karyosomata. The sperm-sphere
seems to arise from the cytoplasm of the egg. The sphere lies in the egg
behind the sperm-head, and when the latter becomes a pronucleus, the
sphere becomes elongated and spindle-shaped, and the central corpuscle
divides, a division which is followed by that of the sphere. The two
spheres form the poles of the first segmentation spindle, and at the
metaphase increase greatly in size, probably constituting the coarsely
alveolar area which surrounds the daughter-nuclei. The author believes
that the daughter-spheres are new formations here as elsewhere, while
the central corpuscles are to be regarded as permanent organs. As a
remarkable and as yet inexplicable fact, the author notes that the male
pronucleus is at one stage surrounded by a clear area into which the
female pronucleus also migrates. He believes that it is not an artefact,
but can say nothing of its origin, fate, or relations.

Foetal Membranes of Dasyurus. f — Mr. J. P. Hill has found that
Dasyurus viverrinus will live and breed in captivity, and he has therefore
been enabled to study the placentation and process of parturition in great
detail. The present note contains a preliminary account of his results.
The period of gestation appears to be about eight days, which agrees
with Selenka's observations in the case of the opossum. As in other
Marsupials the wall of the embryonic vesicle is divided into three
zones : — (1) The bilaminar omphalopleure — forming here the larger
part of the wall ; (2) the true chorion ; and (3) the trilaminar omphalo-
pleure. An important point is that the proamnion, transitory in the
Australian forms hitherto described, is here, as in Didelphys, persistent,
and invests the embryo up to the fore-limbs. In regard to size, the
allantois is well developed, but the shape is peculiar, being band-like
with no definite stalk, and the vessels are degenerate, a large part of the
area even in the early stage showing no trace of blood-supply. Never-
theless the allantois makes an abortive attempt to fuse with the chorion.
The yolk-sac placenta is somewhat complex, and consists of two parts

* Arch. Mikr. Anat., lvii. (1900) pp. 54-95 (3 pis.).
t Anat. Anzeig., xviii. (1900) pp. 364-73 (1 fig.).

16 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

associated respectively with the vascular and non-vascular parts of the
omphalopleure. It would seem that the former possibly serves mainly
for gaseous interchange, while the latter is concerned with the absorption
of nutriment. In the non-vascular region the omphalopleure is attached
to the uterine epithelium by large pseudopodia-like processes arising
from the cells, and ultimately producing degeneration of the uterine
epithelium, so that maternal and foetal tissues become very closely
connected. As in Perameles, the yolk-sac placenta is contra-deciduate
in type. Further, as in Perameles, delivery takes place through a
median passage, formed at birth by a rupture of the connective-tissue
between the median vagina and the urinogenital sinus. This was de-
monstrated clearly in animals killed during parturition, and it was also
found that the passage rapidly closes up after birth, and must he formed
anew at each parturition.

Chondrocranium of Chick.* — W. Tonkoff states that the development
of the skull in the common fowl has hardly been studied at all since the
publication of Parker's work in 1869. In devoting himself to the task,
he has begun with the study of the chondrocranium, and finds that it
attains its fullest development in the chick at the age of ten days
eighteen hours, while at the same time the foundations of the membrane
bones have been laid. He sectioned the skull at this stage, and recon-
structed a model from the sections. The present instalment of his work
is taken up with a description of the model, and a comparison with
Gaupp's model of the chondrocranium of Lacerta. Among the points
of special interest may be noticed the fact that that part of the squamosal
which unites with the quadrate arises from a cartilage which is histo-
logically indistinguishable from the cartilage of the chondrocranium,
and that the vomer has a paired origin.

Air-sacs of the Chick. t — Prof. D. Bertelli gives an account of the
development of the air-sacs, which he proposes to call cervical, inter-
clavicular, anterior intermediate, posterior intermediate, and posterior,
and discusses the morphological nature of the bird's oblique septum as
distinguished from a true diaphragm.

Development of Excretory Organs in Turtles. J — Miss Emily Eay
Gregory has studied embryos of Aromochelys and Platypcltis, chiefly
the latter, with reference to the development and relations of pronephros,
mesonephros, and metauephros. She finds that the pronephros arises
from outgrowths of the posterior regions of somites 4-10, and that it
displays such variations in development as might be expected in a
rudimentary organ. The posterior tubules are more or less fused with
mesonephric elements, and function as excretory organs. The meso-
nephros may extend anteriorly over much of the pronephric region, and
its tubules fuse with those of the latter organ. The metanephros arises
at the point where the ureter branches from the upper side of the Wolffian
duct, and in the blastema surrounding the ureter. It is independent of
the mesonephros, save for the connection at the Wolffian duct, and per-
haps the participation of a few cells from the mesonephric blastema.

* Anat. Auzeig., xviii. (1900) pp. 296-304 (1 fig.).

t Atti Soc. ToBCana, xvii. (1900) pp. 145-66 (1 pi.).

% Zool. Juhib. (Abt. Anat.), xiii. (1900) pp. 683-714 (6 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 17

Tlio tubules of the metancpliros arise independently in the blastema
surrounding the ureter, and probably also as branches from it. It
would seem therefore that pronephros, mesonephros, and metanephros
are heterodynamous organs only connected by their relations to the
Wolffian duct. The glomus of the pronephros is distinct in origin,
character, position, and extent, from the glomerulus of the metanephros.

Blastopore of Frog 1 .* — Prof. H. V. Wilson has studied the history
of the blastopore of the frog, especially Corophilus feriarum Baird.
Yolk-cells adjacent to the dorsal lip of the blastopore gradually dis-
apjicar under that lip, and this is interpreted as due to outgrowth on
the part of the dorsal lip. The same happens ventrally, and is similarly
interpreted. Ectoderm cells close to the dorsal lip and close to the
ventral lip gradually disappear round their respective lips, and must,
it would seem, become part of the archenteric lining.

After comparing his experiments, it seems to the author that his
results are all explicable on the theory advanced by Assheton (1894),
Whitman, and Eycleshymer (1895), that dorsal and ventral lips overgrow
the yolk, from the places of their first appearance to the lower pole —
the neural plate hence being formed in part on the black hemisphere,
and in part by the backward growth of the dorsal lip over the white
hemisphere, as Pfliiger (1883) thought was possibly the case.

Thymus-Element in Spiracle of Raia.f — Dr. J. Beard has been
able to prove that the structure named by Van Bemmelen the " ventral
vesicular follicle of the spiracle," is really a rudimentary thymus-ele-
ment. He finds that it arises as a placode of the gill-pouch, and with
the rupture of the latter comes to be epiblastic in position. It later
acquires a covering of ordinary epiblast, is penetrated by blood-capil-
laries, and divided by connective-tissue septa, and its epithelium gives
origin to leucocytes. At a later stage it becomes more or less con-
stricted off from the branchial epithelium, but apparently the separation
is not complete, as in the case of an ordinary thymus-elernent.

Regeneration of Lens.f — Herr A. Fischel vindicates against G.
Wolff's criticism his previously st;tted result that the iris — especially
the lower half — is able to form lens-fibres, and a small but indisjmtable
lens. Cases where lens-lesions had occurred were rejected.

b. Histology.

Comparative Histology of Vertebrata.§ — Dr. A. Oppel has pub-
lished the third instalment of this immense work. Two previous parts
dealt with the gullet, stomach, and intestines; this deals with the mouth,
the tongue, the salivary glands, the liver, and the pancreas. The method
of treatment is in great part historical, and there is much physiological
as well as histological information. Various authorities have already
spoken highly of this work of reference.

Structure of Human Epidermis. || — Dr. Ludwig Merk finds that the
horny cells of the human skin contain three distinct substances: — (1) a

* Anat. Anzeig., xviii. (1900) pp. 209-39 (16 figs.).

t Tom. cit., pp. 359-63. J Tom. cit., pp. 324-6. Cf. this Journal, 1898,^p. 406.
§ 'Lehtbuch der vergleichenden mikioskopischen Anatomie der Wirbeltiere,'
iii. Teil, Jena. 1900, Svo, x. and 1180 pp., 679 figs., and 10 pis.
|| Arch. Mikr. Anat., lvi. (1900) pp. 525-35 (2 pis.).

Feb. 20th. 1901 C

18 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

skeleton of epidermal fibrils, which form a peripheral network at the
surface, and a series of internal fibrils running almost at right angles
to these ; (2) a substance wbich is apparently horn and which controls
the form of the cell ; (3) the cell-contents, apparently protoplasmic in
nature. The author strongly contests the current view that the horny
cells are dead, and believes that all layers of the epidermis — even the
outermost — are living. By suitable methods he has succeeded in de-
monstrating nuclei in horny cells.

Fine Structure of Glandular Cells.* — Herr C. Golgi reports on
A. Negri's observation that in the pancreatic and parotid cells of the cat
it is possible, by means of Veratti's mixture (indirect method), to demon-
strate a complex network in the portion of the plasm facing the lumen
of the alveolus. The filaments anastomose and form a beautiful feltwork
which is not connected with the nucleus. Fine branches seem to be con-
nected with the efferent canals of the gland.

Structure of Gastric Epithelium.f — Prof. Martin Heidenhain finds
that in the stomach of Triton tseniatus it is possible to study the first
origin of the mucus-plug of the epithelial cells. In the first stage the
cells show a striated margin composed of isolated protoplasmic rods
(Burstensaume). This peripheral " brush " increases in height, and
its elements secrete a connecting mucoid substance. Later on mucus is
secreted within the cell beneath this striated margin, the rods of the
margin being continued into the subjacent layer. They are there less
numerous, so that the superficial rods appear like the branches of can-
delabra. At a later stage the protoplasmic rods disappear, the basal
first, and the peripheral hist. Of the peripheral rods those at the sides
of the cell appear to persist, probably because they remain in connection
with the subjacent protoplasm.

Classification of Epithelial Cells.! — P. Vignon discusses the varia-
tion in structure of the margin of epithelial cells, with special reference
to the so-called " motionless cilia " of insects and other invertebrates.
He suggests that epithelial cells generally should be arranged in three
categories : — (1) those with a united wall and with or without cuticle
or vibratile cilia ; (2) those with striated margin, whether cuticle or
cilia be present or absent ; (3) those with a margin made up of hollow
prisms, which, as before, may be ciliated or furnished with a cuticle.
The second group includes all cells in which the kinoplasm forms
trabecular, usually in the shape of cylindrical rods, placed perpendicu-
larly to the cell-margin. Such are the cells of the intestine and the
Malpighian tubes in the larva of Cldronomus, the intestinal cells of
Ascaris, and so on. The third group have been described in Amphioxus,
in Petromyzon, and in the larvae of Amphibians. Needless complications,
as the author believes, have been introduced by the failure to recognise
the fact that the cytoplasmic reticulum frequently tends to form tra-
becular. When cilia or peripheral striatum is present, these trabecular
have received special names, as " roots of cilia," &c, but they may exist
when there is neither striation nor cilia. Among the other questions

* Verb. Auat. Ges., xiv. ; in Anat. Anzeig., xviii. (1900) Erg. Hft., pp. 17S-81.
t Anat. Anzeig., xviii. (1900) pp. 417-25 (4 figs.).
% Arch. Zool. Exper., viii. (1900) pp. 3-15 (7 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 19

discussed by the author is the one whether the "basilar granulations
of the cilia " cause the movement of the cilia — a question he is disposed
to answer in the negative. Generally, he believes that the vibratile
apparatus of cells in itself is a simple matter, and it is the condition of
the parietal apparatus which must be employed as a basis of classification
of the cells.

Anastomoses of Gland-tubules.* — Prof. K. W. Zimmermann finds
that in the serous glands of the tongue in man anastomoses of the
tubules are of frequent occurrence. Their presence can be demonstrated
by reconstructions from serial sections. A list of glands in which
similar anastomoses occur is given by the author.

Skin-Glands of Monotremes.f — Herr H. Eggeling corroborates the
view of Gegenbaur as to the homology of mammary glands and sweat-
glands in Monotremes. They are derived from perfectly similar rudi-
ments in the embryos. Another noteworthy point is the absence of
distinctly recognisable sebaceous glands in all the stages examined in
the region of the pouch, where they are abundant in the adult.

The author contrasts sebaceous with sudorific glands, laying em-
phasis on the presence in the latter of a well-defined sharply contoured
lumen extending into the finest branches of the glands. The secretion
of the sudorific glands is formed by a vital metabolic process, while
that of the sebaceous glands is necrobiotic, the cell being sacrificed in
the process of secretion. All sudorific glands and the mammary glands
of higher mammals are permanently canaliculate, vitally secreting in-
tegumentary glands, while the sebaceous glands and the peculiar skin-
glands of reptiles are temporarily canaliculate and necrobiotic in their
mode of secretion.

Luminous Organs of Selachians.^ — Prof. E. Burckhardt finds that
luminous organs, similar to those described by Johann (1899) in Spinax
niger, and observed in Isistius brasiliensis by Bennett (1840), occur in
many Spinacidae and La3margida3, nine cases having been observed.

Structure of Nucleus of Trapezoid Body.§ — Prof. Livio Vincenzi
has succeeded in obtaining successful preparations of the calices of
Held in the nucleus of the trapezoid body in various animals, and finds
that the calix consists of two parts, (1) a pericellular capsule, and (2)
a fibre which forms a more or less closely woven network on the sur-
face of the capsule. The calix at times has a smooth surface, and at
other times shows numerous filiform prolongations straight or curved,
radiating outwards for a greater or less distance. These prolonga-
tions the author finds arise exclusively from the pericellular capsule.
In a concluding note the author criticises Veratti's observations on the
same subject.

Canaliculi of Nerve-cells. || — Dr. Eniil Holmgren finds that the
ganglion-cells of the nerve-collar in Helix pomatia are admirably suited

* Anat. Anzeig., xviii. (1900) pp. 373-G (1 fig.).

t Verb. Anat. Ges., xivtk Vers.; in Anat. Anzeig., Erg. lift., xviii. (1900)
pp. 29-42 (6 figs.).

t Ann. Nat. Hist., vi. (1900) pp. 558-68 (8 figs.).
§ Anat. Anzeig., xviii. (1900) pp. 344-8 ((J figs.).
|| Tom. cit., pp. 290-6 (4 figs.).

C 2

20 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

for the study of the canaliculi, and show clearly that prolongations of
the surrounding stellate interstitial cells penetrate into the cytoplasm,
and there ramify to form a network. These prolongations are hollow,
and their ramifications therefore constitute a network of canaliculi.
which open externally into the meshes of the interstitial tissue. Such.
a system of canaliculi also occurs in the axis-cylinders of nerves, but
a notable difference in the latter is the absence of the " tigroid " sub-
stance found in nerve-cells. The author's preparations showed the
inter-relation of nerve-cells and interstitial cells so clearly, and shed
so much light on his other previous preparations, that he considers that
the cells of the Metazoa generally may be divided into two sets, accord-
ing to the nature of the canaliculi. The two main categories of cells
are then as follows : — (1) Cells of high physiological significance, which
are not simple but of complex organisation, and consist of central cells
provided with a trophic mechanism presided over by subsidiary cells.
Examples are nerve-cells, muscle-cells, reproductive cells, certain gland-
cells. (2) Cells of lower physiological importance, which may possess
canaliculi, but have not a trophic mechanism dependent upon subsidiary
cells. The distinction he believes to be of primary importance. The
paper is illustrated by some striking figures of the nerve-cells of the snail.

Structure of Human Neuroglia.* — Dr. A. J. Aguerre has confirmed
the Ranvier-Weigcrt view as to the minute structure of the neuroglia,
and has further made some novel observations on the nuclei of the glia-
cells. While Weigert speaks only of two kinds of nucleus, large vesi-
cular forms with granular chromatin, and small rounded forms with
homogeneous chromatin, the author's preparations showed pronounced
polymorphism of the nuclei. All possible shapes were present, e. g.
spindle-shaped forms, three-cornered, hourglass-like, &c, the most in-
teresting perhaps being curved forms not unlike the nuclei of certain
leucocytes. There was also a considerable variation in size, the range
being from 3-14 /x. Further, some of the nuclei showed clear indica-
tions of increase by amitotic division, which the author regards as proof
that the glia-cells increase in number. He holds strongly that the
neuroglia is actively functional, and is not merely a passive supporting
substance.

Islands of Langerhans in Pancreas.f — Walter Schulze briefly re-
views the literature of these structures, and points out that the real
question in regard to them is whether they are to be considered as
modified parts of the pancreas, or as structures sui generis. He made
a series of experiments on guinea-pigs by isolating a small fragment of
the pancreas with a ligature, the object being to determine whether or
not the " islands " and the other portions of the pancreatic tissue would
behave alike. In all cases ho found that while the ordinary pancreatic
tissue underwent progressive atrophy, the islands remained unaffected.
This points to the conclusion that the islands are independent struc-
tures, not related to the duct system of the pancreas proper. Again,
reasoning from such pathological phenomena as pancreatic diabetes
leads to the conclusion that the islands are blood-vessel glands of the

* Arch. Mikr. Anat., Ivi. (1900) pp. 509-25 (1 pi.).

f Tom. cit., pp. 491-509 (1 pi.). Cf. this Journal, 1900, pp. 25, 308.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 21

same type as the hypophysis, and that their function in all probalility
is the regulation of the amount of sugar in the blood.

c. General.

Symbiosis.* — Dr. F. Fedde shows, in an interesting lecture, that
intimate partnerships or vital co-operations between organisms are of
frequent occurrence. He uses the term symbiosis widely, to include
commensalism and antagonistic symbiosis (= parasitism), as well as
that intimate internal co-operation illustrated by Radiolarians and their
partner alga3, to which, as it seems to us, there is good reason for re-
stricting the term. He distinguishes what maybe called, zoo-symbiosis,
phyto-symbiosis, and zoo-phyto-symbiosis. It is interesting to com-
pare this lecture with a well-known one by Oscar Hertwig, for the com-
parison shows that many fresh illustrations have come to light.

Genesis of Mid-Pacific Faunas.f — Dr. H. A. Pilsbry discusses the
hypothesis of a late palaeozoic or early mesozoic raid-Pacific continent,
upon the sunken heights of which the present island masses, volcanic
•or coral, have been superposed. The hypothesis is advanced to account
for the constitution of Polynesian land-snail faunas, which are shown
to be : — (1) nearly homogeneous over vast areas ; (2) composed of ancient
types, with no admixture of the great series of modern families ; and
(3) not derivable from any tertiary or modern continental fauna or
faunas in the sense in which Atlantic island faunas have been derived.
The molluscs, laud and marine, supply no evidence that this Pacific con-
tinent was ever connected with or faunally affected by America (North
or South), but are against any such connection.

Power of Flight in Vertebrates.^:— Prof. L. Doderlein notes that if
"the known species of animals be estimated at 420,000, then some 62 p.c.
of these possess the power of flight in some form. If from the total
there be subtracted such groups as the Protozoa, Ccelentera, &c, where
the method of life excludes the possibility of flying organs, the propor-
tion of flying animals in the remaining terrestrial forms is so large as
to lead to the conclusion that flying is the ideal method of locomotion
for land animals, and gives the possessors of the power an enormous
advantage in the struggle for existence. In Vertebrates the flying-
organs may be divided into two sets, true wings which can produce
movements of the body in air without the aid of a fixed starting-point,
and parachutes which cannot be flapped, do not produce independent
movements, but can be utilised in supporting the body during leaping.
Such parachutes are found in two genera of fishes, in a frog, in two
groups of lizards, aud in four groups of mammals, and are theoretically
capable of being used in two ways. They may be used in taking leaps
from the ground, a possible use of which there is no example in land-
vertebrates ; or they may be employed during leaping from heights, so
as to produce oblique instead of vertical descent. The latter is the use
exemplified in land-vertebrates, and is necessarily associated with the
power of climbing, by means of which the animal may attain the height
required, and therefore with the possession of climbing organs. True

* Jahresber. Scliles. Ges., Ixxvii. (1900) pp. 2-15.
T Proc. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1900, pp. 568-S1.
% Zool. Jahrb. (Abt. Syst.), xiv. (1900) pp. 49-G1.

22 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

wings occur only in the Pterosauria, the Chiroptera, and in birds, among
Vertebrates, and in each case the hand has in different ways been modi-
fied in connection with the organ. Nevertheless, the conditions seen
in Galeopitliecus, where the hand supports the patagium, shows that
the distinction between the latter and a true wing is not absolute, and
wings must be supposed to have arisen from patagia. If this be so r
all winged vertebrates must have had climbing ancestors. To this
statement birds seem to form an exception, but the claws and climbing
habit of the hand of the young hoatzin (Opisthocomus), and the claws
of Arcliseopteryx, show that birds may be regarded as descendants of
climbing animals, who have lost their claws owing to the acquisition of
the power of flight. Another important point is that while parachutes
may occur as it were sporadically in animals which still display many
characters in common with allied forms without parachutes, true flying
animals form sharply demarcated independent groups, distinguished by
their wealth of species. The last fact is due in part to the fact that,
while the deep-seated modifications associated with the development of
wings are slow, patagia are such recent modifications that differentia-
tion has not bad. time to act, and partly to the fact that the power of
true flight gives the possessors such an advantage in the struggle for
existence that the formation of new species must be rapid.

Relation of Dinosaurs to Birds.* — Prof. H. F. Osborn discusses
the evidence for a common dinosaur-avian stem in the Permian. We
do not summarise the paper, but its ending. If bipedalism subse-
quently proves to be a common dinosaur character, it would naturally
strengthen the dinosaur-avian stem hypothesis. The presence of a free
quadrate in birds may be explainable as a secondary cbaracter, like the
secondarily free quadrate of certain Lacertilia and Ophidia, due to
degeneration of one of the cranial arches. The passage from a quad-
rupedal to a bipedal type would also mark the transition from the Pro-
ganosauria to the Dinosauria ; and in this bipedal transition, with its
tendency to form the tibio-tarsus, the avian phylum may have been
given off from the dinosaurian. Thus, the author submits that the
dinosaur-avian stem hypothesis should be very seriously reconsidered
in future research among birds and dinosaurs.

Pneumaticity of Skull in Mammals, j — Dr. Simon Paulli gives
details of his results in regard to this point in various orders of Eutheria,
and also sums up the general conclusions obtained from his completed
research. He finds that tbe degree of pneumaticity depends upon the
size of tbe species, and increases with tbe increase in size of the species.
Tbe most general significance of the pneumaticity is that it affords a
means whereby the characteristic shape of the skull may be attained
with the minimum expenditure of osseous tissue ; i.e. it is entirely an
adaptive phenomenon. In consequence it is not possible to directly homo-
logise the pneumatic cavities of the skull in Mammalia generally, except
in regard to their point of origin, that is their position in regard to the
wall of the nasal cavity. In other words, there are no pneumatic spaces-
of fixed morphological value, and sucb phrases as the " sinus frontalis "
or " sinus sphenoidalis " have no significance in comparative anatomy.

* Amer. Nat., xxxiv. (1900) pp. 777-99 (12 figs.).

t Morph. Jabrb., xxviii. (1900; pp. 483-564 (3 pis. and 3G figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 23

Orbital Glands of White Rat.* — Prof. N. Loewenthal finds that in
addition to the infraorbital, there is in the white rat auother gland which
has a connection with the orbital cavity. This new gland lie calls the
glans orbitalis externa. It lies beside the parotid, but nevertheless opens
with the intraorbital by a common duct in the vicinity of the external
angle of the eye.

Variation in Vertebral Column in Man.f — C. E. Bardeen notes that
the vertebral column and ribs in man show frequent deviation from the
normal. In fifty-nine cases, thirty only were perfectly normal as
regards these structures. The commonest variation is the reduction of
the twelfth rib to the rudimentary condition, and this, and other more pro-
nounced illustrations of a tendency towards the shortening of the verte-
bral column, occurred in twenty-three cases. In six cases the vertebral
column showed a tendency to lengthen, and in two of these there were
thirteen rib-bearing vertebras.

Integument of Erethizon dorsalis.J — Dr. Theodor Loweg concludes,
from a study of the skin of foetus and adult of this rodent, that its
ancestors must have been covered with scales, and that the character-
istic bristles and spines developed beneath the posterior free border of
these scales. The arrangement of the spines shows that the scales were
the primitive structures to which the spines have adapted themselves.
Further, in the foetus the skin is marked by warts and quadrilatera
areas which are to be regarded as the last remnants of the ancestra
scales, and are most developed on the dorsal surface. The fine soft
hairs which in the adult fill up the gaps between the spines develope late,
are quite irregularly arranged as contrasted with the regular spines, and
occupy the spaces left by the disappearing scales. Sweat-glands are
absent, and the author regards it as not improbable that the luxuriant
growth of soft hair is lost in the summer-time. The structure of the
spines and bristles is described in detail. The true spines have dark
strongly barbed tips, while barbs are at best only slightly developed on
the bristles. Near the axilla, but towards the dorsal surface, there is at
either side of the body a conical skin-papilla surrounded by a furrow.
These papillae, in spite of the fact that they are small and lie among
the bristles, the author believes to be the teats, which, according to
Brehm, the North American Indians declare to be absent. The author
believes that during the lactation period they become turgid and elon-
gated, so that they can be reached by the young. Their position is per-
haps due to the fact that the animals are climbers, and the mother would
be more hampered in the act of climbing if they were placed elsewhere.
The illustrations include a striking photograph of the foetus, showing the
arrangement of the foetal bristles.

Variation in Didelphys virginiana.§— Mr. C. F. W. McClure finds
that opossums from the neighbourhood of Princeton show an extra-
ordinary range of variation in regard to the venous system. He describes
in detail the variations in regard to the posterior tributaries of the vena
cava posterior of twenty-six specimens. The details are outside our

* Arch. Mikr. Anat., lvi. (1900) pp. 535-52 (1 pi.).

t Anat. Anzeig., xviii. (1900) pp. 377-82.

t Jen. Zeitschr. Naturwiss., xxxiv. (1900) pp. 833-GG (2 pis.).

§ Anat, Anzeig., xviii. (1900) pp. 441-60 (21 figs.).

24 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

range, but the general interest is twofold. In the first place a com-
parison with Hochstetter's account of the development of the vena cava
posterior of Echidna aculeala suggests that the course of development
of the vein is substantially the same in the two forms, and that the
variations in DideJphys are produced by an arrest of development at
various stages. In the second place, it is of interest to note that
Mr. Oldfield Thomas believes that D. virginiana is merely a variety of
the very variable D. marsupialis, and. states that the variability of the
opossums generally is such that specimens even from the same locality
show " an entire absence of constancy in any character or set of
characters." The reference in the quotation is of course to the external
characters.

Respiration in Lungless Salamanders.*— Miss A. I. Barrows has a
brief note on the respiratory organs of Desmognathus fusca. She finds
that the skin contains a network of capillaries, and similar networks are
present in the mouth and pharynx. Further, the entire wall of the
oesophagus is furnished with a network of cajnllaries, which lie in the
epithelium, and. are probably of great respiratory significance in this
lungless form.

'o

Forked Tails in Amphibians. f — Dr. G. Tornier has studied many
cases, and draws a number of conclusions. The degree of super-
regeneration in a region depends on the size of the wound. Forked
tails in natural conditions may be legitimately regarded as the results
of wounds, since exactly analogous states can be induced experimentally.
When regenerative processes set in, the basal parts of the integumental
structure are the first to be laid down in rudiment, and the apical regions
later on ; but with the skeletal parts the process works in the opposite
direction. Because of this there arise two-pointed lizard-tails in which
the skeleton of one of the points seems to wane away towards the axis.
That growth at first abnormal may be corrected is due not to " self-
regulation," but to inequalities of growth.

Abnormalities in Lepidosiren.J — Mr. H. H. Brindley describes par-
tial duplicity of the limb or sudden tapering into a sharp tip, abnor-
malities in all probability of regenerative growth after injury. In the
repair of an injury there is a special proliferation at one point, and the
epidermis makes haste to cover the exposed, subjacent tissues. Thus
the trophic events of growth proceed otherwise than in normal develop-
ment, and extremely slight circumstances may affect the direction of
growth. In the absence of the co-ordination of growth which obtains
in normal development, external interference may in some cases mould
the regenerating structure in a special form.

Teeth and Breathing- Valves of Fishes.§ — Mr. E. Phelps Allis, jun.,
has investigated the structure of the mouth-cavity in Polypterus bicMr,
with special reference to such questions as the homologies of the teeth
and the parts of the palate in Fishes and Amphibians. Of the two rows

* Anat. Anzeig., xviii. (1900) pp. 461-4 (2 figs.).

t Zool. Arizeig., xxiii. (1000) pp. 233-56 (12 figs.).

% Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc, x. (1000) pp. 325-7 (1 pi.).

§ Anat. Anzeig., xviii. (1000) pp. 257-89 (3 figs.).

ZOOLOGY" AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 25

of teeth usually stated to occur in Fishes, tlio pterygo-vomerinc row
and the premuxillo-maxillary row, he believes that the former alono is
present below the Teleostean-like Ganoid Amia. The so-called maxil-
lary teeth of Lepidosteus and Polypterus he believes to be dcrmo-palatine
in origin, and he therefore considers that there is in these fish a new
arch, formed by the premaxillary and dermo-palatine teeth, which is
apparently the arch found in Amphibians and higher Vertebrates.
Further, he states that maxillary and mandibular breathing valves are
very generally found in all fishes which have a premaxillary bone, and
that in Polypterus bones related to teeth are developed in what are
apparently the homologues of both breathing valves. " The maxillary
breathing valve bone, so developed, forms a second superficial bony layer
on the roof of the mouth-cavity, and it and the valve itself seem to foretell
the secondary palate of the higher vertebrates."

Nephrostomes and Segmental Canals in Selachians. * — Frederic
Guitel, following up his discovery that Flemming's liquid differentiates
nephrostomes from the peritoneum, has made a series of observations on
Selachians in the hope of finding these structures. In a female of
Squatina angelus, females of Scyllium canicula, and young males of the
same species, females and young males of Scyllium catulus, and young
females of Centrina salviani, he has succeeded in demonstrating the
occurrence of ciliated nephrostomes opening into distinct segmental
canals. The number of these varies within the limits of the species, and
generally speaking both organs degenerate, especially in the males, as
age increases. This process of degeneration attacks the segmental
canals first, beginning at the renal end, and travelling outwards towards
the nephrostome. Nevertheless, in adult females of Scyllium canicula
the organs were found to be large, and seemed to be of functional im-
portance, as is indicated by the fact that the segmental canals took up
sepia introduced into the ccelom. In a number of other Selachians no
nephrostomes could be made out.

New Abyssal Fish, f — M. Louis Dollo describes as Cryodraco
antarcticus g. et sp. n. a fish taken by the Belgian Antarctic Expedition,
which appears to be a member of the Trachinidae adapted for life at
great depths. Among its remarkable adaptive characters are, the
characters of the skin, which is scaleless, colourless, and transparent ;
the great elongation of the body ; the spathulate snout ; the great size
of the eyes ; and especially the remarkable characters of the ventral fin,
which has two united rays of great extent, spathulate at their extremities.
This last character is also present in other unrelated abyssal fish, e. g.
Bathypterois and Photostomias. Another point of importance about the
capture is that it is a new proof of the frequency of the Trachinidae
within or in the vicinity of the Antarctic Polar Circle, while the family
is hardly known from the Arctic region.

Development of Pigment.* — S. Prowazek finds that in young fish
the different pigment-cells appear in a definite order, first the black, then
the red, finally the yellow. Also, the pigment-cells tend to take up

* Arch. Zool. Exper., viii. (1900) pp. 33-40.
t Bull. Acad. Sci. Belg., 1900, pp. 128-37.
X Zool. Anzeig., xxiii. (1900) pp. 477-SO.

26 SUMMAKY OF CUEEENT EESEAECHES RELATING TO

positions determined by the lines of least histological resistance, but
their course is not directly influenced by the position of the blood-vessels
or capillaries. The author believes that the pigment is produced by a
katabolic modification of the cell-substance.

Structure of Amphioxus. * — Eugen Burchardt has had very abun-
dant material of this much-investigated form, and has been able to make
out some new points. In regard to the coelom he finds that the com-
plexity of its relations is accentuated by the occurrence of individual
variation. The transverse canals, which are ccelomic in nature, consti-
tute a regular means of communication between the ccelomic canals of
the pharynx and the liver-ccelom, and serve to equalise the pressure in
the two sets of spaces. They do not afford a means of communication
between blood-system and body-cavity, as suggested by various authors.
The author succeeded in finding Lankester's " brown funnels," and in
addition two paired septa which form a chamber corresponding to the
28th segment, The septa must be regarded as persistent splanchnocoelic
septa, and are the only regions in which true connective-tissue originates.
The limited area in which this tissue is formed the author ascribes to
the fact that Amphioxus is to be regarded as degenerate. He finds that
the pharyngeal bars may contain cysts due to a coccidium named by him
Branchiocystis amphioxi, which is apparently a common parasite. In
the coelom of one specimen of Amphioxus an " encapsuled organism "
was obtained, whose affinities remain wholly doubtful, while in the food-
canal of other specimens an apparently new Radiolarian — Prismozoon
neapolitanum — was obtained. The paper contains a copious bibliography.

Osmosis between Hsemolymph and Sea-Water. f — R. Quinton gives
a series of tables for starfish, lug-worm, Sipunculus, crab, lobster,
Aplysia, Sepia, &c, showing (a) the approximate equality of the salinity
in the internal fluids and in the surrounding medium ; (b) the rapid
change of the internal salinity when the external salinity is altered ; and
(c) that this is due to osmosis. There is no direct communication
(excejit in the starfish) ; the weight of the animal increases in a hypo-
tonic medium, diminishes in a hypertonic medium, and remains constant
when equilibrium is established. This must be due to osmosis, and it
is shown that salts as well as water pass through the body-wall.

Osmotic Pressure in Internal Fluids of Selachians.^ — E. Rodier
finds that the blood-serum, the pericardial, the peritoneal, and the uterine
fluids, freeze at almost the same temperature as the sea-water. As their
saline composition is notably different from that of the sea- water, the
uniformity of congelation temperature is ascribed to the organic sub-
stances (urea, &c.) in the body-fluids, and points to osmotic equilibrium
between outside and inside.

L' Annexe Biologique.§ — We have received the preface, table of con-
tents, and index of the fourth volume of this valuable record, which
deals with researches in general biology for the year 1898.

*

Jen. Zeitschr. Naturwiss., xxxiv. (1900) pp. 719-832 (9 pis.),
t Comptes Rendus, exxxi. (1900) pp. 905-8, 952-5.
t Tom. cit.. pp. 100S-10.
§ Paris, 1900, xxvii. and 842 pp.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 27

Tvinicata.

Morphology of Tunicata.* — Maynard M. Metcalf has examined an
extensive series of simple and compound Tunicates with special reference
to the intersiphonal organs and their significance. He describes tho
various forms which these organs assume in representatives of almost
all the families, and sums up as follows. The ciliated funnel (dorsal
tubercle) is present in all species of Tunicates (except rarely in Phallusia
mammillata), and receives innervating fibres from the brain ; but in some
cases these latter were made out only in connection with the duct in the
vicinity of the funnel. The funnel may receive the duct of the neural
gland, but this is not invariably the case, and it cannot be regarded as
merely the aperture of the gland. Anatomically the evidence as to the
sensory function of the funnel is complete, but the nature of the sense sub-
served is entirely obscure. The development of the ciliated funnel shows
that it is the modified neuropore. The neural gland in some form is
present in all species of Tunicates, but is absent from the Phorozooid
of Doliolum. It arises from the central neural tube, and the anterior
part of this tube forms its duct, usually opening by the modified neuro-
pore into the pharynx. The secretion of the gland originates by the
disintegration of cells proliferated from the endothelium of its wall.
There are great differences between the different species in the degree
of development of the gland and the character of its rapheal prolongation,
but there is no great variability within the limits of a species. In regard
to function the author's results are chiefly negative ; and while he favours
the suggestion that the gland is the homologue of the hypophysis of
Vertebrates, he considers that this suggestion has been too hastily
accepted as established, in view of the many difficulties which still
exist.

In addition to the account of the intersiphonal organs, the paper
includes discussions on various other points. Among these may be
noticed the discovery that Salpa cylindrica is protandrous and not proto-
gynous like other species ; the confirmation of Brooks' description of the
granular bodies within the blastomeres of embryos of Salpa as ingested
follicular nuclei ; an account of the anatomy of Octacnemus patagoniensis ;
a description of a new species of Bostrichobranchus ; and so on. The
author dissents from Herdman's view that Octacnemus is related to Salpa,
and believes that it should be placed among the simple Ascidians near
the Clavelinidae.

Magellan Ascidians.f — Dr. W. Michaelsen gives an account of a
rich collection of holosomatous Ascidians, including the new genus
Agnesia, from the Magellan and South-Georgian region.

Follicular Cells of Salpa.J — Herr Todaro describes tho remarkable
way in which the follicular cells — which he calls trophic or lecithin
cells — become associated with the blastomeres, and multiply among
them, first by karyokinesis and then amitotically. The body composed
of blastomeres plus lecithin cells is hardly an embryo ; it is a special

* Zool. Jahrb. (Abt. Anat.), xiii. (1900) pp. 495-602 (10 figs, and 7 pis.).
t Zoologica (Chun), Heft 31, Bd. xii. (1900) pp. 1-148 (3 pis.).
X Vera. Anat. Ges., xiv. Vers. ; in Anat. Anzeig., xviii. (1900) Erg. Hft., pp. 194-
202 (3 figs.).

28 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

arrangement for the nutrition and multiplication of the blastomeres,
which only after a long period become differentiated into the germinal
layers.

Development of Heart in Ciona intestinalis.* — Marc de Selys
Longchainps finds that the pericardium has a paired symmetrical origin,
intimately united with the ventral encloderm of the pharynx. Thejoeri-
cardium is quite independent of the epicardium both in time and in mode
of origin. The two pericardial vesicles increase in size and embrace one
another, forming a vesicle divided into halves by a double septum.
Willey's account of the origin of the heart-cavity by a separation of the
components of the double septum is confirmed.

INVERTEBRATA.

Metazoa of Salt Lakes.f— Prof. P. Butschinsky previously gave an
account of the Protozoa of the Chadjibej-Liman and the Kujalintzky-
Liman at Odessa, and now gives lists of the higher forms found in the
lakes. The salinity in the former lake varies from 5-7° Beaume, and
in the latter from 9-9^° B. ; but while the water of the Chadjibej-
Liman differs from sea-water only in its concentration, that of the
Kujalintzky-Liman contains no sulphate save that of lime. As might
be expected, the Metazoa are few in number, not only absolutely but
also relatively to the Protozoa, and are fewer in the dense waters of the
Kujalintzky-Liman than in those of the Chadjibej-Liman. For the
same lake the number of Metazoa varies with varying salinity, Daphnia
brachiata appearing when this falls to 5° B., and Artemia salina dis-
appearing when it approaches saturation point. Generally, the fauna
may be said to consist of fresh-water, marine, and saline forms, and of
these the marine forms live chiefly on the banks. The greatest adapt-
ability to varying conditions among the representatives of the Metazoa
is displayed by the Crustacea, as is shown by their occurrence in water
of very varying salinity.

Fauna of Salcombe Estuary4— Messrs. E. J. Allen and R. A. Todd,
with the assistance of W. Garstang, W. J. Beaumont, T. V. Hodgson,
and E. H. Worth, have given an account of the fauna of this estuary,
which was the hunting ground of Montagu. As the authors say, " It
is only by a large number of detailed records of this kind, where all
possible information is given as to the exact localities and conditions
in which each species is found, that we can hope to ascertain the general
principles which underlie the distribution of the animals which live in
the sea."

Tentaculites and Nowakia. § — Herr G. Gtirich discusses these
Silurian fossils, and emphasises especially the importance of the em-
bryonic vesicle or nucleus in Noivakia, which points to the relationship
of this genus with Molluscs (Pteropods), while Tentaculites ornatus,
T. schlotheimi, T. sandbergeri, T. ienuicincius, &c. seem to be genuine
worm-tubes.

* Bull. Sci. Acad. Belg., 1900, No. G, pp. 432-41 (6 figs.).

t Zool. Anzeig., xxiii. (1900) pp. 495-7. Cf. this Journal, 1897, p. 300.

t Journ. Mar. Biol. Ass., vi (1900) pp. 151-217 (1 chart).

§ Jahresber. SSchles. Ges., lxxvii. (1900) pp. 32-5.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 29

Indian Ocean Dredging.* — Dr. A. F. McArdle reports ou the dredg-
ing season 1899-1900, and notes some of the most interesting finds : —
e.g. a very largo (12 in.) adnlt male of Bathynomus giganteus, the
strange crab Trichopeltarium ovale, the Atlantic fish Hoplostethus atlanti-
cum, 28 specimens of Glyplwcrangon investigatoris, Bleurotoma symbiotes
encrusted with Epizoantlms.

Mollusca.
a. Cephalopoda.

Effect of Reagents on Segmenting Eggs.f — Wl. Schimkewitsch
has made a series of experiments as to the effect of concentrated sea-
water, sulphate of manganese, sodium bromide, potassium iodide, and
other substances, on the meroblastic eggs of Loligo vulgaris. He finds
that the effect of any solution is twofold, the mechanical effect due to
changes of pressure being distinct from the chemical effect. It would
appear that of the two the former has the greater influence, as is seen
from the fact that two compounds very different chemically may produce
the same effect on the ovum. The most obvious effect produced is usually
the formation of outgrowths of the egg or furrows on its surface, which
produce notable changes in the growth and relations of the germinal
layers. At certain stages in the development the ectoderm, under the
influence of certain reagents, exhibits a teloblastic mode of increase,
comparable to that seen, e.g. in primitive mesoderm cells, which suggests
that the teloblastic method, when it occurs normally, may be due to
special conditions of pressure. Again, certain reagents result in the
shell-gland arising by a process of delamination instead of the normal
invagination process. But while the author in this way points to various
artificially produced phenomena which cast light upon normal processes,
it would seem that the complete interpretation of the new conditions is
not as yet possible.

Plague of Octopus.J — Mr. W. Garstaug reports that until the spring
of 1899 the true or common Octopus (0. vulgaris) was comparatively
rare in the neighbourhood of Plymouth, since the opening of the Ply-
mouth Laboratory in 1888. But in 1899 and 1900 the numbers have
enormously increased, on both shores of the English Channel — probably
in association with the warmth of recent summers — and the result has
been serious loss to crab and lobster fisheries. Mr. Garstang suggests
the advisability of temporarily suspending all fishing for crabs and
lobsters, and of employing a number of men to fish for octopus, e.g. with
unbaited pots.

y. Gastropoda.

Locomotion of Fulgur.§ — Mr. W. S. Wallace observed the manner
and rate of locomotion in Fulgur carica up the glass side of an aqua-
rium. He says that the progression of the foot-surface over the
smooth glass is accorujdished by two devices: — (1) the pedal secretion
is adhesive ; and (2) the foot, when not in motion, becomes a vacuum-
cup of considerable efficiency. But these cannot account for progression,

* Ann. Nat. Hist., vi. (1900) pp. 471-8.

t Zeitscbr. wiss. Zool., lxvii. (1900) pp. 491-528 (4 pis.).

% Journ. Mar. Biol. Ass., vi. (1900) pp. 260-73.

§ English Mechanic, lxxii. (1900) p. 244 (4 figs.).]

30 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

The rate was about 3^ in. per minute on a smooth glass set vertically
in water ; almost equivalent to a refutation of the time-honoured saying,
" as slow as a snail."

Development of Aplysia. * — D. Carazzi criticises Georgevitch's
account of this development. In the first place he states that that author
has mistaken the species, and that his specimens must have been eggs of
A. punctata Cuv. and not of A. depilans as stated. Second, he criticises
the method employed ; and finally states that Georgevitch has inverted
his eggs, placing the anterior region below, the posterior above, so that
he has called the small blastomeres A and B, instead of C and D as they
should be called. This cardinal error, according to Carazzi, vitiates the
whole research.

Tectibranchs. j — J. Guiart gives a description of the structure of
Aplysia depilans and Philine aperta, and discusses the affinities (a) be-
tween Bulleidee and Aplysiidae ; (6) between Tectibranchs and Nudi-
branchs ; (c) between Tectibranchs and Prosobranchs. His general
views as to the phylogeny are expressed in this scheme : —

Dermatobranchs

Aplysiidre

Pleurobranchs

Acera

BulleitisB

I

Acteon

Prosobranchs

Artaropoda.
a. Insecta.

Metamorphosis of the Blow-fly 4 — Dr. F. Supino has made a fresh
study of the post-embryonic development of Calliphora erytlirocepliala.
We cite two conclusions : — (a) the supposed phagocytes of Koualevsky,
Viallanes, Bees, and others do not appear to act as such ; the destruction
of the larval adipose cells does not seem due to leucocytes ; or, in any
case, these elements are not indispensable in the j)rocess ; (&) the
imaginal adipose tissue is not developed at the expense of the muscle-
nuclei, but from mesenchyme cells, which, though at first scattered,
come to be regularly disposed as the foundation of the said tissue.

* Anat. Anzeig., xviii. (1900) pp. 382-4 (2 figs.). Cf. this Journal, 1900, p. 6G6.
t Causeries Scient. Soc. Zool. France, 1900, No. 4, pp. 77-132 (4 pis. and 35 figs.).
J Bull. Soc. Entomol. Ital., xxxii. (1900) pp. 192-216 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 31

Pupal Histolysis in Diptera.* — C. Vauey has studied this in arti-
ficially reared larvas of Gaslrophilus cqui and in species of Chironomus,
and gives an account of the various stages in the process. In CEstridae,
as in Muscidre, the destruction of the tissues is duo to phagocytes, which
are no other than the cellular elements of the blood. Iu the blood of
Chironomus, however, there are no elements which can act thus, and the
phagocytosis is due to individualised cells of the adipose tissue.

Role of "Phagocytes" in Insect Metabolism.f — Prof. Antonio
Berlese publishes a brief note on this subject. He considers that the
term phagocyte is totally inapplicable to the amcebocytes or leucocytes
of larval insects ; for not only have these no destructive action on the
larval tissues, but also they are incapable of digesting the detritus when
these tissues have broken down. Their function is twofold : — they serve
to transport elaborated food-material to areas in which formative pro-
cesses are going on, and they are also capable of giving rise to new
mesodermal tissue by direct transformation into its elements. Elements
of the fatty body in the newly-hatched larva, and muscular elements, may
arise in this way from leucocytes. When these convey food-material,
they do not alter it in any way, so can have no digestive properties.
In general they may be said to be the exact opposite of phagocytes.

Histolysis in Muscidse.t — Prof. F. Henneguy agrees with Berlese
that the cells of the fatty body (in Calliphora vomitoria and Lucilia
csesar) are never attacked by phagocytes. As Berlese says, these cells
are trophocytes, — elements which elaborate the substances necessary for
the nutrition of the tissues of the nymph. Henneguy does not, however,
deny that it may be otherwise ; e.g. as Vaney describes, in (Estridaa.

Freezing of Body Fluids in Insects.§ — P. Bachmetjew has con-
tinued his observations on the " critical point " in insects cooled below
freezing-point. His previous results showed that, as is the case with
water in capillary tubes, the body-fluids can be cooled considerably
below their -freezing- point before solidification occurs, and when it does
occur there is an instantaneous rise of temperature to the normal freez-
ing-point. His present results show that the exact point at which the
solidification occurs (the critical point), depends, among other causes,
upon the rate of cooling, but this dependence is by no means of a
simple kind. Thus, a certain rate of cooling gives the critical point
its minimum value in Vanessa atlanta and Papilio podalirius, and its
maximum value in Pier is rapse and Aporia cratsegi. Again, the critical
temperature differs in different species, though it may perhaps be said
generally that the larger the pupa the higher is the critical temperature,
i.e. the nearer it is to the freezing-point. The behaviour of para-nitro-
toluol and benzol, when subjected to temperatures lower than those of
their normal points of solidification, showed a striking analogy to that
of the fluids of insects.

Silk of the Procession-Caterpillar.|] — Prof. B. Dubois notes the
interesting fact that this caterpillar — Cnetocampa processionxa — spins

* Comptes Rendus, cxxxi. (1900) pp. 758-61.

t Zool. Anzeig., xxiii. (1900) pp. 441-9.

X Comptes Rendus, cxxxi. (1900) pp. 90S-10.

§ Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., Ixvii. (1900) pp. 520-50 (3 figs.).

|| Ann. Soc. Linn. Lyon, xlvi. (1900) pp. 125-7.

32 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

a thread of silk as it goes, and that this, attached by the leader to the
objects crept over, forms the clue which the others follow.

Alleged Termitophily.* — Herr C. Berg doubts the accuracy of the
conclusion drawn by Wasmann and Horn as to the termitophilous life
of certain Cicindelids (Cratohsera bruneti, Cicindela cyanitarsis, and
Chilonyclia auripennis). Berg thinks that the cases should be described
as " termitariojyhilous," not termitophilous. The Cicindelids select the
termitaries as sunny places well suited for play and for hunting (for
flies, spiders, &c.), and also affording some protection from lizards. As
the Cicindelids feed by clay they have little to do with the nocturnal
termites.

Aphis of the Sugar-Beet.f — P. Doerstling finds, in Oregon, a disease
of the sugar-beet due to the ravages of an aphis. It attacks the root
first of all, proceeding thence to the leaves, and causes a large reduction
in the produce of sugar by converting it into glucose and free acid.

Colour-Changes in Locusts.* — J. Kiinckel d'Herculais shows that
in the American Schistocerca paranensis Burmeister, as in the Old
World Sell, peregrina, red coloration characterises the hibernating
period and yellow that of pairing and egg-laying. He gives an account
of the various changes in the course of life, and regards the pigment as
zoonerythrin.

Habits and Metamorphoses of Beetles.§ — Captain Xamben has
published the tenth of his memoirs on this subject. He deals especially
with the Clytridfe (Clytra, Labidostomis, Gynandrophthalma, Copto-
cephala, Lachnsea) and CryptocephalidaB (Cryptoccphalus stylosomus, and
Pachybrachys). There are interesting general notes on the behaviour
of the larvae and adults.

German Species of Aspidiotus.|| — Dr. L. Eeh has an interesting note
upon this point. It has been generally supposed that there is one species
of Aspidiotus in Germany, the A. ostreseformis of Curtis. The author
found recently that specimens from North Germany differed in various
respects from the (by hypothesis) typical A. ostreseformis of South
Germany. Curtis' original description is not of great assistance ; but
from English entomologists the author learnt that the traditional A.
ostreseformis of England is the North German form, while he finds that
the South German form hitherto called by that name by the Agricultural
Bureau is apparently A. pyri Lichtenstein. The distribution is inter-
esting ; for while the one is typically a northern form and the other a
southern, they overlap in Mid-Germany, where one fruit-tree may be in-
fested by the two species. Again, in America there is also a northern (A.
ancylui) and a southern (A. perniciosus) form, and the two show respec-
tively marked affinities with A. ostreseformis and A. pyri respectively.

Parasites of Oaks.^f — L. G. Seurat gives an account of the more
destructive parasites of Quercus suber and Q. mirbeclci in Tunis. The

* Comun. Mus. Nac. Buenos Aires, i. (1000) pp. 212-5. See Zool. Centralbl.,
vii. (1900) pp. 701-2.

t Zeitschr. f. Pflanzenkrankheiten, 1900, p. 21. See Bot. Centralbl., Ixxxiv.
(1900) p. 329. X Comptes Kendus, oxxxi. (1900) pp. 958-60.

§ Ann. Soc. Linn. Lyon, xlvi. (1900) pp. 1-72.

i| Zool. Anzeig., xxiii. (1900) pp. 497-9.

Tf Ann. Sci. Nat. (Zool.), xi. (1900) pp. 1-34 (10 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 33

most dreaded parasite in the case of the cork-oak is the ant Gremasto-
ijnster scutellaris, which constructs its nests in the corky layer, and by
means of its formidable mandibles works great destruction, rendering
the cork quite useless. Again the valuable wood of Quercus mirbechi
is attacked by the larvae of Cerambyx mirbechi, whose habits the author
was unable to study. In addition, the wood after felling is liable to the
attacks of a large number of insects, whose structure and habits are
noted.

New Genus of Flies.* — G. Wasmann records four species of an
interesting new genus of flies found in nests of Termites. The point of
interest is the external resemblance to the physogastric AleocharinaB, so
that the author did not at first doubt the label " Staphylinid beetle "
which accompanied the first specimen sent to him from Natal. Later
he found that the insects in reality belong to the order Diptera, family
Stethopathidte, and he describes four species all belonging to Termito-
xenia g. n. From the somewhat lengthy diagnosis the following, as
illustrating the most important characters, may be quoted : — "Labium
biarticulatum, longe productum instar stili vel rostri, art. 2° fisso,

apicibus acutis, sub-corneis Prothorax angustus, oblongus,

convexus, sub angulo basali externo utrimque appendice mobili (ple-
rumque erecto), vel stiliformi vel hamiformi, munitus. Meso- et meta-
notum sub abdominis basi occulta. Abdomen infra recurvatum, ano
antrorsum directo, peramplum in 5 , modice inflatum in $ ." It is the
shape of the abdomen especially which renders the resemblance to such
beetles as Corotoca and Spiracldlia so striking. The remarkable thoracic
appendages are believed by the author to function as transporting organs,
enabling the flies to attach themselves to the hosts. Further, he believes
that from the characters of the mouth-parts the flies must be regarded as
ectoparasites of the Termites. Further details, especially in regard to
histology, are to follow.

Structure of Insect Testes. - ]" — Herr N. Cholodkowsky maintains the
view that the giant cell or Verson's cell is to be regarded partly as a
" rhachis " — a residue of the division process with nutritive significance
for the developing spermatozoa — and partly as a primitive sperm-cell, for
it may exhibit mitoses. The varied occurrence of the " rhachis " in
different types is discussed.

Bees as Reflex Machines.^ — Abraham Netter directs attention to
the numerical and geometrical regularities illustrated in the life and
labours of bees, and indicates a number of facts, such as the result of
shifting the hive, which point to the conclusion that they are automatic
reflex machines. He also asks a number of curious questions, e.g.
whether the hexagonal mosaic of the eye may not be associated with the
plan of the combs.

/3. Myriopoda.

Volatile Poison of lulus terrestris. — C. Phisalix § has studied the
yellowish secretion which escapes from the cutaneous glands of this

* Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., lxvii. (1900) pp. 599-617 (1 pi.).

t Trav. Soc. Imp. Nat. St. Pe'tersbourg, xxx. (1900)5 pp. (Russian, with German
summary). See Zool. Centmlbl., vii. (1900) p. G99.

X Comptes Rtcdus, cxxxi. (1900) pp. 976-8. § Tom cit., pp. 955-7.

Feb. 20th, 1901 D

ol SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

millipede. It has a pungent odour and is certainly poisonous. It is
not an albuminoid and it is markedly volatile.

A subsequent paper by Behal and Phisalix * details the chemical
evidence which has led these authors to the conclusion that the poison
includes a quinone, and very probably the ordinary quinone. They
point out that although the production of analogous substances by other
invertebrate animals is unknown, Beyerinck has shown that the sapro-
phytic Streptothrix chromogenes found about the roots of various trees
produces quinone which has an important role in helping to form humus.
It is interesting therefore to recall that lulus feeds on vegetable debris.
The penetrating odour of the quinone is probably protective to the
. millipede.

Poison of Scolopendra morsitans.f — Prof. S. Jourdain recalls his
observations of thirty years ago, in which he showed that the poison of
this centipede is fatal to small mammals and birds, but, as he points out;,
this is a very different affair from that which Phisalix has discovered.

5- Arachnida.

Koenenia mirabilis in Texas."]: — -Prof. "W. M. Wheeler announces
this very interesting discovery. The remarkable animal which he de-
scribes is a primitive synthetic form, found by Grassi in Sicily, and
established by him as a type of the distinct arachnid order of Micro-
thelyphonida. In Europe it was found associated with Iapyx, Cam-
podea, Pauropus, and Scolopendrella ; in Texas it was associated with
the same series, excepting Pauropus; it perhaps feeds on the eggs of
Campodea or Iapyx. It is probably a relict of an ancient widely dis-
tributed fauna, analogous to Projapyx stylifer from Liberia and the
Argentine Republic.

Accessory Chromosome in Sperm-cells of Spider.§ — Miss L. B.
Wallace notes that the " chromosome nucleolus " or " accessory chromo-
some," known to occur in the testicular cells of various insects, is to be
seen in the late spermatogonia and in the prophase of the first spermato-
cyte in an Agalenid spider.

Is there Polymorphism and Parthenogenesis in Gamasidse ? || —
Dr. Anna Foa has investigated these two questions. There is no poly-
morphism, though there is admittedly specific variability. The forms
which Berlese regarded as within the species Gamasus coleoptratorum
include two other distinct species — G. pusillus Berl. and G. crassus
Kr. The same is true of the alleged polymorphism of Holostaspis.
Nor is there any definite evidence of parthenogenesis. At the proper
seasons the males of all the species are always discoverable.

€. Crustacea.

Patagonian Cladocera.1T — Sven Ekman describes a collection of
Cladocera obtained in ponds, &c. in Patagonia. The collection includes
many new species. In collections made from the end of February

* Comptes Rendus, cxxxi. (1900) pp. 1004-7. f Tom. cit., pp. 1007-8.

X Amer. Nat., xxxiv. (l'.)OO) pp. 837-50 (4 figs.).
§ Anat. Anzeig., xviii. (1900) pp. 327-8 (5 figs.).

Bull. Soc. Entomol. Ital., xxxii. (1900) pp. 121-49 (13 figs.).

■j Zool. Jahrb. Abt. Syst.), xiv. (1900) pp. C2-84 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 35

to the end of March, males and winter eggs were found. The season
corresponds to the late autumn of Europe, and the fact indicates that,
as in European forms, an autumnal breeding season occurs.

Fresh-water Ostracods of Germany.* — Herr G. W. Midler com-
pletes his monograph, dealing with Cypridffi, Cytheridse, Darwinulidfe.

Development of Leptodora hyalina.f — -Max Samter has undertaken
the study of this development, in the hope of settling some of the con-
troversies in regard to the phylogeny of the Cladocera. The present
instalment of the work includes an account of the development up to
the time when the embryo quits the vitelline membrane and begins life
on its own account. Like Weismann the author was unable to stain
the nucleus of the unsegmented egg deeply, and found that it appeared
as a light spot in all his preparations. Eroru the characters of the egg
and the nature of the gastrulation process, the author believes that the
yolk in the egg is a recent acquisition which has produced remarkable
modifications of the process of development. In the unsegmented egg
there is a nearly central mass of protoplasm containing the segmenta-
tion nucleus, and sending out protoplasmic prolongations through the
envelope of yolk in all directions to a peripheral layer of protoplasm.
The polar body was not clearly made out, though the author noted
appearances similar to those observed by Weismann in Daphnids. The
first and second segmentation furrows are internal, but at the eight-
cell stage the products of division approach the surface and fuse with
the superficial protoplasm. As division proceeds, the egg-surface shows
scattered cells connected by protoplasmic processes lying on a field of
yolk, and the internal yolk shows no sign of segmentation. A blasto-
sphere in the ordinary sense is therefore not formed before gastrulation
begins. This process takes place in the following way. The surface
of the egg is covered with cells which are only loosely connected, and
show numerous intracellular chinks and fissures through which the
yolk-spherules appear. At one spot these fissures are larger than else-
where, and this spot marks the origin of the endo-mesodermic primordium.
Round this area the smaller ectoderm cells proliferate, and at the same
time a movement of the endoderm cells begins, so that the endo-meso-
dermic disc gradually diminishes in size. The inwandering of endo-
derm cells is most pronounced in the posterior region of the disc, the
cells of which ultimately take up a position on the ventral surface and
form a closed cell-layer. Others of the endoderm cells are merely
overgrown by the proliferating ectoderm, so that generally it may be
said that the method of gastrulation is, as it were, intermediate between
invagination of the ordinary type and the immigration of isolated cells.
The relations of this method of gastrulation to other types found in
Crustacea, and the conclusions as to the position of Leptodora to be
drawn from its occurrence in this type, the author intends to discuss
in the general part of his work. He believes that the invagination of
the endoderm primordium is prevented by the resistance of the newly
acquired yolk, and therefore that the modified process of gastrulation is
accomplished in part by active movements of the separate cells, in part
by passive overgrowth by the ectoderm cells.

* Zoologica, Heft 30, ii. (1900) pp. 49-112 (4 pis.).

t Ztitschr. wiss. Zool., lxviii. (1900) pp. 169-2(30 (6 pla.).

D 2

36 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Arthropod Vision.* — Dr. Em. Radl considers that those who have
discussed this subject have not realised the importance of a study of
the nerve-centres of the eye, as well as of the dioptric apparatus itself.
His belief that the key to the problem of Arthropod vision is to be
sought in the central rather than in the peripheral organs, has led him
to make an exhaustive examination of the optic tract in Squilla mantis,
as well as of the eye itself. He briefly describes the external appear-
ance of the eye, and gives a very comprehensive account of the occur-
ence of the phenomenon of " double eyes " — well known to occur in
Squilla — in other Arthropods, both aquatic and terrestrial. He then
somewhat briefly describes the eye itself, and gives a full account of
the structure of the eye-ganglia. Each ommatidium gives oif seven
nerve-fibrils which unite in a bundle, and as these bundles cross the
space between the basal membrane of the eye and the first ganglion
(ganglion retinas), those from neighbouring ommatidia unite to form
larger bundles. In the first ganglion these bundles break up into their
constituent fibrils. This first ganglion, like the eye itself, is made up
of two halves, which are connected by a thick bundle of vertical nerve-
fibres. The ganglia have a complicated structure, an especially im-
portant element being the granular layer, which contains darkly staining
bodies, the " nerve-nodes " (Nervenlcnoten), corresponding in number
to the ommatidia. These consist of neuroglia-fibrils, of a homogeneous
substance with the staining reactions of neuroglia-fibrils, and especially
of a group of nerve-fibrils, to whose presence the node is due. It would
seem that each node contains fibrils from several ommatidia, but the
fibrils apparently do not end at the node, but pass on through this first
ganglion to the other ganglia behind. As the fibrils leave the first
ganglion to pass to the second, they cross so that those at the right side
become left, and vice versa. The importance of this crossing the author
believes lies in the varying lengths of the fibres, for he thinks that this
variation in length has a direct physiological significance. This sig-
nificance he explains as follows. Suppose the eye to be stimulated in
such a way that a certain set of retinulse receive an equal impulse.
These impulses travel down the fibrils to, e.g. the second ganglion, but
as the lengths of the paths they have to travel vary, they will not
arrive simultaneously, but one after the other according to the relative
lengths of the fibrils. In general terms it may be said that every
adequate stimulus will produce a periodic cycle of changes in the re-
ceptive organ. Even if we suppose a stimulus to affect one ommatidium
only, there would be set up a successive series of changes in the nerve-
centres, for each ommatidium, as noticed above, has seven nerve-fibrils,
and each of these has (apparently) a course of different length from
those of its neighbours. This theory of Arthropod vision was reached
by the author as the result of a process of induction, but he believes
that it receives confirmation from the theories of other authors, e.g.
Exner, who have based their conclusions on theoretical grounds.

Variations in Crest of Daphnia hyalina. f — Miss M. M. Enteman
discusses the variability in the cephalic crest of this species. Every
kind of crest displayed in the genus may be observed in the species,

* Zeitschr. wise. Zool., lxvii. (1900) pp. 551-98 (1 pi.).
t Amor. Nat., xxxiv. (1900) pp. 879-90 (6 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 37

which at the same time remains relatively constant in other distinguish-
ing characters. The varieties may he classed under five types, three of
which are quite the same as those described for Europe under the names
pellucida, galeata, and gracilis, while two are peculiar to the American
lakes. The interest of the communication is increased by the fact that
the range of variation described is confined to the summer forms, which
are parthenogenetic.

Nervous System of Crayfish.* — PL. Owsiannikow has investigated
the minute structure of the nerve-elements in Astacus fluviatilis, and the
general structure of the nervous system. He finds that the nerve-cells
possess a membrane, and contain primitive fibrils of varying calibre.
The smaller fibrils form a network about the nucleus, the larger, which
lie nearer the cell-periphery, unite to form a thick bundle which passes
out of the cell into the axis-cylinder. The nucleus possesses a firm
membrane, and contains one or two corpuscles. Almost all the nerve-
cells are unipolar, and give rise usually to one nerve only. In the
ganglia white and grey matter can be distinguished, and there are two
kinds of nerve-cells, the large and the small. The large cells give rise
to broad processes which become the fibres of the longitudinal com-
missure. These fibres may cross so that the right becomes the left and
vice versa. With the small nerve- cells are connected fibrils belonging
chiefly to the first pair of nerves in each ganglion. These fibrils are
also, owing to the branching of their processes, connected with the grey
substance of the right and left half of the chain, and in addition send
fibrils to the longitudinal commissure. The last-named fibrils, during
their passage through the ganglion, may give off branches which lie
chiefly in the grey substance of the same side. The nerve-fibrils which
enter the ganglia from the second pair of nerves mostly branch in the
grey substance without coming into connection with nerve-cells, but a
few unite with the small nerve-cells, and form fibrils which go to the
longitudinal commissure. In consequence of these relations, the first
pair of nerves in the crayfish must be homologised with the anterior
roots of the Vertebrate nerves, the second with the posterior roots. The
so-called third pair of nerves in the crayfish consists almost exclusively
of blood-vessels. Besides the connection indicated above between the
grey substance of the two sides of the ganglia, certain specially large
cells give off processes which connect the grey matter of the two sides.

Annulata.

Sipunculus nudus.f — S. Metalnikoff has made an exhaustive study
of the anatomy and histology of this Gejmyrean. Among the points
of interest made out, the following may be noticed. Pigment-cells occur
in varying numbers, not only in the skin but in all the organs of the
body except the muscles. The cells disappear during starvation, when
the body becomes perceptibly paler. They vary greatly in size and in
the number of their nuclei, and appear to possess considerable power of
locomotion. The author is disposed to regard them as parasitic amcobas
or rather plasmodia ; in not a few cases he found that they were entirely
absent. He finds that the diverticulum of the gut is large in young and

* Mem. Acad. Impe'r. Sci. St. Petersbourg, x. (1900) pp. 1-29 (1 pi.).
t Zeittchr. wits. Zoo]., lxviii. (1900) pp. 261-322 (0 figs.).

38 SUMMARY OF CURRENT EESEAECHES RELATING TO

small individuals, but degenerate in large ones, and believes that its
function is to increase the secretory surface in the small individuals
which have a relatively short gut. In the brain four types of nerve-cells
were made out in addition to neuroglia-fibres and cells. The author
makes no suggestion as to the affinities of Sipunculus.

Study of English Channel Polychaets.* — Mr. T. V. Hodgson brings
into compact form the records of those Amphinomidae, Aphroditidae,
Polynoidse, and Sigalionidas, known to occur in the Channel, and gives
descriptions of species and synoptical tables which will be of service to
other workers. The section dealt with is that treated of by MTntosh
in the recently published part of his monograph, to which Mr. Hodgson
acknowledges his indebtedness.

Arenicola.'t" — Dr. P. Fauvel gives an account of the structure and
habits of lob-worms, and discusses their distribution and systematic
relations. There is only one genus constituting the family Arenicolidte ;
Brancltiomaldane and Arenicolides are not justifiable genera. The family
shows no transitions towards the Maldanidaa. The most primitive species
is A. ecaudata, one of the most evolved is A. claparedii, while A. vincenti
is degenerate.

Anatomy and Classification of Arenicolidae. J — Messrs. F. W.
Gamble and J. H. Ashworth fiud that there are three British species
of Arenicola, A. marina, A. ecaudata, aud A. grubii. In addition there
are two other species, A. claparedii, Mediterranean and Pacific, and
A. cristata, Mediterranean, Florida, and Jamaica. The American forms
described as A. natalis Gir. and A. arenata both belong to the species
A. marina. Audouin and Milne-Edwards' species A. branchialis was
possibly founded on specimens of A. grubii ; but as the type specimens
are lost, and the descriptions insufficient, the species should lapse. The
five recognisable species fall into two groups, A. ecaudata and A. grubii
differing from the other three in the absence of a tail, the simple pro-
stomium and brain, the shape of the nephridia, and some other points.
In regard to specific characters, the authors fiud that the most reliable
are founded on the characters of the otocysts, prostomium, and nephridia
taken together, and they give diagnoses depending on these points. The
external characters are subject to great variation in all the species. The
authors have also made a number of observations on the anatomy of
the different s])ecies, and on the post-larval stages. Among the most
striking of their results are the following. Giant-fibres and segmentally
arranged giant-cells occur in the nerve-cord of all the species except
A. claparedii. All the species possess eyes during at least the immature
stages ; they are superficial in the larva, but sink in until in the adult
they are found among the ganglionic cells of the brain. The Areni-
colidae show most affinity with the Maldanidae, but nevertheless form a
well-defined group. Special mention should be made of the figures,
which are numerous and clear.

Affinities of Procerastea (Langerhans). § — Ch. Gravier obtained
four specimens of a new species of this genus in the Bay of La Hougue,

* Journ. Mar. Biol. Ass., vi. (1900) pp. 218-5'.).

t Mem. Soc. Sci. Nat. Cherbourg, xxxi. (1898-1900) pp. 101-SG (11 figs.).
I Quart. Jouru. Micr. Sci., xliii. (1900) pp. 119-569 (8 pis.).
L § Ann. Sci. Nut. (Zool.), xi. (1900) pp. S5-50 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANV, MICHOSCOPY, ETC. 39

and in describing Lis species discusses tho position of the genus. It
was founded by Langerbans for a Syllid without dorsal cirri. The
author's species, P. perrieri, is larger than that of Langerbans, and
shows well-marked differences. The four specimens were all males, and
consisted each of a stock and a sexual stolon. As to the genus, the
condition of the parapodia shows that it is to be regarded as including
the simplest of the Syllids. It is nearest to the genera Virchowia and
Autolytus, both more highly specialised forms, and the relations of the
four genera of the Autolytus group are indicated by the author as
follows : —

Procerastea

Virchowia Autolytus

.1 .
Myrianida

A Viviparous Syllid.* — Mr. E. S. Goodrich notes the discovery, in
a tank at the Naples zoological station, of a Syllid which is apparently
Syllis vivipara Krohn. Krohn's description is somewhat vague, and his
statement that his worm is viviparous has been doubted by later authors.
Goodrich's specimens, whether specifically identical or not, place the
occurrence of viviparity in the Syllida3 beyond a doubt, and he figures
adults showing well-developed embryos within the ccelom. He is how-
ever entirely unable to solve the problem as to how the eggs are
fertilised, if they are fertilised. The fact that there is no obvious path
by means of which sperms from another individual could reach the ova,
seems to leave only two possibilities ; (1) that the eggs develope par-
thenogenetically ; (2) that the animals are hermaphrodite and self-
fertilised. Of the latter suggestion no proof in the shape of ripe
spermatozoa could be obtained ; so the question remains undecided.

Spermiducal Glands of Australian Earthworms, f — Miss Georgina
Sweet has investigated the structure of these glands and the associated
parts in 32 species of earthworms from Australia aud Tasmania. She
finds that in the species examined it is possible to show that a complete
series exists connecting the simplest tubular form of the gland with the
complex lobular condition. To this statement, however, the spermiducal
gland of Acanthodrilus sydneyensis forms an exception, for it cannot be
referred to any position in the series afforded by the other forms.

Regeneration in Lumbriculus variegatus Gr. \ — Dr. Franz von
"Wagner finds that in this worm the process of regeneration depends firstly
•on the formative activity of the epidermis, which under special circum-
stances is capable of producing a mass of regeneration-cells, and secondly
■on the capacity which the gut epithelium displays for producing new ele-
ments without disturbance of its existing organisation. Except for the
food-canal, all regenerated organs and parts of organs originate from the

* Journ. Linn. Soc, xxviii. (1900) pp. 105-8 (1 pi.).

t Tom. cit., pp. 109-39 (2 pis.).

j Zool. Jahrb. (Abt. Anat.), xiii. (1900) pp. 603-82 (4 pis.).

40 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

ectoderm ; but the food-canal, with the exception of a small buccal region,
has an endodermic origin. There is no special mesoderm primordium, nor
do the regeneration-cells arrange themselves in special masses for the.
different organs. Two periods can be distinguished in the process of
regeneration : — the first is the organogenetic period, when the foundation
of the organs is laid down ; and the second the growth period, when the
new organs acquire their normal relative size. The nervous system is
the first structure to be regenerated in all cases, and of its parts the
brain developes first, then the gullet ring, and finally the ventral chain.
The first indication of segmentation in the regenerated region occurs in
the ventral nerve-chain, which divides up into metameric ganglia. Later
the dissepiments are formed, and finally the bristles appear and the seg-
mentation becomes visible externally.

The author's observations were made on worms artificially mutilated,
but he finds that Lumbriculus exhibits transverse division under normal
conditions as a form of asexual reproduction. He distinguishes gene-
rally artificial regeneration as reparation, from the true regeneration
which follows on normal asexual reproduction, but notes that in Lum-
hriculus there is virtually no distinction between the two processes.
Except for the extreme head and the tail, the power of regeneration is
very great at all j^arts of the body.

Egg of Allolobophora foetida.*— Miss K. Foot and E. C. Strobell
publish a series of photomicrographs of this egg, which they have taken in
order to illustrate the following points : — (1) the effect on the cytoplasm
of the different fixatives in common use ; (2) the characters of the fer-
tilisation cone ; (3) the position of the middle piece in the male aster ;
(4) the origin of the sperm-granules ; (5) the early stages in the de-
velopment of the pronuclei ; (6) the presence of osmophile granules in
the nucleoli of the germinal vesicles. The photographs have been taken
at two magnifications, 660 and 950, and the authors believe that they
furnish objective proof of some of Miss Foot's previous conclusions, e.g.
in regard to the cytoplasmic origin of the centrosome of the male aster.
The paper is the first of a series of illustrated studies in which the
authors hope to treat the first point especially in detail.

Structure of Leech Somite.f — Mr. J. Percy Moore notes that in his
recent paper | ona new biannulate leech, he made no mention of Oka's §
leech (Ozobranchus mendiesi?^), as the description had escaped his notice.
In the present communication he points out the resemblances and dif-
ferences between his own and Oka's biannulate form. The resemblances
he regards as striking, the somite in each case consisting of a large and
a small annulus. Further, he believes that they are such as to confirm
his view that the large annulus is the equivalent of the neural annulus
plus its predecessor in Pontobdella, and therefore that the neural annulus
is ruorjmologically the middle ring of the 3-annulate leech somite.

Protonephridia of Leeches.|j — Boris Sukatschoff has studied these
structures in embryos of Nephelis vulgaris and Aulastomum gido, with
special reference to Bergh's views as to their relation to those of Poly-

* Journ. Morph., xvi. (1900) pp. 001-18 (3 pis.).
f Zool. Anzeig., xxiii. (1900) pp. 474-7 (1 fig.).

Cf. tins Journal, 1900, p. 585. § Zool. Mag., vii. (1895) pp. 1-7.

Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., lxvii. (1900) pp. (318-39 (2 pis. and 3 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 41

gordius. With some modifications of detail, his results strongly resemble
those of Bergh. He finds that abnormalities at times occur in the proto-
nephridia of Nephelis which bring these closer to those of Polygordius
than Bergh thought. The protonephridia of Nephelis strongly resemble
these of Aulastomum, but the latter are more complex, and suggest
comparisons with the permanent excretory organs of the adult or of
related simpler forms. The author agrees with Bergh that the proto-
nephridia of leeches are derived from those of such a form as Poly-
gordius, but are phylogenetically highly specialised structures.

Nematohelminth.es.

Mode of Filarial Infection.* — Sigg. B. Grassi and G. Noe first of all
corroborate Bancroft's suggestion that the Filarite pass from mosquito to
man only in the act of biting. Secondly, in the case of Filaria immitis
in Anopheles, they show that the embryos develope in the Malpighian
vessels, pass into the cavity of the hotly, and reach the prolongation of
this in the labium. They explain in detail the very interesting way in
which the larva? pass from the labium in the act of biting.

Development of Sclerostomum equinum.f — A. Conte describes the
ovoid eggs with their delicate shells, the formation of the blastula with
two large initial endoderm-cells, the embolic gastrulation, and the ap-
pearance of the two initial mesoderm-cells, the formation of two ventral
mesoderm-bands and of four longitudinal rows of endoderm-cells, the
beginning of the stoinodseum and the nervous system, the endodermic
origin of the primitive intestine, and its strange subsequent replace-
ment by a non-endodermic secondary intestine. The retrogression of
the primitive endoderm recalls what Heymons and Lecaillon have de-
scribed in certain insects.

Platyhelminthes.

Enterostoma mytili (v. Graff).* — Heir H. Sabussow describes this
Turbellarian from the gills of the edible mussel. One of the most
remarkable features is the combination of the genital aperture with the
mouth and the opening of the resulting porus communis at the posterior
end of the body. Perhaps, like a form described by Bohmig from
Lessina, it should be separated from the genus Enterostoma. A position
between Allostomina and Gylindrostomina is suggested for both.

Two Large Species of Distomum.§ — Herr H. v. Buttel-Eeepen de-
scribes D. ampullaceum sp. n., 47 mm. in length by 22 mm. in breadth
and 16 mm. in thickness, said to have come from a cetacean in the Indian
Ocean, but more probably (according to the author) from a Coryphsena
which seafarers sometimes call a dolphin. A second large form, D.
siemersii sp. n., from the stomach of Sphyrsena barracuda in the Atlantic
Ocean, measured 31 by 12 by 10 mm.

New Genus of Distomid8e.|| — Herr Th. Odhner finds it necessary
to establish a new genus — Gyrnnophallus — for Distomum deliciosum Olss.,

* Centralbl. Bakt., 1"= Abt., xxviii. (1900) pp. 652-7.

t Comptes liendus, cxxxi. (1900) pp. 840-8.

t Zool. Anzeig., xxiii. (1900), pp. 256-63. § Tom. cit., pp. 5S5-98 (9 figs.).

|| Centralbl. Bakt., l t0 Abt., xxviii. (1900) pp. 12-23 (4 figs.).

42 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

D. micropharyngeum Lube, D. somaterise Lev., and two new species,
Gymnoplicdlus choledochus and O. bursicola,- — all from swimming birds
such as gulls. The name refers to the absence of a cirrus-pouch, but
the distinctive features are numerous. The nearest allies seem to be
among the Ccenogoniininse.

Distomum arcanum.* — Prof. W. S. Nickerson describes this new
species, which lies hidden in cysts forming considerable swellings just
at the pylorus of American fro^s. It is closely related to several species
(D. medians, D. clavigerum, D. confusum), which it resembles in its
small size, compact form, spiny covering, rudimentary intestine, and
laterally placed sexual aperture, as well as in being parasitic in the
intestine of the frog.

Genus Podocotyle (Duj.) Stoss.f — M. Liihe discusses the value of
this generic name, which was used by Dujardin as the name of a sub-
genus of Distomum, including those species with a stalked ventral
sucker, and was erected into a separate genus by Stossich. Liihe has
had an opportunity of examining Podocotyle furcata ( = Distomum fur-
■catum Brems.), and has made out various points which should aid in
drawing up a generic definition. Thus he finds that, in addition to the
stalked ventral sucker, there is a smaller sessile sucker which lies be-
side the genital atrium, but does not envelope it. It is probable that
the stalked sucker is the homologue of the ordinary ventral sucker of
other flukes, and that the sessile sucker is an accessory structure. The
topography of the genital organs is also described, but the author notes
that, as Stiles and Hassall have taken D. angulatum Duj. as the type
of the genus Podocotyle, he cannot draw up a generic definition on the
basis of his own observations on D. furcatum, for it is quite uncertain
how far this species resembles D. angidatum. As Dujardin's description
of his own species is brief and unsatisfactory, the deadlock must con-
tinue till the species be re-found and re-described, and forms an object-
lesson illustrating the necessity for supreme care in the choice of type-
species.

Genus Clinostomum (LeidyXJ — Prof. M. Braun sums up his various
brief notices on this subject in a general account of the history, general
characters, and species of the genus, with references and synonymy.
The genus is defined by the form of the body, which shows a division
into two regions, by the obliquely truncated anterior end of the body,
by the absence of a true pharynx and the shape of the alimentary canal,
and by the characters of the excretory and especially of the genital
system, in which the presence of a large uterine diverticulum (the
uterus-sac) is specially noteworthy. In the genus so defined the author
includes nine species, which are all fully described. He also notes a
number of young forms described by various authors, some of which can
be referred to existing species, while the position of others remains
uncertain.

Hydatid Fluids. § — E. Couvreur analysed the fluid of a huge cyst
(Coenurus serialis) in a rabbit. There was no albumin, globulin, or

* Amer. Nat., xxxiv. (1900) pp. 811-5 (1 fig.).

t Zool. Anzeig., xxiii. (1900) pp. 487-92.

I Zool. Jahrb. (Abt. Syst.), xiv. (1900) pp. 1-48 (2 pis.).

§ Ann. Soc. Linn. Lyon, xlvi. (1900) pp. 73-4.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 43

peptone, but evidently a protoproteose, with traces of sugar. In
acephalous cysts of T. echinococcus he found deuteroproteose and sugar.
A non-parasitic pulmouary cyst contained sugar, traces of proteose, and
a considerable quantity of urea.

New Cestodes.* — Prof. St. von Eatz describes from a species of
Yaranus three new tapeworms, — Ichthyotsenia hiroi, I. saccifera, and
Taenia mychocepJiala ; the special interest of the first two being that they
add to the small list of cases where fish-tapeworms have been found in
higher Vertebrates.

Incertse Sedis.

Double Forms of Loxosoma-t — Mr. W. S. Nickerson describes five
double monsters, united side to side and with a common foot, and in-
terprets them as due to the incomplete separation of two masses of
germinal tissue, destined under normal conditions to give rise to two
distinct buds.

Echinoderrna.

Antarctic Edmunds and Ophiuroids.J — Prof. E. Kcehler makes a
preliminary report on the Echinoids and Ophiuroids of the Belgian
Antarctic expedition. They exhibit a very distinct facies " without any
analogy with arctic and sub-arctic or with sub-antarctic forms." In
short, the results are quite opposed to the theory of bipolarity.

Genital Organ of Larval Antedon.§ — Achille Eusso finds that the
primary genital cells of Antedon rosacea are not, as is generally supposed,
formed by a proliferation of the " genital stolon,''' but first appear in a
mesenteric structure placed in the interradius C D. These primary
sexual elements have a very brief existence, and have disappeared before
the arms begin to bifurcate. The organ which becomes the " genital
stolon" of the adult appears in the interradius A B, and completely
replaces the earlier structure. These facts the author regards as being
of great importance in connection with problems of Echinoderm mor-
phology, and especially in regard to the affinities of Crinoids, Cystoidea,
and Holothurians. Thus, in Holothurians the primary genital cells
arise in the mesentery of interradius C D, the organ being apparently
homologous with that of the larval Antedon. Again, in the Holothurian
the formation of the genital organ is accompanied by the formation of
the aboral lacuna and sinus, structures which are also indicated in the
larval Antedon, though they atrophy with the primary genital organ.
Further, the author believes that the larval genital organ of Antedon is
homologous with that of the Cystoidea, which was also, as is seen from
its aperture, placed in the interradius C D.

Coelentera.

Mesenterial Filaments. ||— Prof. J. Playfair M'Murrich has studied
these in various Actinians, but especially in Zoantlms sociaius Ellis. In
adults there is no histological continuity between the glandular streaks

* Centralbl. Bakt., l ,e Abt., xxviii. (1900) pp. 657-60.

t Amer. Nat., xxxiv. (1900) pp. 891-5 (6 figs.).

j Comptes Retains, cxxxi. (1900) pp. 1010-12.

§ Atti (Rend.) R. Accad. Lincei, ix. (1900) pp. 361-6 (2 figs).

|i Trans. Canadian Inst., vi. (1899) pp. 3S7-404 (11 figs.).

44 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

and tlie ciliated bands ; in egg-embryos the glandular streaks develope
before the ciliated bands make their appearance ; in the same embryos
the streaks make their appearance on mesenteries that are not connected
in any way apparently with the ectoderm ; and in hud-embryos the.
ciliated bands appear before the glandular streaks. Therefore it seems
to the author that the ciliated bands must be regarded as being onto-
genetically distinct from the glandular streaks. But although he is
prepared to call the ciliated bands ectodermal in all cases, the glandular
streaks seem to be endodermal in some mesenteries and ectodermal in
others. But since every kind of cell — glandular, muscular, sensory,
ganglionic, and even nematoblastic — which occurs in the ectoderm, may
also occur in the endoderm, it seems to the author that in Ccelentera
the two layers are hardly as yet differentiated from one another.

Anemones from Jamaica.* — Mr. J. E. Duerden publishes a second
instalment of his work on this subject, containing descriptions of various
members of the order Stichodactylinaa, and of three new species of
Parazoanthus. He divides the order StichodactylinsB into two new sub-
orders : — (1) Heterodactylinse, in which the tentacles are of two forms;
and (2) Homodactylinaa, in which they are all of one kind. In regard
to the genus Parazoanthus, the author notes that pigment-granules and
zooxanthella? are present in inverse ratio to one another, the granules
of certain species a]>pearing to replace the zooxanthellseof other species.
He finds that this is also the case in other families of Actiniaria, and
suggests that the pigment-granules may perform the same function as
the zooxanthellse, and may be regarded as free chromoplasts.

Protozoa.

Sexual Zygosis in Protozoa.f — Prof. E. Bay Lankester points out
that the microgametes in the Coccidiidad and Haemamoebidse are similar
to the spermatozoa of Metazoa both in appearance and in mode of develop-
ment. He emphasises this point by a detailed comparison of the pro-
cess by which the microgametes arise in those Protozoa, and the method
of formation of spermatozoa in the earthworm, which shows how close
the resemblance is. But it is remarkable that the zygote of the malarial
parasite after fertilisation gives rise to blasts or filiform young, which in
form and mode of development are identical with microgametes. In
other organisms the fertilised egg-cell produces as fission-products cells
which are similar to female cells (oomorphous or gynsecomorplwus cells),
but in the HosmamoebidaB the fertilised zygote produces andromorphous
or spermatomorphous cells. As these cells are capable of carrying on
the life of the species without conjugation, the author believes that we
have here parthenogenesis by means of male elements (androcratic par-
thenogenesis), and that the existence of these spermatomorphous blasts
is "a distinct proof that the spermatozoon is, so far as its essential
nature is concerned, capable of acting the part of the solely sufficient
germ in a parthenogenetic reproduction or multiplication."

Karyokinesis in Vampyrella.} — Prof. P. A. Dangeard describes
the karyokinesis of V. vorax. The chromosomes seem to arise in the

* Trans. Roy. Soc. Dublin, vii. (1900) pp. 133-208 (6 pis.).
t Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xliii. (11)00) pp. 5S1-8 (13 figs.).
J Le Botanisto (Dangeard), vii. (1900) pp. 131-58 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 45

nucleolus ; the latter also furnishes the chromatin basis (planeher) of the
equatorial plate ; the spindle is formed at the expenso of the nucleo-
plasm,which receives in this connection a certain quantity of chromatin
from the nucleolus; there is at each pole of the spindle a corpuscle
which may be compared to a centrosome ; the cyst of Vampyrella is to
be regarded as a sporangium within which the nuclear elements
multiply.

Reaction of Amoeba to Different Colours.* — Messrs. N. R. Harring-
ton and E. Learning find that the streaming movements occur in red
light, but are delayed, inhibited, or reversed by rays from the violet end
of the spectrum. In non-nucleated fragments violet and white rays
inhibit the weak streaming.

Foraminifera from Singapore.f — Dr. R. J. Schubert has examined a
specimen of white calcareous sand from Singapore, and finds that Fora-
minifera are present together with other organic remains, such as Mol-
luscan shells, Ostracod shells, and fragments of coral. Of the Fora-
minifera, individuals of Peneroplis pertusus in the typical form and
varieties formed about half of the total number of specimens. The
remainder were chiefly Miliolidaa.

Coelomic Coccidia in Insects.} — Louis Leger notes that there are
few cases described of ccelomic Coccidia in Insects. In the beetle
Olocrates abbreviatus 01. he has found, in the fatty body and the cells of
the pericardium, the oocysts of what appears to be the previously de-
scribed Adelea akidium. Many of the cysts were degenerate, having been
transformed into a brown colloid substance which shone through the
skin in the dorsal region, and made the infected insects appear pigmented.
Others of the cysts showed undivided granular contents, or commencing
sporulation, or 12-20 ripe sporocysts each containing two sporozoites.
This is only the third case observed of ccelomic Coccidia in Insects.

Life-history of Haemamoebidse. § — Major Ronald Ross and Dr. R.
Fielding-Ould publish, with a short description, a series of diagrams
illustrating the life-history of the parasites of malaria. They state the
life-history as follows. Minute amcebulre occur in the red corpuscles
of the Vertebrate hosts (man, monkeys, bats, birds), and become mature
as (a) sporocytes or (6) gametocytes. The sporocytes arise by the
division of the nucleus of the amoebulas, each nuclear mass surrounding
itself with a mass of protoplasm ; the spores so formed escape from the
corpuscles and infect other corpuscles of the same host. Where the
amcebulae become gametocytes nuclear division does not occur, but tho
gametocyte in the undivided state is taken up into the stomach of a gnat.
Here the male gametocytes (distinguished by their larger nuclei) give rise
to a number of motile microgametes, which unite each with a macro-
gamete. The resulting zygote becomes motile, forming the vermicule,
and travels to the muscular coat of the stomach. Here it becomes
motionless, grows rapidly, and divides into eight to twelve meres. Each
mere becomes a spherical blastophore, bearing on its surface a number

* Araer. Journ. Physiol., in. (1900) pp. 9-18. See Zool. Centralbl., vii. (1900)
p. 748. t Zool. Anzeig., xxiii. (1900; pp. 500-2.

% Arch. Zool. Expe'r., viii. (1900) pp. 1-3.
§ Quart. Journ. Mior, Sci., xliii. (1900) pp. 571-9 (2 pis.).

46 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

of spindle-shaped blasts, and ultimately the blastophores disappear and
the capsule contains thousands of free blasts. These reach the salivary
glands of the gnat, and are introduced into the blood of the Vertebrate
host. The authors recognise two genera, Hsemamoeba, in which the
gametocytes resemble the sporocytes before the latter begin to divide,
and Esemomenas g. n. in which the gametocytes have a special crescentic
shape.

Malaria and Natives.* — S. E. Christophers and Dr. J. W. W.
Stephens show that in all native villages examined in Sierra Leone,
from 59-90 p.c. of the children were infected with malaria, and that a
considerable number of these contained crescentic bodies, which very
rapidly took on the spherical and flagellating form requisite for the
transmission of human malaria to the mosquito. In all the villages
examined, mosquitos (Anopheles) were present ; indeed, in all but rare
cases each individual hut contained both infected children and^ infected
mosquitos. Thus the native is the prime agent in the malarial infection
of Europeans, and infection can be escaped by avoiding native villages
and huts.

Zoochlorellae of Paramoecium bursaria. f — Prof. P. A. Dangeard
discusses this case of symbiosis which appears to be due to CMorella
vulgaris Beyerinck. He describes the occurrence of the alga3 in the
Infusorian, their structure, and their division (normally into four, but in
nutritive culture-solutions into six).

Parasitic Infusoria.} — Dr. Adolf Giinther has continued his obser-
vations on Ophryoscolex caudatus from the stomach of Ruminants, and
has investigated the minute structure of Cycloposthium bipalmatum from
the ciecum of the horse. He finds that in both the macronucleus lies
in the ectoplasm, but it appears at first sight to lie in the endoplasm,
because it occupies a bay-shaped inturning of the ectoplasm, and is in
consequence a considerable distance from the cell-periphery. The ecto-
plasmic position of the macronucleus was also demonstrated for other
parasitic Infusoria. In both the Infusorians studied the author describes
a layer of muscle fibrils, or myonemes, more conspicuous than anything
of the kind previously described in the Ciliata. The distribution of the
myonemes is described in detail for the two forms. It would appear
that the functions of the different groups differ ; e.g. some move the cilia,
some perhaps retract the peristome, and so on. In Cycloposthium the
author describes in detail the structure called by Bundle the ridge
(Leiste), and finds that it is a definite cell-organ, and not merely a
junction-line as has been supposed. The function appears a little un-
certain, but the author regards it as more than a simple supporting-rod.
Conjugation, not hitherto observed, was noted in six cases in Cyclo-
postMum. Mention should be made of the admirable figures of sections
which illustrate the paper.

New Sporozoon in Dipterous Larvae.§ — Louis Leger found in the
intestine of larvae of Ceratopogon sp. n. a sporozoon, which exhibits

• Kep. Malaria Comm. Roy. Soc, Aug. 15, 1900, 22 pp., 1 pi., and 1 map.
t Le Botaniste (Dangeard). vii. (1900) pp. 161-91 (3 tigs.).
t Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., lxvii. (1900) pp. 640-62 (2 pis.).
§ Comptes Rendus, exxxi. (1900) pp. 722-4.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 47

the general characters of a Gregarine, but has a schizogonic multipli-
cation within its host. The name proposed is Schizocystis gregarinoides.
Its life-history presents a striking analogy with that of Ophryocystis,
and the two genera may be united as Schizogregarines in contrast to the
Eugregarines (without endogenous multiplication). Both the genera
named differ from Coccidia in being in great part, if not always, extra-
cellular, and in having the sporogony preceded by isogamic conjugation
of sporophists, whereas the Coccidia are intracellular during their whole
period of growth, and exhibit hetcrogamic conjugation.

New Species of Ophryocystis. * — Louis Leger and Paul Hagen-
muller have found in Blaps magica a parasite nearly allied to Ophryo-
cystis biitschlii, which they call 0. schneideri. The material was in
sufficient (quantity to enable them to make observations on both the
endogenous and exogenous cycles of the parasite. In regard to the
first, the parasite in its " vegetative " state was found in the Malpighian
tubules and the intestine. Though the form varied, it may be said to
be generally conical, the apex of the cone projecting freely into the
lumen of the tube, while the base is furnished with fixative processes
attached to the so-called immovable cilia of the epithelial cells. There
is a distinct if thin cuticle, no differentiation of ectoplasm and endoplasm,
an areolar cytoplasm filled with granulations, and a nucleus of spherical
shape placed near the base of the cell. Amoeboid movements were not
observed. As the parasite increases in size the nucleus divides, and
later the polynucleated individual divides up to form uninucleated young.
Towards autumn this vegetative reproduction reaches its limit, and
conjugation occurs, two individuals uniting to form a cyst. It is to
be noted, however, that the " cyst "-wall is merely the cuticle of the
conjugates, no special envelope being secreted. The single sporocyst
formed by the union of the gametes gives rise to eight thread-like
sporozoites.

Reproduction of Ophryocystis. f — Louis Leger finds in several
species of this Gregarine that there is typical isogamic conjugation and
also the possibility of the parthenogeuetic origin of a microsporocyst
from a single gamete. The sporogony is quite comparable to that of
Gregarines, a single sporocyst resulting from the conjugation of two
sporoblasts whose nuclei have previously undergone reduction. One
may regard Ophryocystis as a simple schizogonic ancestor of, on the
one hand, Schizocystis and the Eugregariuida, and, on the other hand,
of the Coccidia.

* Arch. Zool. Exper., viii. (1900) pp. 10-5 (2 figs.),
t Comptes Rendus, cxxxi. (1900) pp. 7Gl-o.

48 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

BOTANY.

A. GENERAL, including the Anatomy and Physiology
of the Phanerogamia.

a. Anatomy.

CI) Cell-Structure and Protoplasm.

Development and Function of the Cell-plate.* — After a historical
review of the subject, H. G. Timberlake gives an account of his own
observations on the development and function of the cell-plate in the
higher plants, his examples being taken from the growing root-tips of
various flowering plants, from pollen mother-cells, and dividing pollen-
grains. Among the more important results obtained are the following.

The division of the cell-body is due to the activity of the kinoplasm
of the cell ; the splitting of the cell-plate, or at least its differentiation
into separate layers, is the essential act in the division of the cell-body.
According to the author, the whole of the substance of the fibres becomes
transformed into a portion of the cell-plate ; in other words, the cell-
plate is a result of a change of form of the substance composing the
fibres. The nucleus appears to be the centre of the metabolic processes
concerned in the production of the kinoplasm. The real centre for the
formation of the fibres is the chromatin. This is shown by the formation
of new radiating fibres round the daughter- nuclei in the root-tip of the
onion during the diaster stage, and by the formation of a spindle round
a single chromosome in the pollen mother-cells of Hemerocallis. In the
cells of the higher plants the kinoplasm appears to be formed round
the nucleus as a centre. In this form the kinoplasm takes part in the
process of nuclear division, and later divides the cell by a part of the
fibres being transformed into a membrane which becomes, in splitting,
the plasma-membranes of the daughter-cells.

The carbohydrate material for the formation of the cell-wall appears
to be held in a reserve form in the protoplasm before it is actually needed
for the process of wall-formation.

Development of the Karyokinetic Spindle in Vegetative Cells.f —
From a study of nuclear division in the root-tips of Allium cepa, Vicia
Faba, and Erythronium americanum, Amanda M'Comb maintains that
the process of spindle formation in vegetative cells of the higher plants
does not essentially differ from that of the reproductive cells. In both
cases the spindle-fibres, or at least the vast majority of them, are of
cytoplasmic origin. They may appear at first either in the form of a
weft about the nucleus, or may radiate from it. In the vegetative cells
the spindle primordium may be monaxial and strictly bipolar from the
first ; but it is often multipolar. No such organs as centrosomes or
centrospheres exist in the root-tips of Allium.

Cones of the Multipolar Spindle.J— A. A. Lawson gives the following
as a summary of the phenomena connected with the origin of the cones

* Bot. Gazette, xxx. (1900) pp. 73-99, 151-70 (2 pis.).
t Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxvii. (1900) pp. 451-9 (2 pis.).
X Bot. Gazette, xxx. (1900) pp. 145-53 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 49

of the multipolar spindle in Gladiolus, which furnishes a good material
for study of nuclear phenomena, from the large size of the anthers, pollen
mother-cells, and nuclei.

As nuclear division approaches, a granular zone accumulates about
the nucleus. This zone resembles in every respect the perikaryoplasm
characteristic of the pollen mother-cells of Cobsea* A close network
or felted zone of kinoplasm fibres is formed immediately outside and
completely surrounding the nuclear wall ; this is probably developed
from the perikaryoplasm. This network grows out into several pro-
jections which become the poles of the multipolar figure. The nuclear
membrane persists until the cones are nearly fully developed. The
spindle-fibres are formed by the elongation of the meshes of the network
composing the cones. Neither the nuclear wall, the nucleole, nor the
linin, takes any essential part in the formation of the achromatic figure.
The cones of the multipolar figure fuse, and arrange themselves in two
groups, forming a bipolar spindle.

Formation of Vacuoles. \ — In order to determine the question
whether vacuoles have a well-defined tonoplast or not, Dr. B. Neinec
incited in the cytoplasm the artificial formation of soluble bodies, round
which vacuoles developed. Nucleole-like bodies may arise in this way
in the meristematic cells by the operation of various injurious agencies.
When the meristem of a root-apex is plasmolysed, in about 25 mins.
" nucleoles " are seen in the cytoplasm after the material has been fixed
and sectioned ; after about 30 mins. the vacuoles begin to make their
appearance round them ; and after 40-45 mins. nothing is to be seen
except the vacuoles without any contents.

Membrane of Hydroleucites. J — V. Boulefc supports de Vries's and
Went's contention that the vacuole or hydroleucite in living cells is
an organised structure enclosed in a distinct membrane, the tonoplast.
When plasrnolysed by the action of potassium nitrate, the protoplasm
contracts in a regular manner round the hydroleucite into a spherical or
ellipsoidal mass, and the chloroleucites are massed together generally
at one of the poles. At a more advanced stage of disorganisation, the
hydroleucite appears to fill up the whole of the cell-cavity, pressing
against its walls the debris of the protoplasm and the chloroleucites
which are profoundly changed. The crystals are always localised in
the hydroleucite, and appear to be unable to escape into the protoplasm,
from which they are separated by an invisible membrane not belonging
to the protoplasm.

Permeability of the Cell-wall for Air. § — C. Steinbrinck discusses
the question whether the permeability of the cell-wall for air is a hind-
rance to its shrinking, and, as the result of a series of experiments on
different plants and various tissues, concludes that there is no connection
between the two phenomena.

* Cf. this Journal, 1900, p. G85.

t S.B. k. Bohm. Ges. Wiss. (Math.-uatunv. CI.), 1900, No. 5. See Bot. Centralbl..
Ixxxiv. (1900) p. 163.

X Rev. Gen. de Bot. (Bonnier), xii. (1900) pp. 319-22 (3 figs.).
§ Ber. Duutsch. Bot. Ges.. xviii. (1900) pp. 275-85.

Feb. 20th, 1901 E

50 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

(2) Other Cell-contents (including Secretions).

Blue Chlorophyll.* — M. Tsvett divides the constituents of ordinary-
chlorophyll into two classes, xanthophyllins and chlorophyllins ; the
former (carotin, erythrophyll, chrysophyll, &c.) including those which
absorb only short-period rays and are not fluorescent ; the latter being
characterised by their fluorescence, and by an absorption in the red.
He describes the method of obtaining blue chlorophyllin in the crys-
talline form ; it has nothing in common with the phyllocyanin of Fremy.

Alleged Violet Chromatophores. f — K. Kroemer contests the accu-
racy of Tschirch's statement + of the occurrence of violet chromatophores
in the " berry " of the coffee. He maintains, on the other hand, that the
appearance observed by Tschirch is due to masses of violet crystals in
the central vacuole in the hypodermal and epidermal cells of the pericarp.
The micro-chemical reactions are given on which the author bases his
opinion.

Myrosin in Plants. § — Th. Bokorny records the presence of myrosin
(chiefly in the seeds) in a number of plants belonging to the natural
orders Cruciferse, Leguminosee, and Umbelliferse. Several species belong-
ing to the Composite, and a number of others, gave negative results.

Proteolytic Enzyme of Germinating Seeds. || — In the case of germi-
nating lentils, V. Harlay finds the proteolytic ferment to be, in the
substances to which it gives rise by digestion, analogous to animal
trypsin, and probably identical with that which occurs in germinating
barley. The same results were obtained with germinating seeds of
Ctratonia siliqua ; and the author regards it as probably a general law
that a ferment analogous to trypsin, and producing tyrosin as one of the
products of its digestion, is present in all germinating seeds. This is
the case also with rapidly growing plants like fungi ; while in adult
phanerogams where there is no rapid growth, the ferment present is
one analogous to animal pepsin, giving rise on digestion to a chromogen
which becomes green.

New Enzyme.^T — O. Loew disputes the accuracy of the statement
that all enzymes have the property of decomposing hydrogen peroxide ;
he does, however, find in fresh tobacco leaves a ferment which possesses
this power. This enzyme, which he believes to be of very general
distribution in both plants and animals, he terms catalase. It occurs
either in a soluble form, /3-catalase, as an albumose ; or as a-catalase, in
an insoluble form as a compound of this albumose with a nucleoproteid.
That catalase belongs to the oxidising ferments is shown by its capacity
of oxidising hydrochinon into chinou.

New Glucoside from Erysimum.** — Schlagdenhauffen and — Reeb
have detected, in the seeds of several species of Erysimum, especially
E. aureum, in addition to the poisonous alkaloid, a new glucoside, to
which they give the name erysimin. It is present in the form of a pale

* Comptes Ren.lus, exxxi. (1900) pp. 842-4.

t Bot. Centmlbl., lxxxiv. (1900) pp. 33-5. J Cf. this Journal, 1900, p. 342.

§ Chem. Zeit., xxiv. (1900) pp. 771-2. See Journ. Chem. Soc, 1900, Abstr. ii.
p. 746.

|| Comptes Rmdus, exxxi. (1900) pp. G23-5. Cf. this Journal, 1900. p. 599.

•jf U.S. Deptmt. Agriculture, Bull. No. 3, 1900. See Bot. Centralbl., lxxxiv.
(19U0) p. 126. ** Comptes Rendus, exxxi. (1900) pp. 753-5.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 51

yellow amorphous mass, soluble iu all proportions in water and alcohol,
insoluble iu ether, chloroform, benziu, and carbon sulphide, slightly
hygroscopic, and melting at 190°, Injected into frogs and pigeons, it
acts as a heart-poison. Ervsimin belongs to the class of digitalins, and
is analogous to the glucoside of Oheiranthus.

Exosmose of Diastases.* — As the result of experiments on various
seedlings, J. Laurent states that during germination a portion of the
amylase formed in the seeds may pass out by exosmose ; but this process
ceases on germination; the young roots do not possess this property.
In the case of the sugar-cane small quantities of sucrase are also thrown
out. The object appears to be to facilitate the digestion of starch in the
cells which envelope the meristem.

Seminase in Seeds, f — Pursuing their investigation of seeds with
horny endosperm, E. Bourquelot and H. Herissey find that (in Medicago
sativa and Indigo/era tinctoria), wheu in a dormant condition, there is
always a small proportion of the soluble ferment seminase, which is
capable of hydrolysing the endosperm and transforming it into sugars
capable of assimilation, viz. galactose aud mannose.

Presence of an Inverting Sugar in Grapes. X — V. Martinaud has
established the presence, in the juice of all kinds of grape, of a sucrase
(inverting sugar, invertin) in sufficient quantity to invert the whole
of the saccharose present, without the assistance of the organic acids.
It is not present in vines attacked by bacterial diseases, and disappears
entirely in wines which have been strongly oxidised.

Simultaneous occurrence of Two Sugars. § — E. Bourquelot and
H. Herissey record the simultaneous presence, in the root of the yellow
gentian, of two carbohydrates of the nature of sugars, viz. saccharose

and gentianose.

(3) Structtire of Tissues.

Order of Formation of the Elements of the Central Cylinder in
the Root and Stem.|| — From a study of the central cylinder in flower-
ing plants, Prof. G. Bonnier concludes that it presents the same general
plan of structure in the stem and in the root ; the constitution and the
order of development of the tissues are the same in both cases. The
only difference is in the position of the xylem-poles, which, in the root,
are turned backwards towards the periphery of the central cylinder.
It follows that the first vessel formed near a xylem-pole of the root
originates not far from the primary cortex, i.e. in the neighbourhood of
the tissue which regulates the current of water which passes from the
root-hairs to the xylem- vessels. The author regards this difference as
depending on a correlation between the arrangement of the vascular
tissue and the absorption of water.

Anatomy of Monopodial 0rchids.1T — L. Hering describes in great
detail the structure, especially of the fertile stem, in a large number of

* Comptes Rendus, cxxxi. (1900) pp. 848-51.
t Tom. cit., pp. 903-5. Cf. thia Journal, 1900, p. 479.
t Tom. cit., pp. 808-10. § Tom. cit., pp. 750-52.

|| Tom. cit., pp. 781-9 (6 figs.).

1 Bot. Centralbl., lxxxiv. (1900) pp. 1-11, 35-45, 73-81, 113-22. 145-52, 177-84
(3 pis.).

E 2

52 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

genera and species of monopodial orchids. Among the more genera?
results arrived at, the following are the most important. The cells of
the epiderm vary greatly in form, and the development of the cuticle
is also verv various. Only one species is described as having a sharply
denned endoderm. The cortical tissue is commonly distinguished by
its altered appearance and by the lignified character of at least a portion
of it. The ground-tissue of the vascular cylinder is usually composed
of parenchymatous elements. The phloem-portion of the vascular
bundle is always protected by a bundle-sheath. The arrangement of the
vascular bundles is classified under three different types. There are
rarely any vascular bundles in the pith.

Gall of the Monterey Pine.* — W. A. Cannon describes the injuries
inflicted on the leaves and leaf-bases of the Monterey pine (Pinus radiata
Don. P. insignis Loud.), by the larvae of a gall-fly belonging to the
Cecidomyiidae. The gall consists mainly of hypertrophied epidermal
tissue ; and the immediate and principal cause of the hypertrophy ap-
pears to be the response on the part of certain plant-tissues to the
parasite's demand for food. This is indicated by the gradual enlarge-
ment of the cells surrounding the parasite in a manner which corre-
sponds to its growth, and also by the unusual amount of food-material
which these cells contain.

C4J Structure of Org-ans.

Underground Flowers.f — E. TJle describes a shrub growing in the
neighbourhood of Rio de Janeiro, Anona rhizantha, which produces its
flowers and ripens its fruits entirely underground. Besides the open
flowers, it produces more or less completely closed cleistogamous flowers.
The former appear to be contrived for pollination by special insects.

Nectaries of the Cruciferae. J — According to Dr. A. Villani, the
variations in the number and arrangement of the nectaries in the flower
of Cruciferae may be arranged in three principal groups, those in which
there are respectively four or two nectaries, or only one. In the latter
case the flowers are always very small, and the nectary central ; where
the number is four or two, the nectaries are arranged in a great variety
of ways in respect to the four longer or the two shorter stamens. In
the very wide-spread Alliaria officinalis, the nectaries go through two
stages. In the first stage, while the flower is expanded, they perform
the ordinary nuptial function of attracting insects which are useful for
pollination, and keeping off injurious insects, such as ants. But after
the perianth has dropped, the nectaries increase in size, and still con-
tinue to secrete nectar ; in this stage they attract ants in great numbers,
and become extra-nuptial. The same is the case with a species of Car-
damine, C. Chelidonia.

Nectaries of the Cucurbitaceae.§ — Prof. G. Arcangeli states that in
Cucurbita maxima the male flowers remain open longer in wet weather
and later in the year, than in fine weather and earlier, to avail thern-

* Amer. Nat,, xxxiv. (1900) pp. S01-10 (6 figs.).

t Die Natur, xlix. (1900) pp. 270-3 (5 figs.). See Bot. Centralbl., lxxxiv. (1900)
p. 89. X Mulpighia, xiv. (1900) pp. 167-71.

§ Bull. Soc. Bot, ItaL, 1899, pp. 198-204.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 53

selves more of the visits of bees. In Luffa cylindrica the male flowers
are provided with a bract, which bears from two to six glauds on its
underside, forming an extra-nuptial nectary. The stamens also form,
as in Cucurbita, a nectar-receptacle at their base. The female flowers
have honey-glands on the outer side of the calyx, and five globular
structures in the place of stamens, between which and the style is an
annular honey-pit.

Colour of Juniper-" Berries."* — M. Lendner does not confirm
Nestler's statement that the black colour of the so-called " berries " of
the juniper is due to a parasitic fungus, though fungus-hyphae are occa-
sionally found in them, but only exceptionally. It is rather due to
the accumulation of a substance allied to the tannoids in the epidermal
and hypodermal cells, which substance becomes subsequently trans-
formed into another of the same very dark colour. The active factor
in the change is probably the oxygen of the atmosphere.

Anatomy of Pedicels.j — A. Pitard discusses in detail the anatomy
of the pedicel of flowers and fruits. The peculiarities of structure are
described which are correlated with the increasing weight of the fruit,
and with the need for the transport of food-materials. In the case of
flowers which have become double under cultivation, the sclerenchy-
matous tissue is strengthened and often becomes lignified at an earlier
period. In erect axillary flowers the medullary parenchyme of the
pedicel is strongly developed, with a few scattered centrifugal vessels ;
when the flower is lateral, the pith is less strongly developed and the
vessels are more numerous with a centripetal arrangement.

Mechanism of the Awns of Stipa.J — L. Murbach describes the
mechanism of the seed-burying awns of Stipa avenacea. He confirms
the view taken by other observers that the cause of the twisting of the
awn is located in the individual cells ; not only a layer of cells, but
the whole of the mechanical cells, are active in bringing about this
result. The twisted portion of the awn is composed principally of
sclerenchymatous cells with a fibro-vascular bundle in the centre and
a band of chlorophyllous tissue on each side ; the mechanical cells are
distinguished by their remarkably small and eccentric cell-cavities.

Colour of Box-leaves.§ — According to Prof. E. Chodat, the bright
orange-red colour frequently assumed by leaves of the box growing in
rocky or sandy places, is due to a modification of the chromatophores.
The white band which runs along the mid-rib on the under-side of the
leaf is caused by the fact that the hypodermal cells of this region con-
tain crystals of calcium oxalate, between which are retained bubbles of
air which are exceedingly difficult to displace.

Chlorosis caused by the Nature of the Soil. || — J. A. CI. Eoux
has grown a number of silicicolous (arenaceous) plants in calcareous
soils, and finds that, although the seeds germinate readily, the seedling

* Ann. Sci. Pkys. et Nat., ix. (1900) pp. 494-5. Cf. this Journal, 1900, p. 3G5.
t ' Kech. 8. l'anat. compare'e d. pe'dicelles floraux et fructiferes,' Bordeaux, 1899,
i pp. and 5 pis. See Bot. Centralbl., lxxxiv. (1900) p. 18. J
X Bot. Gazette, xxx. (1900) pp. 113-7 (5 figs.).
§ Avch. Sci. Phys. et Nat., ix. (1900) pp. 488-9.
i| Ann. Soc. Linn. Lyon, xlvi. (1900) pp. 87-98.

54 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

plants develope tardily and imperfectly, tLe leaves becoming in many
cases more or less cblorotised. The production of flowers and fruit
is also unfavourably affected. The author claims to bave discovered,
generally distributed in the green tissues of plants, quantities of very
minute and extremely mobile micro-organisms — micrococci, bacteria,
ovoid bodies — which he believes to be of great importance to the life of
the plant, having frequently an injurious effect, and being probably one
of the causes of chlorosis.

Viridescence and Fasciation caused by a Parasite.* — M. Molliard
recoids an example of viridescence in the flowers of Trifolium repens,
and one of fasciation in the stem of Raylianus Haphunislrum ; the
former caused apparently by tbe attacks of a parasitic fungus belonging
to the Deinatieae, Polythrincium Trifolii, the latter to those of a coleo-
pterous larva.

Stomates on the Upper Side of Leaves.f — E. Kiihne finds the oc-
currence of stomates on the upper side of the leaves to be more common
in woody plants than has generally been supposed. They were observed
in 222 out of 1359 species examined. An attempt is made to connect
their occurrence with climatic conditions.

Stomates of the Box.J — Prof. K. Chodat and M. Bernard describe
the peculiar structure of tbe stomates on tbe leaves oi Buxus semper-
virens, which somewhat resembles that in Iris. There are usually six
modified epidermal cells belonging to each stomate. Tbe power of
movement by which the Assure is opened and closed does not reside in
tbe guard-cells, but in three hypostoniatic cells which put out papilla*
that push themselves up to the Assure.

Lenticels.§ — H. Devaux has made an exhaustive study of the struc-
ture and functions of lenticels, which he finds in all the great grouj>s
of vascular plants, and on all their organs where there is secondary
growth. Tbe total amount of surface covered by tbe lenticels is, within
certain limits, nearly uniform, their size being nearly in inverse pro-
portion to their number.

Three layers may be distinguished in a lenticel, analogous to those
of tbe periderm : — a jmelloderm, a suberised layer (or more than one),
and an intermediate formative region. Two types are specified, viz. : —
(1) those in which the closing layers are thm, and are composed of
cells intimately united, with no or only very small intercellular spaces - f
and (2) those in which the closing lajers are often thick, and are com-
posed of rounded cells with abundant intercellular spaces.

Lenticels are either primary or secondary ; the former are found at
an early period at a point determined by an organ — stomate, root, or
bud ; tbe latter are formed later at points not determined by an organ.
Wherever there are stomates, there is a tendency to produce lenticels
below them in the cortex, sometimes in the pericycle ; they occur
normally at the base of young rootlets. The growth of lenticels takes
place by a continual proliferation of new rounded elements and tbe
suberification of the cells.

* Rev. Gen. de Bot. (Bonnier), xii. (1!)()0) pp. 323-7 (3 figs),
t Mittl). Deutscb. dendiol. Ges., 1899, pp. 47-67. See Bot. Centralbl., lxxxiv.
(1900) pp. 13u. X Arch. 8ci. Pays, et Not., ix. (1900) pp. 495-6.

£ Ann. Sci. Nat. (Bot.), xii. (1900) pp. 1-240 (6 pis. and 7 tigs.). •

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 55

With regard to their function, the author does not admit that lenti-
cels exist primarily for the general interchange of gases ; for they are
often absent or inadequate ; the plant often has other porous regions
which serve for aeration ; and the opening and closing of the lenticels
is not due to the needs of aeration. They are to he regarded rather as
organs of transpiration for the regulation of the internal moisture of
the plant.

Relation between Lenticels and Adventitious Roots in Solanum
Dulcamara.* — J. A. Terras states that the adventitious roots do not, in
this species, arise below or grow out through lenticels, as is apparently
the case in the majority of plants. As the first formation of the root
precedes the appearance of phellogenetic divisions, it is entirely inde-
pendent of the formation of lenticels. The protuberances on the surface
of the stem are not lenticels, but result from the formation of a mass of
secondary tissue which originates in the reaction of the phellogen to the
pressure set up by the elongating root below it. The lenticels appear
only after the protuberances are fully formed.

Development of Hairs.f — W. Hirsch accepts Weiss's classification
of hairs, according to their mode of growth, as basipetal, acropetal, and
intercalary; but points out that even in hairs of the third type, the hair
does not undergo continual division from the base to the apex ; on the
contrary, the intercalary divisions are always confined to definite zones,
and the intercalary is almost always accompanied by either a basipetal
or an acropetal mode of growth. The mode of growth of hairs is not
dependent on the systematic position of a species, though within each
species it is constant.

Structure of Hyacinth Roots.:}: — Ida A. Keller finds that secondary
roots developed from hyacinth bulbs after the bulb had partially decayed
and had then been restored to a growing condition by cleaning, differed
in no essential respect from the original adventitious roots, but usually
displayed a greater development of vascular tissue.

Formation of Tubercles in Plants.§ — N. Bernard agrees with Stahl
in his conclusion that an endophytic mycorhiza is probably necessary
to the germination of the seeds of certain plants which constitute a
biological group displaying a symbiosis altogether analogous to that of
lichens. Infection by spores of the symbiotic fungus has a tendency
to produce tubercles ; and in plants which belong to this symbiotic
group there is tendency to the production of tubercles at a very early
period, as in the prothallia of the Ophioglossaceae and of species of
Lycopodium. The presence of an endophytic fungus appears to be a
very wide-spread cause of tuberculisation in plants.

Influence of the Removal of the Flowers on the Root-tubercles
of the Leguminosse.|| — Prof. 0. Mattirolo has experimented on the
effect produced on the root-tubercles of Leguminosas (chiefly Vicia

* Trans. Bot. Soc. Edinburgh, xxi. (1000) pp. 341-53 (2 pis.).
t Beitr. z. wissensck. Bot. (Fuufstiick), iv. (1000) p. 1. See Bot. Centralbl.,
lxxxiv. (1900) p. 166.

t Proc. Acad. Nat. Set. Philadelphia, 1900, pp. 438-40 (1 pi.).

§ Comptes Kendus, exxxi. (1900) pp. 626-9. Ci. this Journal, 1900, p. 707.

|| Malpighia, xiii. (1900) pp. 382-421 (1 pi.).

~>6 SUMMARY OF CUERENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Fabci) by the extirpation of the flowers. He finds the result of the
castration to be invariably a much more luxuriant development of the
whole of the vegetative system, especially of the root-tubercles. The
castrated plant continues to develope after the period when normally
it would have ripened its seeds and then perished. The production of
fruits and of tubercles appears to be always in inverse proportion the
one to the other. The conclusion 6ecms inevitable that the purpose
of the tubercles is to provide a source of food-supply for the leaves,
and that the ploughing into the soil of the crop before the flowers are
developed must tend greatly to increase its productiveness.

$. Physiology.
(1) Reproduction and Embryology.

Sexual Reproduction. * — Prof. P. A. Dangeard proposes a new
classification of sexual phenomena, in accordance with the most recent
discoveries in this department of physiology.

Wherever there are gametes, there is sexual reproduction, and
gametes are zoospores deprived of energy ; there are facultative gametes
which develope indifferently with or without previous conjugation ; and
a transition is thus established between sexual and non-sexual repro-
duction. The energy which incites the development of gametes is not
necessarily sexual ; when it is furnished by a physical or chemical
cause we have parthenogenesis, when by the action of one gamete on
another, we have sexual autophagy. This autophagy is of three kinds,
viz. : — (1) primitive autophagy or protogamy, in which the gametes
combine without fusion of the nuclei ; (2) ordinary autophagy or holo-
<jamy, where the nuclei fuse together as well as the cytoplasms ; (3)
reduced autophagy or merogamy, which does not require the participa-
tion of the whole of a second gamete, but only either of its cytoplasm
or of its nucleus. Among isogamous species, two cases are possible : —
the gametes may be impregnated by the cytoplasm of the second gamete
or by its nucleus. The second case is unknown; the first appears to
occur in Infusorians. In heterogamous species, merogamy includes
four distinct cases : — (1) The male gamete is impregnated by the cyto-
plasm of the female gamete, cytoplasmic androgamy ; (2) The male is
impregnated by the nucleus of the female gamete, nuclear androgamy ;
(3) The female gamete is impregnated by the cytoplasm of the male
gamete, cytoplasmic gynogamy ; (4) The female is impregnated by the
nucleus of the male gamete, nuclear gynogamy. Hertwig's, Boveri's,
and Delage's experiments are concerned with cytoplasmic androgamy ;
the partial impregnation of Boveri is a case of cytoplasmic gynogamy.
The author adopts Giard's term adelphophagy fur a union of gametes of
the same sex.

In the view of the author, all the eight nuclei of the embryo-sac of
Angiosperms are gametes ; the megaspore has germinated directly into
a gametange ; the two median cells which have the polar nuclei for
their nuclear elements may be termed mesodes. He distinguishes be-
tween the uses of the terms albumen and endosperm ; — the former is
an abnormal sporophyte ; the latter a gametophyte. Supernumerary

* Le Botanisto (Dangeard), vii. (1900) pp. 263-8.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC 57

•embryos may result from the impregnation of a gamete by a simple
fragment of the cytoplasm of a second gamete.

Double Impregnation in Angiosperms. * — Prof. E. Strasburger
carefully reviews all the recent investigations on this process, and comes
to a conclusion adverse to Nawaschin's viewf that the formation of
endosperm is the result of the fusion of the two polar nuclei, and that
where this fusion does not take place, no endosperm is formed. Stras-
burger points out that as long ago as 1877 he had established the
existence of this fusion in some of our native Orchideaj. The absence
of endosperm in the Orchideae is not due to any failure in the fusion
of the embryo-sac nuclei, but to the fact that it is not needed for the
nutriment of the embryo. The author proposes for the two processes
the terms generative impregnation and vegetative impregnation. The
object of the former process is the transmission of hereditary properties
to the descendants. This is not the function of any process of vegetative
impregnation such as the fusion of the polar nuclei with one another, or
of one of the generative nuclei with them. An active motion of the
generative nucleus within the embryo-sac does not rest on sufficient
evidence. Where the pollen-tube nuclei have unquestionably a power
of independent motion, they are furnished with cilia, as in the Cycadeae.

Double Impregnation in Caltha.J — Miss Ethel N. Thomas has con-
tinued her observations on the double impregnation in Caltlia palustris.
The polar nuclei have generally completely fused before the entrance of
the pollen-tube into the embryo-sac. The antipodals are large pear-
shaped cells, and, at this period very often contain two nuclei apiece.
When the generative nuclei escape from the pollen-tube they are very
minute, and may be oblong or dumbbell-shaped, or may have the form
of a somew r hat straight S. By the time that the vermiform generative
nucleus has reached the middle of the sac, it has enlarged to a very
considerable size ; while the nucleus which impregnates the oosphere
increases but very little in size. The polar impregnation appears always
to take place at a period more or less in advance of that of the
oosphere.

Archegones and Pollen-tubes of Sequoia. § — W. Arnoldi has fol-
lowed out his investigation of the endosperm of Sequoia sempervirem by
some observations on the corpuscles (archegones) and pollen-tubes.

The archegones are formed laterally in the endosperm, and are either
single or associated in groups. Each archegone arises from a single
peripheral endosperm-cell. Their structure resembles that of the
Oupressineae, but they have a bicellular neck, and, like the Cupres-
sineae, are destitute of a ventral canal-cell. A complete covering
layer is never formed round the archegones, whether they are single
or collected into groups ; single endosperm-cells assume the character
of covering cells. The position of the pollen-tubes corresponds to that
of the archegones ; they force their way in between the nucellus and the
endosperm. Their structure corresponds to that in the Cupressineae.

» Bot. Ztg., lviii. (1900) 2" Abt., pp. 293-316. Cf. this Journal, 1000, p. 6S9.
t Cf. this Journal, 1900, p. G02.

X Ann. of Bot., xiv. (1900) pp. 527-35 (1 pi.). Cf. this Journal, 1900, p. 605.
§ Bull. Soc. Imp. Nat. Moscou, 1899 (1900) pp. 405-22 (2 pie. and 4 figa.).
(German). Cf. this Journal, 1900, p. 482.

58 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Cross-Pollination and Self-Pollination. — According to Marchese
Burgagli,* the insect visitor chiefly efficient in the pollination of the
parasite Cytinus hypocystis is Bombus agrorum var. pascuorum.

Mr. G. W. Ord f records a series of observations with regard to the
visits of Lepidoptera to flowers. He is of opinion that colour is a matter
of but little importance in the attraction of moths. On the other hand,
he has known insects to be attracted only by one flower which does not
yield nectar, viz. the elder. The stinging-nettle, although specially
adapted for anemophily, attracts insects of more orders than one. In
the ragwort and field-thistle it appears certain that the visiting insects
effect pollination between separate flowers of the same head. The
nectar-sipping habit of moths reaches its greatest development in the
genus Plusia.

Ornithophilous Flowers. — E. Werth + gives an account of the
arrangements exhibited by flowers in Tropical Africa for pollination
by the agency of birds, chiefly Nectarinieas (honey-birds), the represen-
tatives in Africa of the American humming-birds. He classifies these
under 8 types, viz. : — (1) Myrtaceaa type. The attractive part of the
flower is usually the long white stamens (e.g. Jambosa vulgaris, Barring-
tonia racemosa) ; (2) Bruguiera type ; pendent, bell-shaped flowers,
the access to the honey between the style and the stamens (Bruguiera
gymnorhiza, &c.) ; (3) Ceiba type, corresponding to Delpino's Fuchsia
type (Ceiba pentandra); (4) Hibiscus type; tubular or bell-shaped,
horizontal or pendent flowers ; the organs of reproduction completely
enclosed or projecting (Hibiscus rosa sinensis) ; (5) Aloe type ; flowers
with long narrow tube, equalling in length the beak of most Kectariniere
(Aloe VolJcensii, &c.) ; (6) Lip-flowers ; flowers zygomorphic, lipped
(Kigelia eethiopica, &c.) ; (7) Erythrina type; horizontal zygomorphic
flowers, with strongly projecting reproductive organs (Erythrina indica,
&c.) ; (8) Explosive pollen tyj)e (Loranthus Dregei, &c).

The ornithophilous sjiecies of Tropical Eastern Africa are mostly
characterised by conspicuous scarlet or purple flowers, or of some shade
of brown or orange corresponding to the colours of the plumage of the
male as contrasted with the female Nectarinieae.

Schenkling-Prevot§ holds that the number of truly ornithophilous
flowers is much smaller than is usually stated. Among those which
are actually pollinated by birds he names Feijoa, Myrrhinum ; among
Musaceas Musa, Bavena, and Strelitzia ; Erythrina ; some Ericaceae and
Proteaceaa ; Loranthus Kraussianus and Dregei. Beautiful examples of
true ornithophily are afforded by the terrestrial bromeliuds Puya
chilensis and coerulea, pollinated by a starling, Curseus aterrimus.

Cleistogamous Flowers. || — M. Leclerc du Sablon has studied the
cleistogamous flowers of Viola odorata. The hypodermal layer of cells

* Bull. Soc. Bot. Hal., 1900, p. 203.

t Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc. Glasgow, v. (1900) pp. 355-66.

X Verhaudl. Bot. Ver. Brandenburg, xlii. (1900) pp. 222-56 (12 figs.). See Bot.
Centralbl., lxxxiv. (1900) p. 188.

§ Naturw. Wochenschr., xiv. (1S99) pp. 165-8. See Bot. Centralbl., lxxxiv.
(1900) p. 325.

|| Rev. Ge'n. de Bot. (Bonnier), xii. (1900) pp. 308-18 (12 figs.); Comptes-
Rendus, exxxi. (1900) pp. 691-2.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 5 ( J

in the anther-wall are mostly large, thin-walled, and contain hut little
protoplasm : hut, at the upper part of the anther, hoth the epidermal and
the hypoderinal layer of cells are very small and contain abundant pro-
toplasm with a large nucleus. The pollen-grains germinate while still
within the anther, and the pollen-tubes creep along the inside of the
anther-wall until they reach the small cells at the upper part of the
anther. These act in a manner comparahle to the conducting tissue of
the style and stigma ; their abundant food-material attracts the pollen-
tubes, which penetrate the wall of the anther at this point, and thus
reach the stigma which is exactly on a level with this portion of the
anther.

Similar phenomena are presented by Viola canina and other species
of the genus. In Oxalis Acetosella the conducting tissue of the anther
extends along the whole length of the pollen-sacs on the side facing the
stigma. In Linaria spuria the cleistogamous flowers are not so sharply
differentiated, passing by insensible gradations into those of normal
structure. The pollen-grains do not germinate while still within the
pollen-sacs. The self-pollinated flowers of Leersia oryzoides are not
properly cleistogamous.

Hybridisation of Hepatica.* — Prof. F. Hildebrand has tried a num-
ber of experiments on the hybridisation of three common species of
Hepatica, — H. triloba with blue and white flowers, H. angulosa blue, and
H. acutiloba white, and finds different results in different cases. All
the species are proterogynous. The crossing of R. triloba ? by H. angu-
losa £ produced flowers which surpassed either of the parents in beauty.
Crossing these two species in the other direction resulted in almost
entire failure with white H. triloba, while with the ordinary blue variety
of this species much better results were obtained. Hybrids between
H. acutiloba £ and H. triloba $ gave the singular result that the leaves
presented a close resemblance to those of one parent, while the flowers
were altogether those of the other parent.

(2) Nutiitionl and! Growth, (including- Germination,
and^Movements of Fluids).

Electrical Effect of Light upon Green Leaves.-j-— Dr. A. D. Waller

has made a series of observations on this subject, using chiefly the leaves
of Iris. He concludes that the leaves of certain plants, under favourable
conditions of life, exhibit electromotive effects and after-effects amount-
ing to • 02 volt, positive or negative, in response to illumination. As
in the case of animal tissue, it is possible that the negative (inactive;
effect may be significative of dissimilation, and the opposite effect or
after-effect significative of assimilation. The absence of direct result
in petals indicates that chloroplasts are essential to the reaction.

Influence of the Water of the Soil on the Development of
Plants4 — In the two instances investigated (oat and summer wheat)
— v. Seelhorst finds that the number of internodes in the haulm is
mainly determined by the turgor during the first period of vegetation,

* Bot. Centralbl., lxxxiv. (1900) pp. 65-73.
+ Proc. Eoy. Soc., lxvi. (1000) pi). 129-37 (5 figs.).

X Journ. f. Landwirthsch., xlviii. Hett 2. p. 103. See Bot. Centralbl., lxxxiv.
(1900) p. 54.

•60 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

while the vigour and length of the haulm depend mainly on the amount
of water in the soil at the time of germinating. In wheat the length
of the ear is also chiefly determined by the amount of water in the soil
during the first period of growth.

Parasitism of Pedicularis.* — According to A. Volkaert, the various
species of Pedicularis are parasitic almost exclusively on species of
Graniinea3 and Cyperaceae, doing considerable damage in this way to
pastures ; P. 2^lustris is in this respect the most injurious species.
The haustoria appear, in some species at least, to persist through the
winter. Some species choose especially particular grasses for their
host-plant ; thus P. recutita is partial to Deschampia csespitosa, P. verti-
cillata to Sesleria coerulea. The various species differ greatly in the
obligatory character of their parasitism ; thus P. palustris displays the
strongest parasitism ; while P. comosa is almost independent of any host-
plant.

Parasitism of Ximenia americana. f — Further experiments by E.
Heckel on the germination of the seeds of this plant show that it is a
true root-parasite. It produces suckers altogether resembling those of
Thesium, which do not fix themselves indifferently to the root of any
plant with which they may come into contact, and, in the absence of a
suitable host-plant, may become autoparasitic, attaching themselves to
another stem or root of the same species. In addition to the suckers,
the root of Ximenia normally produces nodosities or tubercles resembling
those of the Leguruinosas, which appear to be connected with the nutrition
of the plant.

Germination of some Perennial Herbs.J — A. Eimpach has studied
the germination [and development of some perennial herbs of North
America, which he classifies under three heads, viz. : — (1) those which
possess a rhizome which grows more or less vertically upwards, and
becomes drawn down by contractile adventitious roots (Lilium Martagon,
Allium ursinum, Plantago major, species of Arissema, Hypoxis, Trillium,
&c.) ; (2) the roots have a nutritive function only ; they are of no great
importance in fixing the plant to the soil, and produce no contractile
rootlets (Paris quadrifolia, Colchicum autumnale, Orchis mascida, species
of Erytlironium, Lilium, &c.) ; (3) those which are furnished with a
long tap-root, are confined to the place they occupy when germinating,
and are reproduced only by seeds (a very common form on the prairies).

Germination of the Winter-buds of Hydrocharis Morsus-Ranae.§ —
According to J. A. Terras, the winter-buds of the frog's-bit separate
from the runners as soon as they are ripe, sink to the bottom of the
water, where they rest till the following spring, when they rise to
the surface and develope at once into new plants. By covering up,
tbey may be kept in their resting condition for at least two years.
Heat and light by themselves are insufficient to induce germination ; a
co-operation of the two is necessary, as also is the presence of oxygen.

* 'Unters. iib. d. Parasiti6mus d. Pedicularis-ArteD,' Zurich, 1891), 52 pp. See
Beih. z. Bot. Ceutralbl., ix. (1900) p. 521.

t Comptes Rendus, cxxxi. (1900) pp. 7G4-5. Cf. this Journal, 1900, p. 354.

X Bot. Gazette, xxx. (1900) pp. 171-88.

§ Trans. Bot. Soc. Edinburgh, xxi. (1900) pp. 318-29.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 61

Kespiration is carried on by the buds during winter to a slight extent,
both in darkness and in light.

Absorption of Nitrogen by Plants. * — Th. Schloesing fils finds,
as the result of experiments, that the nitrification of ammonium salts
is not, for all plants, a necessary preliminary to the absorption of nitro-
gen into the plant. While for some plants (e.g. buckwheat) the pre-
ferable form of the nitrogenous food-material is that of nitrates ; others
(e.g. Tropseoluni) thrive better when the nitrogen is presented to them
in the ammoniacal form.

C3) Irritability.

Perception of Geotropic Irritation. — In support of his view as to
the nature of the conduction of geotropic irritation in plants, Dr. B.
Nernee f points out the importance of the existence, in certain cells of
the organs in question, of minute bodies having either a higher or a
lower specific gravity than protoplasm, and which are therefore con-
stantly shifting their location in the cell with changes in its position.
Among such particles which are of a higher specific gravity than proto-
plasm are leucoplasts, chloroplasts, and starch-grains ; the nucleus be-
haves sometimes in one way, sometimes in the other. In the root these
cells occur in the root-cap, and especially in the so-called columel, and
may be regarded as forming, by their association, a special organ. In
the leaves and stem, these shifting particles are found chiefly in the
starch-sheath, occasionally in the fundamental parenchynie. The author
finds such cells universally in those organs which are capable of a geo-
tropic irritation ; and their appearance corresponds to the period when
the organ becomes sensitive to geotropism. The conclusion seems in-
evitable that these particles, heavier or lighter than protoplasm, are
closely connected with geotropic sensitiveness.

G. Haberlandt J arrives at the same conclusion, that the starch-
sheath, with its large and motile starch-grains, is the perceptive organ
for geotropic irritation. Such a typical starch-sheath occurs in the
nodes of Gramineae, Kubiaceaa, Caryophylleae, Polygonaceaa, &c, which
are all capable of geotropic curvatures. The writer gives an account
of experiments which seem to show that the pith retains its power of
geotropic curvature when tho epiderm, the collenchyme, and the greater
part of the cortical parenchynie have been removed ; but loses it if
deprived of the remainder of the parenchynie and of the starch-sheath.

(4.) Chemical Changes (including Respiration
and Fermentation).

Influence of Temperature on the Decomposition of Albumen.§ —
Pursuing his] investigations on the formation and decomposition of
albuminoids in plants, D. Prianischnikow has determined that the de-
composition of albumen and the formation of asparagin go on more
energetically at a temperature of 35° C, than at one of 28°.

* Comptes Rendus, exxxi. (1900) pp. 716-9.

t Eer. Deutsch. Bot. Ges., xviii. (1900) pp. 241-9. Cf. this Journal, 1900, p. 487.

X Tom. cit., pp. 261-72 (1 fig.).

§ Tom. cit.. pp. 285-91. Cf. this Journal, 1899, p. 509.

<')2 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Lactic Acid Fermentation.* — S. Epstein points out the importance
<>f a knowledge of the bacteriology of the process of cbeese-ripening,
the exact nature of which depends largely on the lactic acid organisms
present ; these affect both the odour and the intensity of the ripening
by the production of enzymes.

Preparation of Sake.f — Y. Kozai gives a detailed account of the
chemical and biological questions in the preparation of sake or rice-
wine. The enzyme of the fermenting fungus, Aspergillus Oryzx, forms
dextrose from starch, dextrin, melitriose, sucrose, and maltose, but does
not attack lactose or inulin.

y. General.

Scott's Fossil Botany 4 — This excellent handbook is limited to the
Pteridophytes and the Gymnosperms, excluding Fossil Algae on the one
hand and Angiosperms on the other hand. The organisms discussed
are grouped as follows: — Equisetales (including Catamites), Spheno-
phyllales, Lycopodiales (including Lepidostrobus, Si gill aria, and Stig-
maria), Ferns, Cycadofilices (including ftledulloseas), Cordaiteae, and
the Mesozoic Gymnosperms (including Giugkoaceaa). In his conclud-
ing chapter on General Results, the author points out the general
concurrence of the conclusions drawn from morphological and from
palseontological investigations. The origin of the Pteridophyta — the
remains of vascular Cryptogams going back to the Silurian — lies too
far back for the existing fossil evidence to touch the question. Angio-
sperms, on the other hand, appear with great suddenness in the Mesozoic
period. Palaeontology affords no support whatever to the theory of a
bryophytic origin of the Pteridophyta. It is probable that a large part,
if not the whole, of the Gymnospermous Phanerogams are derived from
Ferns, but if so, the heterosporous stage of the Filices has been entirely
lost. The author regards the great majority, or possibly even all the
known families of Gymnosperms as having had a common origin from
the Filicales.

B. CRYPTOGAMIA.

Cryptogamia Vascularia.

Structure of Isoetes.§— Dr. D. H. Scott and T. G. Hill have studied
the structure of Isoctes Hystrix, a terrestrial species of the genus, and
find that it does not differ very essentially from I. lacustris. Among
the more important results are the following.

There is some evidence that the apex may grow by means of a single
apical cell. The stele is not composed of the united leaf-traces, but is
probably a cauline structure. The differentiation of the primary xylem
is nearly simultaneous over its whole area. The cell-division of the
primary meristem passes over without any interruption into that of the
cambium. Secondary xylem is always formed ; its elements are typical

* Arch. f. Hvgiene, xxxvii. (1900) pp. 329-59. See Bot. Centralbl., Ixxxiv.
(1900) p. 201.

t Centralbl. Bakt., 2" Abt., vi. (1900) pp. 385-405. Cf. this Journal, 1898,
p. 113.

\ ' Studies in Fossil Botany.' By Dukinfield H. Scott. London, 1900, xiii. and
533 pp., 1 pi. and 150 figs.

§ Ann. of Bot., xiv. (1900) pp. 413-34 (2 pis. and 2 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 63

tracheids, without cell-contents. The vascular bundle of the leaf, which
is collateral throughout, has an exarch structure in the lamina, the proto-
xylern lying next the phloem. The phloem contains true sieve-tubes
with transverse sieve-plates, on both sides of which callus is formed.
The stele of the root has in all parts a monarch structure, the differentia-
tion of the xylem beginning with the development of a single tracheid,
which lies exactly opposite the protophloem.

The observations of the authors tend to confirm the view of the
affinity of Isoetcs with Lycopodium rather than with the Filices.

Anatomy of the Hymenophyllaceae.* — A study of the structure of
several species of Hymcnophyllum and Trichomanes leads L. A. Boodle
to the following conclusions.

The stem is in all species monostelic, and one leaf-trace passes off
to each leaf; the stele contains no pith. In the stem of Hymenophyllum
the phloem forms a ring round the xylem. In Trichomanes the stele
exhibits several different types of structure, viz. : — (1) a ring of xylem
surrounding the parenchyme which contains the protoxylem (T. reni-
forme) ; (2) a solid mass of xylem with internal protoxylems accom-
panied by only scanty parenchyme (T. radicans, &c.) ; (3) the sub-
collateral type (T. trichoideum) ; (4) the collateral type (T. muscoides) ;

(5) only one tracheid, or none at all, and no phloem (T. labiatum) :

(6) a solid mass of xylem with scattered indefinite protoxylem (T.
spicatum) ; (7) a solid mass of xylem with distinct peripheral proto-
xylem (T. scandens).

The leaves of all Hymenophyllaceae are destitute of stomates, as
well as of intercellular spaces, even though they are several cells in
thickness, as in T. reniforme.

Stem of Angiopteris.j — Miss E. F. Shove has made a study of the
anatomical structure of the stem of Angiopteris evecta. The vascular
strands are arranged in a series of inverted funnel-shaped zones ; the
leaf-trace bundles arise from superficial vascular tissue alone ; the steles
of the second zone do not share in the formation of the foliar strands.
The centrifugal growth of the phloem is contrary to that described for
most other Ferns. In the apical region of the stem the presence of
several initial cells was satisfactorily demonstrated. The stem is
apparently destitute of aerial roots.

Algae.

Cell-division in Fresh-water Algae.*— Prof. R. Chodat states that
in some filamentous fresh- water algae (Baphidium, Kirclmeriella, Scene-
desmus), transverse septation frequently takes place ; the second cell-
division is often at right angles to the first ; two of the daughter-cells
being then at the poles of the mother-cell, the other two lateral. A
similar mode of septation takes place in Volvox.

New Genera of Floridese.§ — Among algae from our southern coasts,
E. A. L. Batters finds types of no less than three new genera of
Florideae, viz. : —

* Ann. of Bot., xiv. (1900) pp. 455-96 (3 pis.),
t Tom. cit., pp. 497-525 (2 pie.).
I Arch. Sci. Phys. et Nat., ix. (1900) pp. 491-2.
§ Journ. Bot., xxxviii. (1900) pp. 369-79 (1 pi.).

64 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Neevea (Bangiacere). Thallus microscopic, endozoic, filamentous,
procumbent, creeping in the substance of Flustra foliacea, composed of
violet or rosy-purple cells arranged in a single or two or more parallel
rows within a gelatinous sheath ; filaments irregularly branched, in the
older parts of the thallus united into a compact pseudo-parenchymatous
layer one or more cells in thickness ; cells at first oval, becoming angular
and very irregular in shape by mutual pressure. Reproduction effected
by the escape of the cells from the gelatinous sheath, and their subse-
quent development into new individuals.

Bhodophysema. Fronds gregarious, minute, dark red, hemispherical,
globose or pear-shaped, sometimes more or less plicate-rugose, composed
of a medullary stratum of large roundish-angular colourless cells, be-
coming smaller towards the periphery, and a cortical portion formed of
a few layers of small coloured closely packed cells, each containing
several small disk-shaped chromatophores ; tetraspores cruciate, borne
in external convex sori, accompanied by slender rigid few-celled para-
physes ; cystocarps and antherids unknown. B. Georgii, on Zostera.

Erythrodermas. Fronds membranaceous, horizontally expanded, orbi-
cular or indefinite in outline, adhering closely to the substratum, mono-
stromatic or composed of very few layers of polygonal cells arranged
in dichotomous rows radiating flabellately from several points ; chroma-
tophores small, disk- shaped, several in each cell ; tetraspores cruciate,
arranged in moniliform simple or forked filaments, which are packed
together in external convex nematheces ; cystocarps and antherids un-
known. E. Allcni, dredged from 4-6 fathoms.

Classification of Corallinacese. * — F. Heydrich now reckons 18
genera of Corallinacere, which he classifies under two primary heads : —
(1) those in which the thallus has no basal disk, the rhizoids forcing
their way into the tissue of the host-plant without the assistance of any
special layer ; and (2) those in which the thallus has a basal disk and
is calcified ; the rhizoids are in a single layer, and do not penetrate
the tissue of the host-plant. The 1st section includes only the genera
Schmitziella, Choronema, and Chsetolithon. In the 2nd are included 5 new
genera, viz. : —

Sphseranthera g. n. Vegetative development not differentiated;
tetrasporanges in conceptacle-like sori ; thallus composed of several
layers of cells, with or without cuticle ; auxiliary cell intercalary ;
carpogones terminal, not on the same filaments, auxiliary cell developing
into a 1-spored gonimoblast ; antherids spherical ; dioecious.

Paraspora g, n. Similar ; but auxiliary cell and carpogone side by
side on one terminal filament ; auxiliary cell developing into a chain-
like gonimoblast.

Stichospora g. n. Tetrasporanges in conceptacles ; thallus not flexible,
composed everywhere of several layers of cells, with or without cuticle ;
auxiliary cell and carpogone terminal, one above the other on the same
filament ; auxiliary cell developing into a 1-spored gonimoblast ; dioe-
cious (?)

Hyperantherella g. n. Similar ; but auxiliary cell intercalary, carpo-
gone terminal, on different filaments ; auxiliary cell developing into a
gonimoblast ; antherids above the procarps.

* Ber. DeutBch. Bot. Ges , xviii. (1900) pp. 310-17. Cf. this Journal, 1897, p. 225.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 65

Perisprrmon g. n. Similar ; but auxiliary cell and carpogone termi-
nal on one filament, one above the other; auxiliary cell developing into
a 1-spored gonimoblast ; male elements surrounding the female in one
conceptacle. ■

CEdogoniaceae.* — Karl E. Him has brought out a magnificent and
splendidly illustrated monograph of this family of Algae. After a
minute and exhaustive general description of the various parts, the three
genera. (Edogonium, Bidbochsele, and CEdocladium, are taken in succession.
Of (Edogonium, 199 species in all are described, but of these 43 are but
imperfectly known, or their organs of reproduction have not yet been
accurately observed ; 38 are now described for the first time. Of Bulbo-
clisete 41 species are described, six of them new ; CEdocladium is mono-
typic. The monograph is one of the most complete published of any
family of Algae.

Fertilisation of Sphseroplea.f — M. Golenkinhas afresh investigated
the mode of fertilisation in Sphseroplea annulina, a form allied to Klc-
bahn's var. latisepta, having both uuiuucleated and multinucleated
oospheres. It presents some differences from the mode observed in any
other alga?, indeed in any other plants, but resembles that in the
( 1 hlarnydomonadineae.

Nuclear division was followed both in the antherid and in the vege-
tative cells. The nucleolo breaks up into a number of fragments, which
arrange themselves in a nuclear dis-k, and then appear to split up and
move to the two poles, where they fuse into daughter-nucleoles. All
the chromosomes of the dividing nucleus appear to originate from
the nucleole. This fusion of the nucleoles in Spirogyra and in the
I 'hlamydomonadincae (as Dangeard has shown) indicates that they are
not true nuclei, but carriers of chromatin substance. Nucleoles of this
kind occur also in a large number of green algae, including all Volvo-
cineae, also in Musci. A similar process takes place iu Amoeba hyalina.

The septa of Spliseroplea exhibit at certain spots a kind of acrolation
presenting an appearance of sieve-disks, but no continuity of protoplasm
from one cell to another could be detected.

Division of the Oosphere in Cystosira. j — H. Winkler has carried
out a series of experiments for the purpose of determining the influence
of external factors on the direction of the first division-wall in the
impregnated oosphere of Cystosira, barbaia. He established that the
direction was quite independent of a difference in the supply of oxygen
to the different sides of a germinating oosperm, to gravitation, or to
contact. On the other hand, light w r as found to have a distinct inHuenco
on the first division ; the first septa in all the germinating plants were
nearly paiallel to and vertical to the direction of the mcidtnt light.
When this polarity has once been established, it cannot be reversed.

Structure of the Diatom Girdle. § — As the result of observations,
T. (J. Palmer and F. J. Keeley have come to the conclusion that the

* Act. Soc. Scient. Fennkrc, xxvii. (1900) iv. and 391 pp., 64 pis. and 27 figs.
(German).

t Bull. Soc. Imp. Nat. Motcou, 1899 (1900) pp. 343-61 (1 pi.) (German). Cf.
this Journal, 1899, p. .514

X Ber. Deutscli. Bot. Gcs., xviii. (1900) pp. '297-305 (1 fig.').

§ Bine. Acad. Nat. Sci. i l.uiidelphia, 1900, pp. 405-79 (-.: pis.).
Feb, :.>0.h, 1901 F

66 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

generally held opinion that Lbe girdle-band of diatoms is a " closed
hoop" is erroneous in a large number of instances, with certain impor-
tant exceptions however. The authors, in fact, state that " the closed
hoop structure is unusual." " The girdle is a two-ended band of silica
with the ends variously and characteristically rounded or otherwise
modified and approximated or overlapping without being joined," at least
in certain examples amongst the larger forms of, e. g. Surirella, Nitzschia,
Navicula, &c, and inferentially in the minuter species of the same genera ;
and also in certain species of Coscinodiscus, Aulacodiscus, Bidduljahia, &c.
Forms with closed girdles are Synedra supcrba, Arachnoidiscus Eltren-
bergii, Triceratium favus and probably all Triceratiinse, Isthmia nervosa.
The pertinence of these observations to the phenomena of reproduction
and development is obvious, and they will serve to clear up some at least
of the difficulties involved in the assumption of a closed fixed hoop. The
important excej)tions, however, seem to leave the problem much as before,
although the paper is confessedly only a preliminary one. The struc-
ture called by the authors a "cleat "on the secondary girdles which
make their appearance before reduplication, and which is particularly
well marked in Surirella clegans Ehr., is very interesting and, so far as
we know, new. The paper is accompanied by two plates of diagrams
and photographs.

Actinoeyclus Ralfsii. * — E. M. Nelson points out that diatoms in
general appear white, when examined by a low power and ordinary
•transmitted light upon a light ground ; but if the light ground be made
dark, by placing a central stop beneath the condenser, those diatoms
which have compai'atively coarse structure will appear red, those with
finer structure green, those still finer blue, and so on. He notices that,
these colours are due to diffraction, and that if the objective be changed
for one of greater aperture, those diatoms which were red will be re-
solved and become colourless, those that were green will become red,
those which were blue green, and the whole series lowered one step in
the gamut of the spectrum.

He then calls attention to the very beautiful Actinocycli, which act
in a manner precisely contrary to the above ; for upon a dark ground
they appear colourless, while upon a light ground they become brilliantly
coloured. Mr. Nelson argues that the colours in this species can be
caused neither by diffraction nor by pigments, and he asks for some
explanation of the phenomena.

In conclusion, he describes an extremely delicate perforated cap or
sieve covering the single process situated near the margin of this diatom,
and says that it is similar to the caps of the processes of the Aulisci, to
which he drew attention on a former occasion.

Schmidt's Atlas der Diatomaceen-Kunde. — Heft 5G of this magnifi-
cent work comprises, as usual, 4 plates, Nos. 221—224, with accompanying
brief descriptions. The diatoms figured are species of llhabdonema and
Cyclotella.

Stigeoclonium. j — L. Iwanoff finds, in the neighbourhood of Moscow,
a new terrestrial species of Stigeoclonium, which he names S. terrcslre, and

* Journ. Quek. Micr. Club, \\l (1900) pp. 377-8J.

f Bull. Soc. Imp. Nat. Moscou, 1899 (I'JOJ) pp. 423-32 (1 pl^ (German).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICliOSCOPY, ETC. G7

from its characters and those of others described hy Klebs, proposes
some modification of the characters of the genus. Each cell possesses
a nucleus, a disk-shaped chromatophore, and one or more pyrenoids.
The megazoospores have in some species 2, in others 4 cilia, and
germinate readily. The microzoospores have also either 2 or 4 cilia,
corresponding to "the number in the megasporesof the same species. The
microspores do not germinate directly, but pass into a resting-stage. or
conjugate in pairs, producing stellate zygotes. The resting palmella-
cells may either germinate directly or produce microzoospores.

Plankton Algae. — In addition to a number of new species, E.
Lemmermann * adds the following new genera to the list of plankton
algae.

Centratr actus g. n. Cells free-swimming, furnished with a long
hollow spine distinctly thickened at the base, with several chlorophores
which are often broken up into a network ; no pyrenoid ; propagation
by transverse division. Founded on Sclircederia belonophora Schmidle.

Marssoniella g. n. Cells mostly associated in a tufted radiating colony,
pear-shaped, connected by the blunt ends, with homogeneous blue-green
contents, and a more strongly coloured central body ; propagation by
division.

Eudorinella g.n. Cells associated in spherical colonies of 8, biciliate,
enclosed in a common broad gelatinous envelope ; the peripheral cells
lying in two different planes, forming regular cubes ; chlorophore
parietal, with a pyrenoid (?) ; an eye-spot (?) ; propagation unknown.
Founded on Eudorina Wallichii Turn.

Crucigenietta g.n. Cells associated in definite colonies; with a
parietal chlorophore, but no pyrenoid ; propagation by longitudinal
division.

A synopsis is given of the 5 species of Lagerheimia.

Prof. G. B. De Toni and Sig\ A. Forti f furnish a list, with descrip-
tions of 45 genera and 85 species of plankton-algae (including Peri-
dinieae) found in Lake Vetter, Sweden.

Among Plankton diatoms H. IT. Gran J proposes a new genus
Bacterosira, founded on Lauderia fragilis, and another new genus
Cuscinosira, founded on Coscinodiscus polychordus.

Development of Pandorina morum.§ — According to P. A. Dangcard,
each zoospore is, in this alga, identical in structure with a Chlamydomonas
with bell-shaped chromatophore. It possesses a nuclear membrane, a
nucleole, and nucleoplasm. Each zoospore is invested with a membrane
of its own, and secretes in addition a gelatinous substance, which goes
to the formation of the common envelope of the colony. The division
of the nucleus is karyokinetic, and exactly follows the same course as
in the Cldamydomonadineae. In (he formation of a new colony, which
generally consists of 16 individuals (though there may be 8 or 32), thore
is not simply an invagination of the cells, each one must undergo a

* Bcr. Deutsch. Bot. Ges., xviii. (1900) pp. 272-5, 306-10. Cf. this Journal,
1900, p. 612. f Atti r. 1st. Veneto di Sci., lix. (1900) pp. 537-61, 780-829.

I Nyt Ma-. Naturvidensk., xxxiii. (1900) pp. 103-28 (1 pi.). See Hedwigia,
xxxix. ( 1900) Beibl., p. 203.

§ Le Botaniate (Dangeard), vii. (1900) pp. 192-208 (1 pi.). Cf. this Journal,
1900, p. 229.

F 2

&S SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

rotation of 180°. The bipartitions take place longitudinally, and each
zoospore has in consequence the length of its mother-cell.

Chromulina Rosanoffii. * — N. Gaidukov states that Chromulina
(Chromophyton) Rosanoffii is an entirely independent organism, with
holophytic nutrition. He has determined the presence in it of chloro-
phyll. The characteristic pigment, called by Klehs chrysochrome, he
has decomposed into three components, chrysochlorophyll and chryso-
xanthophyll, both soluble in alcohol, and phycochrysin, a pigment soluble
in water, which probably gives the peculiar colour to Chromulina and to
other Chrysomouads.

In another paper f the author gives a more detailed account of the
spectroscopic reactions ot this pigment.

Chlorocystis Cohnii (Reinhardt).* — This unicellular epiphytic alga
(Chlorochytrium Cohnii Wright) has been found by G. 1'. Moore en-
crusting fronds of Enleromorpha ; it also grows on other marine algre, —
Urospora, Polysiphonia, Ascophyllum, Navicula, &c, and on hydrozoans
and infusoriaus. It consists of a single nearly spherical cell, measuring
from 16 to 26 /x. These cells, though they have been stated to be some-
times completely endophytic within the tissue of the host-plant, are
usually merely epiphytic ; and this must necessarily be the case with
Entcromorpha, which is monostromatic. The cell contains a single large
chromatophore, which may be central or lateral. Near the centre of the
cell is a well-defiued n lcleus from which the protoplasm radiates in tine
strands. Zoospores of two different sizes are produced ; but no evidence
of conjugation could be obtained.

Fungi.

Sexual Reproduction in Fungi.§ — Prof. P. A. Dangeard reviews the
present state of our knowledge respecting a sexual mode of reproduction
among tho higher Fungi. He asserts that there occurs a fusion of
gametes which has all the essential characters of a sexual process in
animals or plants, and which involves the necessity of a chromatic
reduction. The nuclei of the gametes have a different origin, and their
union ensures karyogamic rejuvenescence. A rejuvenescence of the
cytoplasm does not, in the higher Cryptogams, accompany the forma-
tion of the ovum ; it takes place before or after by means of anastomoses
between the different hyphre of a thallus or between different individuals.
The double nucleus of the ovum is a nucleus of segmentation, which is
always the sole source of the nucha of new generations. The second fusion
in the phenomenon which has been called " deuterogamy " || is not a
distinct process.

Chinese Yeast and Amylomyees. IF — According to C. Wehracr, the
fermenting agent in Chinese yeast, a preparation used in Eastern Asia

* Hedwipia, xxxix. (1900) Beibl., pp. 139-41.
t Brr. Dontseh. But. Ues., xviii. (1900) pp. 331-5 (1 pi.),
t Bot. Gazette, xxx. (1900) pp. 100-12 (1 pi.).
§ Le Botaniste (Dansreard), vii. (1900) pp. 89-130.
|| Of. this Journal, 1901, p. 73.
i Centralbl. Bakt., Z"> Abt., vi. (1900) pp. 353-65 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 69

for the fermenting of rice, and made by Calmette the type of an inde-
pendent genus Amylomyces, is a true JMacor, and is named by him
M. Iiouxii. It ferments levulose, dextrose, galactose, sucrose, lactose,
maltose, aud inulin, with production of alcohol. The structure, life-
history, and physiological properties are described in detail.

In another paper * the same author describes a hitherto unknown
species which also takes part in the fermentation of Chinese or Javanese
yeast, " ragi," and which he names Mucor javanicus.

Parasitism of the Ustilagineae.f — O. Brefeld contests the ordi-
nary view that the parasitism of the Ustilagineee is obligatory. He has
succeeded in growing several species of Ustilago quite independently of
the host-plant ; they thrive especially in the fasces of domestic animals,
a point of very great importance in the spread of smut and the other
diseases to which they give rise in cereal crops. The author succeeded
also in developing these fungi in artificial nutrient solutions.

In the case of most cereals there is only one period in which they
arc liable to the attacks of these parasites, viz. the earliest stages of
germination of the seedling, when the tissues are very soft ; after that
they are exempt ; but, having once entered, the fungus reaches the
growing point and destroys the inflorescence. The maize-smut, Ustilago
maydis, exhibits somewhat different properties from those of other
species, since it attacks not only young, but also mature plants.

The author further determined by experiment that the spread of
smut is due to the power not only of the conids but also of the ustilago-
spores (smut-spores) of germinating and multiplying rapidly outside the
host-plant.

Mycosyrinx4 — Prof. O. Penzig has had the opportunity of studying
JUycosyrinx Cissi, a parasitic fungus belonging to the Ustilagineae, whicli
attacks exclusively the flower-stalks of several species of Cissus in various
tropical countries. It there forms fungus-galls or mycocecidia imbedded
in the tissue of the peduncle, where it produces its spores ; the spori-
genous stroma being formed in a perfectly closed cavity. Another
species, M. arabica, is also parasitic on the pedicels and petioles of
species of Cissus in Arabia, likewise forming imbedded mycocecidia.

Sexual Reproduction in Pyronema and the Morphology of the
Ascocarp. § — After a review of the researches and theories of other
authorities on the development and homology of the ascocarp in tho
Ascomycetes, Prof. R. A. Harper describes in great detail his own
observation on Pyronema confluens ; the sexual reproductive apparatus
in this genus being the largest and most conspicuous yet discovered in
the Ascomycetes. No trace of non-sexual reproduction by conids or
otherwise was detected.

The sexual nuclei of both antherid and oogone are relatively large,
and are very clearly defined in their structure ; they contain a very
small spherical nucleole. In order for impregnation to be effected, two
processes are necessary. In addition to the fusion between the tip of

* Tom. cit., pp. 610-9 (1 pi.).

t J.B. Schles. Ges. Vaterl. Cultur, 1900, Zool.-Bot. Sect., pp. 17-32.

J Malpighia, xiii. (1900) pp. 522-32 (2 pl.s.).

§ Aim. of Bot., xiv. (1900) pp. 321-400 (3 pis.).

70 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the antherid and the conjugating tube, the breaking down of a second
wall at the base of the conjugating tube between it and the oogone is
necessary. To effect this, a circular disk of the walls is entirely dis-
solved, leaving a roundish pore through which the protoplasm of the
two cells becomes perfectly continuous. The nuclei of the connecting-
tube become completely disorganised before those of the antherid migrate-
through this pore. The only true act of impregnation is the fusion of
these nuclei with those of the oogone. The cytoplasm of the antherid
takes no part in the process. There may be as many as 200 nuclei in
each of the sexual cells, and they are quite indistinguishable from one
another. They conjugate in pairs, no further fusion taking place. The
development of the fertilised oogone or ascogone is described in detail.
The phenomena of nuclear division and spore-formation in Pyronema
do not differ in their general features from that which is known in other
ascomycetous fungi.

We have, therefore, in Pyronema a true process of sexual impregna-
tion homologous to that which occurs in Cystopus, GEdogonium, Jsemalion?
and Batrachospermum ; and a very striking analogy is presented with
the corresponding process in the Florideas, and with that in lichens.

New Genera of Fungi.— In an account of the Ascomycetes of the
first Regnell Expedition to Brazil, K. Starbiick * describes the following
new genera : —

Nostocotheca (Plectasciriepe). Perithecia nulla ; glomeruli hyphis
fasciculatis ramosis ascos obtegentibus compositi ; asci depressione
discreti velut in disco gelatinoso involuti videntur (an capsula gelati-
nosa primo inclusi) ; sporidia hyalophragmia, sepimento uno alterove
etiam longitudinaliter divisa,

Opliiomeliola (Plectascineai). Sporidiis filiformibus a Meliola et
aliis proximis dignoscendum.

Ijuhya (Hypocreales). Perithecia textura vitreo-menibranacea,.
hyphis vix visibilibus composita, discoidea-cylindracea, centro ore niinu-
tissimo, periphysibus cincto, pertuso, pilis rigidis hyalinis, membrana
crassissima, centrum versus ercctis, simplicibus, brevibus. marginem
versus planiter currentibus, fasciculatim conglutinatis, longissimis
radiantibus obsessa ; sporidia uniseptata, hyalina.

Malmeomyces (Hypocreales). Perithecia corneo-membranacea, plane
astoma, moxcollabesceudo-cupulata, setis parcis rigidis vestita, ochracea ;.
sporidia 4-guttulata, denique septata.

Actiniopsis (Sphasriales). Perithecia superficialia, discoidea v. tur-
binato-discoidea, dirca ostiolum centtale discum nudum praastantia, ad
marginem pilis fasciculatis coronata ; sporidia fusoideav. fere filiformia,
hyalina, multiseptata ; textura carneo-coriacea.

In a collection of Pungi (Discomycetes) mado by Ulc in Brazil,
H. Rehm f finds the following new genera: —

Physmatomyces (Bulgariacese). Apothecia in stromatibus lenti-
formibus crasse contextis gelatinosis innata, globosa, creberrima, dein
emergentia et discoidea ; asci clavati, octospori ; sporidia fusoidea,
unicellularia, hyalina ; paraphyses filiformes.

* Bih. k. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Hand]., xxv. Afd. 3, No. 1, CS pp., 2 pis.
t Hedwigia. xxxix. (1900) pp. 209-20 (;> figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 71

Psorotheciopsts (Mollisieaj). Apotliecia patellaria, in mycclio tcuuis-
simo hyalino sessilia, excipulo subhyalino gonidiis destituto praodita,
ceracea; asci oblougo-ovodei, unispori ; sporidia magna, 1-2-scptata,
liyaliua; paraphyses subraniosae.

M. Raciborski * describes four new genera of parasitic fuugi from
Java, viz.: — Elsinoe g. n. belonging to tbe Ascomycetes, near to Magnu-
siclla ; Telimena g. n. placed in tbe Pyrenomycetes ; Aldona g. n., Dis-
comycetes (A. stclla nigra forms beautiful large black radiating spots
on leaves of Pterocarpus) ; Hemileiopsis g. n., belonging to Urcdineae, on
leaves of Strophanihus.

F. Tassi t describes a new genus of Sphaaropside®, Barfalinia g. n.,
nearly related to JEtobillarda, and belonging to tbe section Trichosporae,
with tbe following diagnosis: — Peritbecia globosa-depressa, poro cen-
trali pertusa, prinio epidermide velata, dein erumpeutia, membranacca ;
sporulas oblongas, 4-septataa, cbloriuo-byalina3, apice setulas ternas
byalinas gcrentes, basidiis filiformibus brevibns suffultas.

In an account of the Hypogaei of Sicily and Sardinia, Prof. 0.
Mattirulo + describes a new genus Martellia, belonging to the Hymeno-
gastreaa. Tbe following is tbe diagnosis of tbe genus, or of tbe single
species M. mistiformis sp. n. : — Fungus hypogaeus v. paene hypogseus,
globosus, plerumquo irregularis, avellanae circiter magnitudine ; peri-
dium la?,vc, facile sccedens ; integumentum ex bypbis filamentosis ;
moles interior carnosa, eximie cellulosa; septa loculos limitantia sine
ordinc proprio disposita ; bymenium basidiis stipitatis brevibus vestitum;
quae ex inferioribus stratis pseudopareucbymatibus subhymenialibus
oriuntur; sporae ex sterigmatibus tenuissimis longiusculis orientes,
sphosricae v. subsphaaricaa, leviter ellipticae, colore umbrino, leviter
echinatae.

From Borneo, Dr. L. Petri § describes two new species of Gastero-
mycetes, viz. : —

Clathrogaster. Fungus hypogaeus, irregularis v. rotundatus, radi-
catus, basi excavata instructus, peridio tenui, sericeo, toto v. partim reti-
culatim sulcato, volva plus minus crassa, gelatinosa, a parietibus nee
gelatinosis transjecta, gleba cellulosa spongiosa, lacunis rotundatis v.
gyrosis ; uterus et mycelium praeditum hyphis vascularibus, crassis,
longissimis ; basidia collulis sterilibus emersa, subcylindrica ; sporae
sphasricae intcrrupte cristatae, in basidii apice sterigmatibus brevibu*
suffultae.

Caloderma. Fungus epigaaus, rotundatus, substipitatus, peridio
crasso, coriaceo, irregulariter dehisceute, corticc initio verrucoso-aculeato,
demum subuudo, substantia interiori in loculos farctos permultosque
divisa, septis albidis reticulatim dispositis iuterstructa, singulis loculis
venis minoribus transjectis, basi sterili ; puis fructifera e filamentis
densissime implexis, apice basidia et cystidia constautibus ; sporae sphaa-
ricae, umbrinae, echinatae v. ciliatae, in basidiis latere sterigmatibus longis-
simis suffulta2.

* Tarasilischc Algen u. Pilzc Java's, l ler Th. (Batavia, 1000). See Bot. Cen-
tralbl., Ixxxiv. (1900) p. 48.

t Bull. Lab. But. Siena, iii. (1900) pp. 1-3 (1 pi.). See Bot. Centralbl.. lxxxiv.
(1900) p. 51. * Malpighia, xiv. (1900) pp. 78-S2 (4 tigs.).

§ Tom. cit., pp. 111-39 (3 pis.).

72 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Erysiphacese. — E. S. Salmon points out * that in our present know-
ledge of the life-history of this group of Fungi two great gaps exist : —
in the first place we do not know in what way every spring the asco-
spores give rise to the conidial or oidium-stagc ; and secondly, we do
not know to what extent each form of mildew is limited in its choice
of host-plants, and whether the same species, on different host-plants,
may not exhibit slight morphological characters correlated with its
occurrence on those plants.

In a monograph of the order,f the same author describes 49 species,
in addition to a number of well-marked varieties, arranged in six
genera, — Podosphsera, Sphserotheca, Uncinula, Microsphsera, Erysiplte,
and Phyll actinia. He regards the ascus as the result of a true sexual
process, and does not support Dangeard's view that the fusion of the
nuclei in the young ascus is of sexual signification. Too much signifi-
cance must not be attached to the presence of appendages to the peri-
theccs. The memoir is accompanied by a very copious bibliography.

Isaria arbuscula. j — J. Beauverie and C. Vaney give a description
of this fungus, parasitic on the larva of a Mexican cricket. The fungus
is characterised by its gigantic size as compared with the animal at-
tacked, reaching a height of b' cm. The fungus perforates the chitinous
coat of the insect, and forms a mycelial stroma in the tissues of the
host, finally completely destroying them and filling up the chitinous
-envelope.

Parasitic Fungi. — In a collection of Fungi from Japan, E. S. Salmon §
finds a new species of Uncinula (Erysipheae) parasitic on Qucrcus glan-
duli f era, which he names U. septata.

Under the name Oidium (jitri Aurantii, Dr. T. Ferraris || describes
a new parasitic fungus belonging to the Hyphomycetes, which is very
destructive to the orange crop in Italy.

On the leaves of Euoiiymus japonicus, Prcf. G. Arcangeli % finds a
new species of Cicinnobolus, to which he gives the name C. Euonymi
japonici ; it is parasitic on the hyphae of another fungus, a form of
Oidium leucoconium.

R. Aderhold ** has found the ascoform of Cercospora cerasclla, a
j)arasitic fungus which forms brown spots on the leaves of cherry trees,
and determines it to belong to the genus Nycopplistrella, naming the
species M. cerasclla sp. n.

Expressed Yeast-cell Plasma. — Dr. A. Macfadyen, Dr. G. H. Morris,
and S. .Rowland ff summarise the results obtained by them as follows.
The top yeast of English breweries yields, by suitable treatment, a cell-
juice which possesses the transient power of decomposing sugar into
alcohol and carbonic acid. The amount of gas formed by an active
juice is as great as or even greater than that found by E. Buchner.

* Journ. Quek. Micr. Club, vii. (1900) pp. 411-2.

t Mem. Torrey Bot. Club, ix. (1900) 292 pp. and 9 pis.

X Ann. tSoc. Linn. Lyon, xlvi. (1900) pp. 79-80.

§ Journ. Bot., xxxviii. (1900) pp. 426-7 (0 figs.).

j| Malpighia, xiii. (1900) pp. 368-81 (1 pi.).

4 Atti Soc. Tosc. Sci. Nat. (Proc. Verb.), xii. (1900) pp. 108-10.
** Ber. Dcutsch. Bot. Ges., xviii. (1900) pp. 24G-9.
tf Proc. Roy. Soc, lxvii. (1900) pp. 250-00.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 73

The cell-juice prepared by the authors undergoes a very considerable
auto-fermentation, in some instances exceeding that given by a mixture
of the same juice and cane-sugar. A dilution of 1-2 with water or
physiological salt solution practically stops all fermentative activity.
Only with a very active cell-juice does the ratio between the alcohol
and carbon dioxide formed approximate to that found in ordiuary alco-
holic fermentation. When the cell-juice is allowed to act on sugar —
•either cane-sugar or dextrose — the quantity of sugar which disappears
is considerably in excess of that which can be accounted for by the
production of carbon dioxide and alcohol. These results appear to lead
in the direction not of an enzyme explanation of the process, but rather
of a theory which refers the phenomenon to the vital activity of the
yeast-cell protoplasm.

In connection with the foregoing, Prof. J. R. Green * ventures to
disagree with the conclusion that the yeast-juice exhibits the vital
activity of the yeast-cell protoplasm ; for he has found that an active
preparation could be obtained by grinding the yeast with kieselguhr in
such proportion that a perfectly dry impalpable powder resulted, and
then extracting the latter with a solution of cane-sugar. It is hardly
credible that protoplasm without the protection of cell-walls can resist
desiccation. The action of the extract was considerable in the presence
of antiseptics which, in the proportions used, were inevitably and rapidly
fatal to the life of protoplasm.

Rabenhorst's Cryptogamic Flora of Germany, &c. (Fungi Imper-
fecti).f — Volume I. of this important work by A. Allescher is now
complete with the publication of two more parts, 73 and 74. The large
genus Bhabdospora comprises altogether 142 species. It is followed by
the comparatively small genera Collonema (4 sp.), Tricltoseptoria (1 sp.),
Phleospora (10 sp.), Phlyctaena (15 sp.), Sphserograplrium (4 sp.), Corna-
laria (4 sp.), Eriospora (1 sp.), Dilophospora (1 sp.), Septoriella (1 sp.),
Cytosporina (24 sp.), Micula (2 sp.), and Micropera (11 sp.). The next
section, the Hyalophragmia?, is characterised by its elongated or fusiform
spores with two or more septa, hyaline or nearly so, and is made up of
three genera, Stagonospora with 78, Blastomyces with 2, and Kellermania
with 1 species.

Dictyophora Ravenelii4 — C. S. Scofield gives an account of the
structure and development of this fungus belonging to the Pkalloideae,
and a somewhat aberrant member of the genus. The points which he
regards as of special interest are these. The mycele of the plant is of
considerable structural importance. There are borne upon it certain
organs which seem to function as storage places for reserve material.
There is, in the young mycelial threads, very good evidence of the
occurrence of cell-fusion previous to, or in intimate connection with,
the formation of the sporophore. The indusium cannot be considered
as homologous with the indusium of normal members of the genus
Dictyophora, but is rather the persistent remnant of tissue which is
completely broken down in most other plants of the order.

* Nature, lxiii. (1900) p. 106.

t Leipzig. 1901, 1016 and viii. pp. and numerous figs. Cf. this Journal, 1900,
p. 620. X Minnesota Hot. Studies, 2nd ser., 1900, pp. 523-36 (3 pis.).

74 SUMMAEY OF CUEEENT EESEAECHES RELATING TO

Mycetozoa.

Mycetozoic Infection of the Cornea.* — Dr. C. Gorini inoculated
the cornea of rabbits with Plasmudiophora Brassiae. This infection
was followed by tumour formation and ulceration. Very similar appear-
ances result from vaccinia infection of the cornea, but in the latter case
the corneal epithelium is chiefly involved, while in the former it is the
proliferation of the connective-tissue elements which causes the swelling.
The infection maybe transferred from rabbit to rabbit, and infected cab-
bage, preserved in glycerin, will retain its activity for sis weeks.

Protophyta.
/8. Schizomycetes.

Colourable Granules in the Bacterial Cell.f — Under the imposing
title of morphological researches on the biology of bacteria, H. Marx
and F. Woithe record at considerable length their impressions of the
colourable granules in the bacterial cell. They find that these " Babes-
Ernst " granules are associated with the life-history of the species, and
are to be regarded as evidence of the highest importance of the vital
development of the species. The paper is illustrated by some coloured
drawings showing the effect of single and double staining. The pre-
parations were stained with methylen-blue (Loeffler, alcoholic, and acetic
acid) and afterwards with aqueous solution of Bismarck-brown.

Occurrence of Acid-resisting Bacilli in the Lower Animals, i. —
Dr. D. M. Cowie has found acid-resisting bacilli in many of the lower
animals, more especially the horse, cow, dog, guinea-pig, and white rat.
No such organisms were detected in the rabbit and in the cat. Many
of these acid-resisting bacilli resemble the tubercle bacillus of the
smegma bacillus of man. These bacteria are undoubtedly of different
species, and there seems reason to believe that the term smegma bacillus
denotes not a definite species but rather a group of bacilli having common
staining properties.

New Pathogenic Streptothrix § — Prof. Aoyama and Prof. Miyamoto
isolated from a case of pneumonitis characterised by lobar consolidation
and excavation a streptothrix, which was easily stainable by ordinary
dyes, by Gram's method, and by the tubercle bacillus stain. Cover-glass
preparations showed typical branched filaments, and these were also
present in micro-sections of the lungs. The organism was cultivated
on the ordinary media and also in sterilised water. Positive results
were obtained by injecting guinea-pigs with pure cultures.

Two new Pyogenic Microbes. || — Dr. E. Klein found in the sero-
fibrinous exudate of the inflamed udder of a cow a bacterium designated
Streptococcus radiatus. Colonies on gelatin resemble small grey disks
with radiating processes ; on agar and blood-serum the growths are fairly
round with somewhat irregular border. Milk remains fluid and un-

» Atti Reale Accad. Lined, ix. (1900) pp. 319-20.

t Centralbl. Bakt., l t0 Abt,, xxviii. (I9<i0) pp. 1-11, 33-9, 65-9, 97-111 (IS figs.).
j Journ. Kxperim. Med., v. (1900) pp. 205-14.

§ Mittheil. Med. l-'acult. Kaiserl.-Japau. Univ. Tokio, iv. (1900) pp. 2:51 -76
(3 pis. and IS figs.).

|| Centralbl. Bakt., 1" Abt., xxviii. (1900) pp. 417-9.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 75

changed, though good growth takes place at the bottom. Litmus milk
is reddened in 24 to 48 hours. In all media the microbe forms long
chains, which in fluid cultures are wound up into skeins and bulls.
The diameter of the coccus varies from • 6 to • 8 /x. It stains well by
Gram's method. It quickly dies, so that it must be resown within the
week. It lasts longest in gelatin.

Bacterium diphtherioides. This microbe was isolated from the
purulent secretion from a cow's udder. It has the following cultural
characters. It grows badly or not at all on gelatin, agar, and bouillon ;
grows well in milk at 37°, which is coagulated and acidified. It grows
best on blood-serum, which is slowly liquefied. At 37^ the colonies are
small, white, and roundish by the second or third day, and by transmitted
light are yellowish-brown and granular. Taken from serum cultures,,
the majority of the microbes are oval or spherical and show a central
deeply staining granule. The minority are club-shaped or transitional.
B. diphtherioides stains well with the ordinary anilin dyes, and especially
so by Gram's method. Intraperitoneal and subcutaneous injections into
guinea-pigs were followed by suppuration. Cultures require to be re-
sown within a week, the serum cultures retaining their vitality longest.

Bacterial Flora of American Cheddar Cheese.* — Mr. J. Weinzirl,
who in conjunction with Prof. H. L. Russell had found previously
that the lactic acid bacteria predominated in American cheese, and that
the casein digesting forms were relatively few or absent, now records
experiments relative to the constancy and distribution of the bacterial
flora in American cheese. These experiments show that the lactic acid
producing group of bacteria is constantly present, though their exact
function cannot at present be positively stated. It seems probable
that they exei t considerable influence on the flavour of cheese.

It is specially noted that when in small numbers B. acidi lactici
produces no untoward effects, but when it predominates it causes the
swelling or " huffing " of the cheese, which is highly detrimental to the
product.

Bacillus microbutyricus.f — Dr. F. E. Hellstroni isolated from butter
a bacillus which he has named B. microbutyricus. The microbe is 1*2-
1-3 jx long and 0-2-0-3 /x thick. It is a straight rodlet with rounded
ends, and is quite motionless. On gelatin the growth is slow and of a
yellowish hue. The colonies are small and discrete, and the medium is
not liquefied. On agar the growth is quicker and the appearances are
very similar. In bouillon a bottom growth occurs, the sediment being
slimy and greyish-yellow. Glucose bouillon is slowly acidified without
gas formation. Milk is not coagulated, but the casein is after a time
gradually peptonised. Ou potato the growth is fairly rapid and of a
yellow colour. The bacillus is not pathogenic to mice, guinea-pigs, or
rabbits. It is stainable only with alcoholic solutions and not by Gram's
method. It grows better with than without oxygen. Spore-formation
was not observed.

Koumiss Bacillus.:}: — Dr. D. Schipin isolated the Koumiss bacillus
in gelatin under anaerobic conditions. The colonies are whitish, and

* Centralbl. Bakt, 2" Abt, vi. (1900) pp. 785-01. Cf. this Journal. 1897,
P- 571. t Turn. cit.. pp. (JS3-4 (1 fig.). ; Tom. cut., pp. 775-7.

76 SUMMARY OF QUERENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

resemble a central body with radiating processes. Tbe bacillus thrives
best on acid-sugar gelatin, though it grows pretty well on ordinary
alkaline gelatin. The gelatin is not liquefied. It does not do well on
agar or blood-serum. At room temperature cow's milk is not coagu-
lated, but clots at 37° to a thick soupy consistence, and in both cases
with free access of air. The optimum temperature is between 20° and
30° C. It is killed in 10 minutes at 60°. It developes gas (C0. 2 ) in
mare's milk. Spore-formation was not observed. It is easily stained,
and is not decolorised by Gram's method. From cultivations in mare's
milk, the author concluded that the Koumiss bacillus decomposes milk-
sugar, jn-oducing lactic acid and alcohol, and that it is able to peptonise
albumen.

Microbe of Stringy Bread. * — Dr. J. Thomann isolated from two
kinds of flour — mixtures of wheat and rye meal — a mesentericus-like
bacillus, pure cultures of which made normal bread stringy. The
bacillus is a long, thin rodlet, often forming filaments ; it is motile, and
forms oval spores ; it is easily stainable, and also by Gram's method ; it
liquefies gelatin, and is cultivable also on agar and potato, in grape-sugar,
and in pepton bouillon ; it grows better at incubation than at room
temperature. It is probably identical with the organism described by
Vogel under the name of B. mesentericus panis viscosi it.

Tubercle Bacilli in Frogs.t — Prof. O. Lubarsch discusses the state-
ments relative to the effect of tubercle bacilli on frogs made by Siou,^:
and expresses his own views as follows : — When tubercle bacilli are
introduced into a lymph-space of a frog, they are regularly transported
to the internal organs, and are there demonstrable even after weeks and
months. At the inoculation site it is not uncommon to find granu-
lations formed around the small collection of fungi so as to resemble
the histological picture of a tubercle, while in the internal organs there
is little or no tissue proliferation. The tubercle bacilli, after a 6tay of
a week or so in the internal org-ans, are no longer able to excite tuber-
culosis in a guinea-pig, and this loss of virulence is proportionate to the
original virulence of the inoculated fungus.

iEtiology of Tropical Dysentery.§— Prof. S. Flexner, who had the
opportunity of studying tropical disease occurring in the Philippine
Islands, states that there are two distinct types of bacteria in dysentery.
Type i. is abundant in acute cases. It is about the same size as B. coli
communis ; it grows well on all media at room temperature, but better
in the thermostat ; it is motile, and does not stain by Gram's method ;
gelatin is not liquefied ; it does not produce gas ; indol is not always
formed ; it is pathogenic to ordinary laboratory animals. Type ii. is
present in all instances, though in acute cases it may be less numerous
than type i. It has the characters of the B. coli group, and differs from
the preceding type by the formation of acid and of gas, and the amount
of indol produced. Observations were also made as to the presence of
amoebae. These were commonly present, though in variable numbers, in
the chronic cases. The author concludes that tropical dysentery con-

* Centralbl. Bakt., 2" Abt., vi. (1900) pp. 740-2.

t Op. cit., V Abt., xxviii. (1900) pp. 421-30.

X Cf. this Journal, 1900, p. 628.

§ Centralbl. Bakt., 1" Abt., xxviii. (1900) pp. G25-31.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 77

sists of a bacillary and probably an amoebic form ; tbat tbo bacillary
form occurs as an acute anil a cbronic disorder, aud tbat the cause of
the bacillary disease agrees in its morphological cultural characters
and pathogenic properties with the bacillus isolated by Shiga in
Japan.*

Changes in Anthrax in Decomposing Blood, f — E. Berndt kept
blood of cattle dead of anthrax in a dark cool place, and examined
samples thereof daily by both Klett's and Olt's staining methods. Up
to the thirteenth day the preparations showed well-marked anthrax
bacilli. The decay of these bacteria appears to start in the central
parts, the blue staining segments becoming insensitive to pigments and
granular, while the external portion or sheath retains its staining
properties longer.

Immunisation of Anthrax against Rat Serum. % — J. Danyi?z, who
has conducted experiments with anthrax and rat serum, finds that
this serum does not contain a bacteriolytic diastase, but merely a sub-
stance analogous to au antiseptic which fixes ou the bacterium, and
while, on the one hand, it paralyses the functions of assimilation and
growth, on the other it favours the secretion and digestive action of a
diastase secreted by the microbe itself. Against the action of the
noxious substance in rat serum the microbe defends itself by the forma-
tion of a mucilaginous sheath which fixes this substance outside the
body of the microbe. The immunisation of the bacterium against this
substance does not render it individually moro resistant to auto-diges-
tion, but simply allows it to nourish itself and give new cultures before
it is digested. Rat serum freed from its antiseptic forms a good culture
medium, and this explains why, under certain conditions, a mixture rich
in serum will give a culture more abundant than a mixture containing
a less proportion of serum. The author then passes on to discuss the
immunisation of anthrax to arsenic, and shows that there is a great
analogy between the mechanism of the action of arsenious a^id and
that of rat serum, and that the mechanism of immunisation is identical
in the two cases.

Feeding Animals on Food Contaminated with Anthrax Spores.§ —
Dr. Nikolsky fed animals (rabbits, rats, guinea-pigs, mice) on food con-
taminated with anthrax spores, and found that the disease developed
just as easily as from other methods of infection. The spores developed
in the intestines, notwithstanding the competition and autagonism (if
the intestinal microbes. They penetrated the mucosa and passed into
the lymphatic and blood-vessels.

Loss of Liquefactive Power of Anthrax.|| — Dr. T. Matzuschita,
after referring to the variability of certain functions in bacteria, and
more especially the loss of their power to liquefy gelatin, stat' s that
Bacillus anthracis may be affected in this way. By cultivating for
about 18 months in 10 p.c. gelatin at room temperature, and with occa-
sional transferences, be has obtained cultures which only begin to liquify
gelatin after about 50 days, though their other properties (morphological

* Cf. this Journal, 1899, p. 72.

t Centralbl. Bakt., 1" Abt., xxviii. (1900) pp. 018-51 (1 pi.).

j Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xiv. (1900) pp. 641-55. § Tom. cit., pp. 791-01.

|| Centralbl. Bakt, 1" Abt., xxviii. (1900) pp. 303-4.

78 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

and pathogenic) were retained in full. Passage through an animal did
not restore the liquefying power, though it could be regained by culti-
vating on agar at 37°.

Structural Division of the Endoplasm in Plague Bacilli.* — A. A.
Merlin draws attention to certain exceedingly minute internal struc-
tural details within the stained forms of the plague and other bacilli
which point to the existence of a regular subdivision or partition of
their cell contents. In the round forms the division of the contents is
quadripartite, so that the interior appears to show beams arranged more
or less crosswise, while in the elongated forms there is a longitudinal
partition with numerous transverse septa. In many micrococci a pro-
tuberant boss or kuob is a common feature, and when present appears
to be invariably situated on the line of one of the internal divisional
partitions ; the flagellum, when observable, having its point of attach-
ment so placed.

Relations of the Coli Bacillus to Plague and Yellow Fever, t —
Dr. P. Caldas has arrived at the conclusion that the plague is a coli-
bacillosis of the rat excited by the ingestion of rice containing a mould
fungus (Aspergillus nigcr), and that the coli bacillus, by transference
from rat to rat, finally assumes properties which are pathogenic to man.

The same author had previously expressed the conviction that li.
icleroides is a variety of the coli bacillus which acquires its virulence
from contact with a pyogenic microbe and in presence of a mould.

Chemical Nature of Tetanus Toxin. t — Dr. H. Hayashi, who has
made researches as to the chemical nature of tetanus toxin, expresses
the opinion that this poison is an albnmose. This conclusion is arrived
at in consequence of the behaviour of the toxin with salts of zinc.

Bactericidal and Agglutinative Properties of Pyocyaneus Serum. §
— The results of Dr. P. Midler's researches may be summed up as fol-
lows. The bactericidal power of normal guinea-pig serum is no greater
in the absence than in the presence of oxygen. While non-virulent
bacilli are affected to no inconsiderable extent by normal serum, viru-
lent bacilli may, after a transitory impairment of growth, thrive therein.
Pyocyaneus serum has, under aerobic conditions, no greater bactericidal
power over virulent pyocyaneus bacilli than normal serum. But in the
absence of oxygen the 6erum discloses energetic germicidal properties.
One hour's heating to 55° destroys this anaerobic germicidal power, but
it may be restored by the addition of normal serum. No agglutinating
substances exist in pyocyaneus bouillon cultures. The agglutinins of
the immunising serum are therefore formed in the body.

Bacterium pneumoniae caviarum. || — Dr. F. Strada and Dr. R.
Traina describe a new form of infectious lung disease in guinea-pirrs.
From the inflamed tissues was isolated an oval microbe, easily stained,
but quickly decolorised by alcohol. In hanging drops lively move-
ments were observed ; it is cultivable on the usual media, the optimum

* Joiirn. Quek. Micr. Club, vii. (1000) rp . 387-90 (11 figs.).

t C.R. Soc. dc Biol., lii. (1900) pp. 953-5.

J Mitth. Med. Fucult. Kaiserl.-Japan. Univ. Tokio, iv. (1900) pp. 341-62

§ Centralbl. Bakt., l te Abt., xxviii. (1900) pp. 577-87.

II Tom. cit., pp. 635-48.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 79

temperature being 34°-37° C. It is an essential aerobe, and does not
liquefy gelatin. The growth on most media is yellowish ; old cultures
exhale a disagreeable odour ; gas and indol are not produced ; experi-
ments on guinea-pigs with pure cultures reproduced the disease. The
post-mortem appearances varied with the duration of the disease and
with the method of infection. Positive results were obtained by
spraying the trachea, by injecting the bacteria into the thorax and into
the circulation. Subcutaneous injections were however followed by
abscess and recovery. Injections of filtrates of bouillon cultures gave
negative results. In general terms it may be said that B. pneumoniae
caviarum excites a pneumonitis with a focal or lobular distribution.

Diphtheria in Horses.* — Dr. L. Cobbett expresses the opinion that
horses are probably peculiarly liable to diphtheria, and hence may have
no inconsiderable share in the dissemination of this disorder. This
idea receives confirmation from the well-known sensitiveness of some
of these animals to the action of the diphtherial poison. The author's
view was derived from finding the diphtheria bacillus in the nasal dis-
charge of a pony. An exhaustive examination of the characters and
toxins of the bacillus conclusively proved its diphtherial nature, and led
to the examination of other horses, in order to test if antitoxin were
present in their blood. Out of 13 animals, in 9 the antitoxin was found
to be present. From this the author infers that such animals had ac-
quired the disease naturally.

Streptococcus decolorised by Gram's Method, f — J. Cottet and
H. Tissier isolated from cases of purulent cystitis and diarrhoea a
streptococcus which is decolorised by Gram's method. With the
ordinary anilin dyes it stains easily. The diameter of the coccus does
not exceed 0*5 /x. It grows under aerobic and anaerobic conditions, and
was cultivated on agar, gelatin, in bouillon and milk. No growth was
•observed on potato. Only a few streptococci which are decolorised
by Gram's method have been described, and the authors allude to four
only, from which theirs is distinctly different.

Action of Anthrax on Carbohydrates. } — Mdlie. Napias has found
that anthrax easily attacks amylaceous and saccharine substances ; at the
expense of each it forms a fixed acid (lactic) and a volatile acid (acetic).
When the carbohydrate nutriment becomes scanty (sugar) or difficult
to attack (starch), the bacterium attacks the lactic acid which has been
formed, and consumes it in two stages : it leaves as residue some acetic
acid which is destroyed later, so that all the carbon of the original
carbohydrate substance is converted into carbonic acid. The bacterium
and the vaccines derived from it behave inversely, in regard to their
proteolytic and amylolytic properties; the proteolytic properties pre-
dominate in the virulent species, and the amylolytic in the attenuated.

Effect of Acid-resisting Bacteria of the Tubercle Group on

Animals. § — Dr. G. Mayer's experiments with acid-resisting bacteria of

erele group were made by infecting cultures rubbed up with

* Centralbl. Bakt, 1" Abt, xxviii. (1000) pp. 631-4.

t C.R. Soc. de Biol., Hi. (1900) pp. 627-8.

% Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xiv. (1900) pp. '232-47.

§ Centralbl. Bakt., l'» Abt., xxvi. (1899) pp. 321-36 (;j figs.).

80 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

butter into the peritoneal sac of guinea-pigs and rabbits. A plastic
peritonitis resulted which would ultimately fibrify or degenerate. The
bacteria which were included in the exudation might continue to grow, and
then their increaso appeared to give rise to a proliferative tissue reaction,
whereby nodules were produced. These nodules either fibrosed or
caseated. The virus did not become generalised, and was confined to the
peritoneal sac.

iEtiology of Dysentery.* — Prof. Escherich confirms the occurrence
of the serum reaction in cases of dysentery noted by Shiga,"]" and is
inclined to think that Bacillus coli communis is the probable cause of the
disease.

* Centralbl. Balrt., l te Abt., xxvi. (1S99) pp. 385-9.
t Cf. this Journal, 1899, p. 72.

He£s-»-»-

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOTY, ETC.

81

MICROSCOPY.
A. Instruments. Accessories, &c*
CI) Stands.

Le Chatelier's Microscope for Examination of Opaque Bodies.f—
The inverted position of the stage in this Microscope facilitates the
arrangement of fragments of metal, which may then, with the excep-
tion of the polished surface, be of any shape. The horizontal pencil
of light received by the illuminating prism D (fig. 1) is refracted up-
ward and taken up by that half of the objective which is covered by J).
The two faces of the prism make an angle of 45°, one of them forming

Fig. 1.

an angle of 22*5° with a horizontal line, the other a similar angle with
a vertical line, which causes the axis of the reflected pencil to be vertical.
The extreme edge of the prism intersects the axis of the objective and
also its principal focus, or, at least, comes as near doing so as possible.
The diaphragm E, placed at the conjugate focus of the object examined,
and the screen F with its rectangular opening, provide a means for
cutting off all the useless rays, whose diffusion by the lenses of the
objective would otherwise illuminate the field of the Microscope and
diminish the visibility of the images. To reach this result, the dia-
phragm E must have an opening exactly equal to the diameter of the

* This subdivision contains (1) Stands; (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives; (3) Illu-
minating and other Apparatus; (4) Photomicrography; (5) Microscopical Optics
and Manipulation ; (6) Miscellaneous.

t Metallographist, Jan. 1898, pp. 83-4 (1 fig.).

Feb. 20th, 1901 G

82

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

image of the useful portion of the object under examination ; and the
opening of the screen F a height equal to half the dimensions of the
image of the upper lens of the objective.

A is the object examined ; C the eye-piece.

Gilbertson's Microscope. — This old non-achromatic Microscope,
kindly lent for exhibition by Mr. H. E. Freeman, and since presented
to the Society, was made by H. Gilbertson, of London ; the date of its
manufacture, however, has not been determined. The instrument was
evidently designed for use in the field, for on reference to fig. 2, drawn
by Mr. Parsons, it will be seen that it is essentially a hand Microscope,
without either stand or stage, but in place of the latter there is a com-
pressorium, or live-box, fitted to the end of a tube which slides over the
body-tube of the Microscope ; this sliding tube constituting its sole
focussing adjustment.

Fig. 2.

u

Jl

I

Fig. 3.

A lower power is obtained by removing the front lens of the objec-
tive ; the body has marks upon it indicating the position of the sliding
tube when either the high or low power is employed. There is one
drawback in the design of this instrument, and that rather a serious
one, viz. the only motion that can be given to the object is in the
direction of the line of sight for focussing; all other movements, such
as lateral motion in the field, are impossible. If the object, therefore, is
not placed with tolerablo accuracy in the centre of the compressorium,
it will not be visible in the field of the Microscope. Diameter of field
with high power, ^ in. Diameter of field with low power, A in.
Working distances, y,. and 1 T ^ in. respectively. Length with live-box
closed, 4^ in. Greatest diameter, 1 in.

Fig. 2 represents the arrangement with the tube drawn over the
instrument, indicated by the dotted lines ; fig. 3 the compressorium
detached from the Microscopo and the cap removed.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

83

Bausch and Lomb's Duplex Substage.* — To meet the need for a
substage attachment which s-hall lie simpler than the complete Abbe
substage, and yet embrace its principal advantages, Mr. E. Bausch has
constructed a modification designated as above. As shown in fig. 4, two
arms are movable up and down upon a metal post rigidly fixed to the
stage. The upper arm carries an iris diaphragm which may be used in
the plane of the stage or below it ; the lower heavier arm carries the
Abbe condenser with an iris diaphragm attached below. In addition to

Fig. 1.

si!*

J v:

jflimijijiinninnmiip^

ill!! »'''■-. ■

the firmness afforded by the rigidly fixed supporting post, a metal guide
passes through the arm of each ring, the result of which is to render
i he substage accessories, when in position, absolutely free from any
appreciable lateral movements, and to keep them throughout all vertical
movements in the optical axis of the Microscope.

The upper arm has a vertical movement sufficient to obtain the best
optical results from the iris diaphragm when this is used alone. The
lower arm, however, has a vertical movement the upper limit of which
brings the condenser into immersion contact with the object-slide ; from

* Journ. App. Micr., July 1900, pp. 933-4 (1 fig.).

G 2

84 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

which point it may be rapidly lowered free of the guide-post where it
may be swung to tbe left, completely out of the path of light from the
mirror. When in this position it may be again raised, the guide-post
passing through a second hole in the arm and preventing its accidental
displacement.

(3) Illuminating: and other Apparatus.

Ashe's Camera Lucida.* — D. J. Scourfield describes this accessory,
which has been lately slightly modified and thereby improved by its
inventor. As will be seen from fig. 5, Ashe's camera lucida is, in
essence, an improved form of Beale's neutral tint reflector, the most
important difference being that the light from the eye-piece, instead of

Fig. 5.

being received directly upon the neutral tint glass, is first of all received
upon a small mirror, which reflects the light down upon the neutral tint
and so up to the eye. By this means the light undergoes two reflections
before reaching the eye, and the most important defect of Beale's neutral
tint reflector, viz. the reversal of the top and bottom of the image with-
out a corresponding reversal of the sides, is corrected.

But by making the mirror and the neutral tint glass to rotate upon
two parallel pins, the inventor has succeeded in producing a camera
which can be used in any position of the Microscope. When the latter
is inclined at any angle between about 45° and the horizontal, the image
can be projected (only apparently, of course) vertically downwards on to
the table by a suitable adjustment of the relative positions of the mirror
and neutral tint glass. When the Microscope is vertical (and also when
inclined) the image can be projected to the side by rotating the camera
90° from its former position. The drawing paper must now be placed
on a board inclined at the proper angle, i.e. at right angles to the line
of sight. The correct placing of the board is easily determined by ob-
serving the outline of the image of the field. If this be a circle, the

* Journ. Quek. Micr. Club, 1900, pp. 413-0 (1 fig.)-

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICKOSCOPY, ETC.

85

board is correct. A sheet of paper with a series of concentric circles
drawn upon it will enable the question of the circular outline of the
field to be readily settled. Such a sheet of paper is also useful for
determining whether the line of sight is vertically downwards when the
camera is used to project the image upon the table.

If the camera is used not only with low-power, but also with
moderately high-power eye-pieces, the mirror must be so arranged that
its free end, when the mirror is inclined at about 45°, is as close as
possible to the eye-lens. This can only be done by making the mirror

Fig. G.

rather small and pivoting it to the front plate just above the central
opening in the latter. After several trials it was found that a small
cover-glass, say, about half-an-inch in diameter, silvered on one side
and cemented to a thin metal plate, gives excellent results, and seems
altogether the simplest and most suitable form of mirror for this
camera.

As regards the neutral tint glass, it is necessary to make it rather
large, because, owing to the adjustments which have to be made for
various inclinations of the Microscope, the light is not always reflected
from the same spot. Moreover, it is evidently essential that the whole

8G

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

image of the field, as seen on the drawing-paper, should be visible through
the neutral tint glass.

Lastly, the tube-fitting of the camera should bo made as long as
possible, thus allowing of the camera being moved closer to or farther
from the eye-piece, and enabling the best position to be obtained for
use with eye-pieces of different powers and fucal lengths.

Electric Focus Lamp for the Microscope. — Fig. G, on the foregoing
page, illustrates Edison and Swan Company's focus lamp recommended
by Mr. C. F. Rousselet for use with the Microscope, and described by
him in the number of this Journal for December 1900, p. 741. The lamp
should be of 8 candle-power, and mounted with the usual brass collar
terminal for use with the ordinary bayonet-joint holder, like the ordinary
electric lamp. Mr. Rousselet recommends that the standard to carry
the lamp should have an arm to move up and down, similar to the
ordinary Microscope lamp, and the arm a knuckle-joint in order to be
able to adjust the lamp in an upright or horizontal position, or at any
intermediate angle, as may bo desired. A second similar arm may bo
provided to carry a bull's-eye condenser.

Resolution of Striae.* — Dr. R. H. Ward, of Troy, N.Y., recommends
for the resolution of stria?, &c, the old method of obtaining oblique

light by the decentralisation of the substage
F in - '• condenser.

(4) Photomicrography.

Photography in Botany and in Horti-
culture, f — Messrs. Waugh and Macfarland
consider the importance of the camera as
second only to the Microscope for the bot-
anist ; while for the horticulturist they would
give it the first place.

The essentials are a vertical camera and
a horizontal shelf. Figs. 7 and 8 show two
modes of attaining the result. The former
is in use at the Vermont Experiment Station,
and is more of an out-of-door form ; the
Litter is used at the Mount Pleasant Printery,
and is more intended for the studio.

The advantages are : (1) Nearly all
trouble in arranging the object is avoided, as
the specimen has merelv to be placed on the
shelf; in the case of a fruit which sometimes
does not readily assume stable equilibrium,
a rubber hose-washer forms a useful holder, and a supply of them should
be always at hand. (2) A sheet of paper of any tint can be placed under
the object so as to form any background desired. (3) Shadows arc
avoided. (4) The making of photographs exactly to the size is facili-
tated.

A photograph the same size as the object is most desirable ; to obtain

* Tians. Amer. Micr. Sac, 11)00. p. 111.

t Bot. Gazette, xxx. (1900) j>p. 204-C (2 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

87

tins a camera with considerable bellows extension is necessary, and the
lens must be midway between tbe object and the camera glass. The best
work will be possible with a wide-angle lens of rather short focil length.

Fig. S.

Extreme care and cleanliness arc urged ; dust is a great enemy in full-
size photography. It will generally be found necessary to arrange a
wire frame with velvet hood to cover the camera top so as to exclude
all reflections.

Penny, It. Greenwood — Photomicrographic Apparatus.

Amer. Mm. Mirr. Jonrn., Nov. 1890, pp. 310-4;
and English Mechanic and World of Science (reference not given)

(5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation.

Imitation of Polarised Light Effects by Diffraction.* — Mr. J.
Eheinberg, by inserting a straight-lined diffraction grating of 100 lines
per millimetre (about 2500 per inch) just above the objective, and focus-
sing down on a small piece of wire gauze (wires 0*5 mm. apart), produces
a series of brilliantly coloured results, which are strongly suggestive of
polarised light effects ; although, in reality, they are diffraction fringes.

* Joura. Quek. Micr. Club, 1900, pp. 407-10 (2 figs.).

88

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

As is well known, such a grating forms an uncoloured central image
of a bright line, flanked on each side by a number of spectra, violet
side inwards, red outwards. In the wire gauze each space between the
wires takes the place of the bright line, and forms its own white central
image in the proper place, with several broadened-out spectra on each
side. The spectra produced by a number of the spaces overlap and
produce composite colours. When these colours fall upon the bright
white imago of the interspaces, they produce no observable effect, being,
in fact, flooded out. Where, however, the bright colours fall upon the
dark image of the opaque wires, they readily manifest themselves. When
the wires are parallel to the lines of the diffraction grating (fig. 9, A),
then, if they are spaced regularly, the colours developed upon them
must be the same in each case ; but so soon as the wires are rotated, then,
instead of having equally wide spaces lying transverse to the gratings
the width of the spaces varies in a regular manner (Fig. 9, B), and the

Fig. 9.

Gauze

Grating

spectra formed vary accordingly, so that we get the different colours
showing themselves on the same wire.

There are one or two useful purposes to which the above principle
may be applied. Thus, in experimenting with wire and other gratings
it is tedious to measure whether the wires and interstices are evenly
spaced ; but in this diffraction method any irregularity in the spacing
or ruling of the object grating reveals itself immediately to the eye by
reason of the different coloration of the particular wire or set of wires (or
rulings) to the others.

Again, the arrangement may be used in investigations on colour sen-
sation, as it is easy to obtain an admixture of two or more pure spectral
colours in the natural proportions present in white light. If a screen bo
taken with two adjustable slots, any part of the spectrum of the one may
be made to overlap the spectrum of the other, and, by having the slots
A and B arranged tho one a little above the other (tig. 10), the top or
bottom of the held of view shows the two colours separately, and in the
central part of the field we have the admixture.

This arrangement of slots, one above the other, seems to have been
employed many years ago by Helmholtz (see his Handbnch der Physio-
logischen Optik, p. 353). It is also referred to by Ogden N. Bood in-
his Modem Chromatics. But apparently tho employment of gratings

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

89

is a novelty, as both the above writers used prisms. The distinctive
feature of the gratings is thnt the spectra with the order of tbeir colours
reversed can be superposed, whilst with a prism the suporposed spectra
would both have their colours in the same order, i.e. red ends both on

Fig. 10.

a:

O

as

01

3

5

o

id

0)

Yellow

o
•5?

(U

5

6

5

CM

a:

B

the same side. The former arrangement has an obvious interest of its
own, because of the comparison it affords of colour sensation produced
by a series of pairs of colours, each pair of which has the same wave-

length.

(6) Miscellaneous.

Fobgax, W. — Simple Method of obtaining a Large Field of View with the Com-
pound Microscope.

[The enlarged field of view caused by closing the draw-tube is simply a result
of the reduction in power.] Proc. Scottish Micr. Soc, iii. pp. 32-4 (1 fig.).

B. Technique.*
(1) Collecting- Objects, including- Culture Processes.

Simple Method for Cultivating- Anaerobic Bacteria in Capsules. f —
Dr. St. Epstein describes a very simple procedure for cultivating

Fig. 11.

anaerobic bacteria. A Petri's double capsule is fixed round with a broad
rubber band having a couple of rubber tubes at opposite sides. The

* This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Pro-
cesses; (2) Preparing Objects ; (3) Cutting, including Imbedding and Microtomes;
(4) Staining and Injecting ; (5) Mounting, including slides, preservative fluids, &c. ;
(6) Miscellaneous. ' f Centralbl. Bakt., 1" Abt., xxviii. (l'JOO) p. 443 (1 fig.).

90 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

chink between the capsule and the band is smeared up with paraffin and
wax, and then hydrogen gas passed through for three minutes. The
exit opening is then closed, and directly after the entrance opening.
The bacillus of malignant oedema, Bac. botulinus, and Bac. tetani have
been cultivated by this method. The contrivance is represented in
fig. 11.

New Method of Cultivating the Tetanus Bacillus.* — Dr. L. Debrand
describes a new method for cultivating the tetanus bacillus. A mixed
culture of B. tetani and B. subtilis is grown under ordinary aerobic
conditions in bouillon composed of Liebig's extract 5 grm. ; peptone
(Chapoteaut's) 10 grm. ; salt 5 grm. ; water 1000 grm. B. subtilis de-
velopes first and forms a thick surface scum, and after some 24 hours
the drumstick microbe begins to grow. The toxin of the cultures is in
no way modified by the symbiosis, and is in fact identical with that
formed by B. tetani when cultivated under anaerobic conditions. It was
found advisable to start the cultures at about 34° ; but when the toxin
production had attained its maximum (5 or 6 days), the tubes were with-
drawn from the incubator, as the toxicity was from that time no longer
increased.

(2) Preparing Objects.

Method of Preserving Crustacea, f — O. A. Sayce describes a method
of preserving small animals which, while obviating the necessity of
keeping them in a fluid, retains their suppleness and natural appearance.
The method is specially adapted for Crustacea and such animals as have
a firm outer skeleton. The specimens (fresh or preserved in 70 per cent,
alcohol) are placed in the following mixture : — glycerin 1^ parts, water
1 part, methylated spirit 1 part (each by volume) ; corrosive sublimate
1 in 2000. The time of immersion will depend on the size of the object,
but there is no detriment from an indefinite period. Ten days will
suffice for Astacopsis bicarinatus.

When the specimens have soaked sufficiently long to allow of all the
tissues being penetrated by the solution, they may be taken out, and
having been set aside for a few days to drain and allow the spirit to
evaporate, they may be stored in suitable boxes or wrapped in waterproof
paper. To prevent too much drying, or the deposit of moisture owing
to the hygroscopic property of the glycerin, the specimens may be
coated with gelatin and then immersed in 10 per cent, formalin for a
few minutes. This renders the gelatin insoluble to water. In practice
the author uses a quart glass jar in which are placed 8 oz. of methy-
lated spirit, 7 grains of corrosive sublimate, 8 oz. of water, and 12 oz. of
glycerin.

Silvering Nerve-tissue. J — Sig. Mosso impregnates nervous tissue
with 1-2 p.c. solution of argentamin, and reduces with 10 p.c. pyro-
gallol solution. The impregnation takes 10 minutes and the reduction
five. The method was successful for the medullary sheath and for
nerve-cells.

* Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xiv. (1000) pp. 757-6S.
t Victorian Naturalist, xvii. (WOO) pp. 75-8.
X Zcitsce.r. f. angew. Mikr., vi. (11)00) pp. 161-2.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

91

(3) Cutting, including' Imbedding- and Microtomes.

Minot-Blake Microtome.* — F. Blake has devised a microtomo which
remedies the mechanical defects of its prototype the Minot Wheel-
Microtome. The substantial difference between the two instruments is
in the methods used for supporting and guiding those structural parts
by means of which the specimen to be cut is moved in a vertical and a
horizontal direction. The moving parts have only three bearing points,
and are held in contact with the guiding surfaces by the action of a flat
steel spring. The points which form the base of the triangle are V-
ehaped, and are held in contact with a V-shaped groove, while the third

point is a flat block held in contact with a plane surface. The tripod
bearing insures absolute stability under contact ; and the stiff but
yielding bar-spring gives absolute contact and compensation for wear.

From the description given by the Buff and Buff Manufacturing
Company the following further details are gathered. The microtome is
made up of a heavy base and fly-wheel of iron. The shaft and sliding
block are of hardened steel operating on hard composition metal, and
the vertical carriage moves on bell-metal uprights. The knife has a
blade of 1£ in. The feed-wheel is 7 in. in diameter, and is accurately
cut to 500 teeth. The micrometer feed-screw for the cross-feed has
50-8 threads to the inch (half millimetre pitch) so that a single tooth of

* Jouru. Boston Soc. Med. Sciences, iii. (1893) pp. 75-S (3 pis.).

92

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the feed-wheel advances the specimen one micron or 03-.ro 00 1U - toward
the knife. By a circular adjustment the feed may be varied from one to
ten microns per stroke. The vertical movement is 1 in.

Fig. 13

This instrument (see figs. 12, 13) will cut single micron sections in
series without missing.

Fig. 14.

Leake's Microtome. — The accompanying cut (fig. 14) illustrates the
microtome shown by Mr. Hugh M. Leake at the meeting of the Society
on January lGth (see p 106), designed for cutting perfectly flat sections.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 93

(4) Staining- and Injecting-.

Mordants in Staining 1 Technique. * — After alluding to tho great
advances made in dyeing by means of mordants, decolorising and other
reagents, G. Marpmann suggests that similar combinations might be em-
ployed in microscopical technique. For this purpose the chloramin
colours are recommended, such as chloramin yellow C.G., which is fast
to alkalis, acids, heat, and chlorine, and chloramin violet R, which is
fast to acids and alkalis.

The relations of pigments to organic cell-substances arc deserving
of special analysis. The following reactions are those best known : —
Substances containing pectin, vegetable mucus, or gums stain red with
ruthenium oxychloride in ammoniacal solution Rn 2 (OH) 2 Cl 4 + 7NH.,.
Tho aqueous solution 7 ,oVcr ^ s kept in dark bottles. With this stain
plus acetic acid bacteria stain blue.

Vegetable fibres. The specimen is boiled with naphthol solution
in alcohol -1-. One drop of the solution with 10 drops of water arc
mixed on the slide. After boiling, sulphuric acid is added. This gives
a violet hue if vegetable fibres be present, and a brownish-red with
animal fibres.

Cell-nuclei. A mixture of • 5 carmin, 20 alcohol, and 2 hydrochloric-
acid, is heated, and then 25 chloral hydrate added. In this fluid nuclei
stain a deep red in 10 minutes.

Mucin is stained a dark-brown in 1 p.c. Bismarck brown.

Muscle-fibres stain yellow in saturated aqueous solution of orange G.

Cell-substance stains reddish with orange G.

Nerve-fibres become deep red in saturated aqueous solution of acid
fuchsin (fuchsin S).

Chromatin. Preparations stained with safranin are treated with one
per thousand hydrochloric acid alcohol. Thioniu stains the chromatin
bodies of the nucleus in a similar way.

Diabetes blood is decolorised by methyleu-blue solution. The
solution consists of 1 part methylen-blue, 6000 parts of water, and 2 parts
of 6 p.c. caustic potash. One part blood is mixed with 2 parts of water
and 50 parts of the solution, and the preparation heated for 3 minutes in
a water-bath. Normal blood remains blue, while diabetes blood turns
yellow.

Wood (lignin). Sections are stained with phloroglucin and hydro-
chloric acid a rose colour ; with orcein, reddish-violet ; with carbazol,
violet; with resorcin, bluish-violet; with naphthalin, yellow; with
pyrogallic acid, bronze yellow ; with indol, dark-red.

Differential Stain for Cell Structures, f— J. H. Schaffner uses the
following stain for differentiating cell-structures. Stain first for two or
three hours with anilin-safranin (equal parts of anilin oil, water, and
saturated alcoholic solution of safranin). Then stain with picro-nigrosin
solution (distilled water, 100 ccm. ; picric acid, 1 gr. ; nigrosin, 1 gr. ;
first dissolve the picric acid and then add the nigrosin). Dehydrate, and
mount in balsam. The cell-wall stains black ; the cytoplasm bluish ;
spindle-threads green ; chromatin network brick-red ; granules of the
cell-plate black.

* Zeitschr. f. angew. Mikr., vi. (1H00) pp. 169-73.
t Journ. Applied Microscopy, iii. (] ( J00) p. 'M0.

94 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Staining Elastic Fibres.* — Prof. C. Weigert has devised the follow-
ing solution for staining elastic fibres a blue-black colour : — 200 ccm. of
a mixture of 1 p.c. aqueous solution of basic fuchsin and 2 p.c. aqueous
solution of resorcin are heated to boiling in a porcelain vessel ; 25 ccm.
of liq. ferri perchlor. are added, and the mixture kept stirred for 2-5
minutes. After cooling it is filtered, and the precipitate on the filter is
boiled in 200 ccm. of 94 p.c. alcohol. When cold the solution is filtered
and brought up to 200 ccm. with alcohol, 4 ccm. of HC1 are then added.
The solution is now ready for use. The sections are immersed for
20-60 minutes, and then washed in alcohol and cleared up in pure xylol.

Differential Stain for Connective-Tissue.t— Dr. F. B. Mallory has
found that the following method for staining connective-tissue fibrillar
and reticulum is very good, and though not absolutely perfect, gives
better results than any yet proposed for the purpose. (1) Fix in
corrosive sublimate or in Zenker's fluid ; (2) imbed in celloidin or
in paraffin ; (3) stain the sections in .}^ to T L of a 1 p.c. aqueous solu-
tion of acid fuchsin for 1-3 minutes ; (4) wash in water ; (5) place
in a 1 p.c. aqueous solution of phosphomolybdic acid for 1 minute or
longer, using platinum or glass needles; (6) wash in two changes of
water ; (7) stain in the following solution for 2-30 minutes or longer :—
anilin blue soluble in water 0*5, orange G 2, oxalic acid 2, water 100 ;

(8) wash in water; (9) dehydrate in 95 p.c. alcohol; (10) blot on the
slide, and clear up in xylol or in oleum origani cretici ; (11) xylol
balsam.

Staining Neuroglia Fibres with Phosphotungstic Acid Haema-
toxylin. | — Dr. F. B. Mallory recommends the following method : —
(1) Placo the sections in 0*5 p.c. aqueous solution of permanganate of
potash for 15-30 minutes ; (2) wash in water ; (3) 1 p.c. aqueous
solution of oxalic acid 15-30 minutes ; (4) wash in two or three changes
of water ; (5) stain in the following solution for 12-24 hours or longer :• —
hematoxylin 0*1, water 80, 10 p.c. aqueous solution of phosphotungstic
acid 20, peroxide of hydrogen 0*2. Dissolve the hematoxylin in a little
water by the aid of heat, and add it after cooling to the rest of the water
and the acid, then add the peroxide of hydrogen ; (6) wash quickly in
water; (7) dehydrate in 95 p.c. alcohol; (8) oleum origani cretici;

(9) xylol balsam. The nuclei, neuroglia fibres, and fibrin stain blue ;
axis cylinders and ganglion cells pale pink ; connective-tissue deep pink.

C5) Mounting-, including- Slides, Preservative Fluids, &c.

Mounting in Glycerin. § — J. H. Schaffner recommends the following
procedure. The objects are taken from water to glycerin by adding the
latter gradually until pure glycerin is arrived at. They arc then placed
in a small drop of glycerin jelly on the slide, and a ring of Canada
balsam is run round the drop, after which the cover-glass is put on.

Media for Mounting Diatoms. || — Dr. J. F. W. Tatham refers to his
experiences with different media of exceptionally high refractive indices

* Oentralbl. f. allgem. Pathol, u. pathol. Anat., ix. (1S9S) pp. 289-02.
t Journ. Experim. Med., v. (1900) pp. 15-6. J Tom. cit., pp. 19-20.

§ Journ. Applied Microscopy, iii. (1900) p. 9(!0 (1 fig.).
f| Journ. Quek. Micr. Club, vii. (1900) pp. 299-308.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY. ETC. 95

for mounting diatoms. One of these is a solution of biniodide of mer-
cury in excess of iodide of potassium. Tho solution is not only readily
obtained, but is easily retained within a ring of Eousselet's gold-size-
dammar (saturated solution of dammar in benzol 2 parts, gold-size
1 part). Tho solution, which is colourless, brings out the structure
with clearness and beauty. Another colourless medium is phosphorus,
which has a refractive index of 2 '2. The pictures are clear and brilliant,
but are only obtained by tedious and difficult manipulation. Quinidino
is colourless and is easily manipulated ; it is only necessary to place a
portion along with the diatoms between the cover-slip and the slide, and
fuse the quinidine with a spirit-lamp. Its chief fault is that the mounts
soon become opaque from crystallisation of the medium. Realgar,
which has a refractive index of 2*5, has several drawbacks. Great heat
is required to fuse it, the high temperature often twists or distorts the
valves, and the colour of the finished mount is yellow. Another medium
is a mixture of piperine and bromide of antimony (3 to 2 by weight).
A quantity sufficient only to fill two-thirds of the area of the cover-glass
is placed on the slide ; the mixture is then gently heated over a spirit-
lamp; when the medium has set, the unoccupied margin is filled up
with paraffin, and the cover-glass encircled with Hollis' liquid glue.
This medium answers well for the finely lined species, but not for
Coscinodiscus or for any of the other coarse circular forms.

(6) Miscellaneous.

New Thermo-Regulator.* — Dr. St. Epstein has devised a thermo-
regulator which is not only easily filled, but can be rapidly set for
different temperatures. The temperature oscillations do not amount to
more than ' 1° C, and are quite independent of external conditions (gas
and air pressure).

Demonstrating Form and Size of Bacteria, f — Dr. A. Macfadyen
and M. J. E. Barnard give a short account, with photographic illustra-
tions, of the main types of bacteria. The organisms described and
depicted are Streptococcus pyogenes, Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus,
Dip>lococcus pneumoniae, Bacillus pestis, Spirillum cholerse, Bacillus
typhosus, and Bacillus tetani. The magnification used ( x 1750) was
the same in all cases, so that by a glance at the plate the relative size
and characteristic appearance of the various organisms can at once be
grasped. The objectives used were a Zeiss 3 mm. apochromatic, and a
Winkel 1*8 mm. fluorite system, low-power projection-oculars being
used in each case, and magnification obtained by suitable camera exten-
sion. The organisms were all stained, and the screen used was a
saturated solution of acridine yellow, about 15 mm. thick.

Apparatus for Testing Milk and for Cultivating Bacteria. J — Dr.
St. Epstein describes a new fermentation apparatus for testing the value
of milk for cheese making and also for the aerobic cultivation of bacteria.
The apparatus (fig. 15) consists of two parts : the vessel A for holding
tho milk or the nutrient medium, and B for collecting the gases. B

* Centralbl. Bakt., l te Abt., xxviii. (1900) pp. 503-4 (1 fig.).

t Nature, lxiii. (l'JOO) pp. 0-10 (1 pi., S figs.).

% Centralbl. Bakt., 2 ,e Abt., vi. (1900) pp. 65S-9 (2 figs.).

96

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Fig. 15.

Fig. 10.

consists of a eudiometer /, which reaches almost to the hottom of the
glass globe d. In the lower end h of the eudiometer is inserted a tube
with a valve v. Before use A is sterilised or, as is customary in

dairies, is washed with acid and then
with milk, and is then filled with milk up
to the mark 100. The eudiometer / is
filled by pouring water in at the opening
o up to the level of n at the lower part
of the eudiometer. The stopper s at the
top of the burette is then removed, o
closed with the linger, and the eudiometer
filled with water. The stopper is again
inserted, and the finger removed. When
the part B has been filled, its lower end c
is flamed and carefully adjusted on A.
Any gases that develope open the valve v
and ascend into the eudiometer. If a
chemical analysis of the gases be desired,
the stopper s is replaced by a perforated
caoutchouc stopper closed by a clamp
(fig. 16). Should it be desired to transfer
the collected gases to another vessel, the
opening o of the glass bulb is connected
with a tube. Then, by pouring water
from a greater height than that of the
eudiometer into the bulb d, the gas is
expelled through the opening K. It is
advisable to warm the flask A up to the
temperature at which the experiment is
to be carried on, and this is best done
by placing it, when filled and inoculated,
for some minutes in the incubator or in
warm water.

Demonstrating the Bacterial Cap-
sule.* — Dr. I. Boni states that the cap-
sules of bacteria, even from solid cul-
tures, may be demonstrated by the following method. The white of one
egg, 50 grm. of glycerin, and two drops of formalin, are mixed together,
well shaken, and filtered. With a loopful of this fluid a trace of an agar
culture of pneumococcus is carefully mixed and spread on a slide. The
slide is then heated till white vapour ceases to be given off. The film is
then covered with Ziehl's solution, which is allowed to act for half a
minute. The preparation is washed, dried, and mounted in balsam.

Method of Examining Faeces and Morbid Secretions for Bacteria.f
— Dr. J. Strasburger takes a piece of ftecal matter, the size of half a
pea, stirs it up with a glass rod, aud then centrifuges. The supernatant
fluid is then treated with 96 per cent, alcohol in the proportion of 1 to 2
parts, in order to diminish the specific gravity, and so allow the bacteria

* Miinchrner Med. Wochenschr., xlvii. (1900) pp. 12G2-3.
t Zeitschr. f. angew. Mikr., vi. (1900) pp. 160-1.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 97

to sediment. Pus, urine, and other secretions may be treated in the
same way.

Method for Examining quickly moving 1 Micro-organisms.* — Herr
H. Plenge gives the following procedure for obtaining an extremely thin
layer of fluid in which the motility of micro-organisms is impeded. A
very thin cover-glass which has been kept for some days in absolute
alcohol is carefully dried. A trace of pure glycerin is then rubbed on
with the finger tip, and afterwards rubbed off with a clean clotb. In
this way an extremely thin and regular layer can be obtained from a
culture fluid after the superfluous fluid is poured off.

Method of Measuring the Bactericidal Power of the Blood, t —
Prof. A. E. Wright has devised a method of determining in a quanti-
tative manner the bactericidal power of the blood. Measured volumes
of serum and of graduated dilutions of serum are introduced into a series
of capillary cultivation tubes along with a series of equal volumes of a
gelatin culture containing an appropriate number of bacteria. Mixture
of the contents of the serum and culture is then effected in the capillary
tube. It will be noticed that by this arrangement the serum comes in
contact with the bacteria only after they have been suspended in a fluid
which is sufficiently viscid to make it impossible for them to come
together into groups. After the gelatin has solidified, the tubes are
incubated for a period of two or more days. The number of colonies
is then counted under the Microscope, and the results compared with
those from a series of control tubes filled with an equal volume of the
gelatin diluted with an indifferent diluting fluid. For the details of the
procedure, which are given with much minuteness, the original should
be consulted.

Microscopy of Starches.! — Dr. H. Gait has collected together in a
booklet the results of his observations on some of the more commonly
occurring starches, and has illustrated his work with 22 original photo-
micrographs. The author prefers to use the term microphotograph on
the ground of euphony, but does not suggest that this atavistic spelling
is easier to write or print. Another example of an old and not to be
admired custom is the different magnifications under which the starches
have been photographed. For the purpose of comparison and for the
use of students it is wiser to adopt a single standard, as was done by
W. Griffiths in The principal Starches used as Food (1892). Indeed,
Griffiths' work is superior in every way, not only in the photomicro-
graphs but also in the letter-press, which contains a large amount of
useful information.

Simple Method for Estimating the Damage to Living Cells.§—
Dr. M. Neisser states that the reducing power of living cells such as
leucocytes may be used as an estimate of their vitality. Thus the normal
leucocyte speedily decolorises methylen-blue ; but if in any way damaged,
the cell is unable to exert this power, and the solution retains its hue in
proportion to the vital activity of the cell. If 0-5 ccm. of aleuron-

* Verhandl. Naturhist.-med. Vereins zu Heidelberg, vii. p. 218. See Zeitschr. f.
angew. Mikr., vi. (1900) p. 188. t Lancet, 1900, ii. pp. 1556-61 (4 figs.).

% Bailliere, Tindal, and Cox, London, 1900, 108 pp., 22 pis.
§ Miinchener med. Wochenschr., xlvii. (1900) pp. 1261-2.

Feb. 20th, 1901 H

98

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Fig. 17.

exudate and 1'5 ecin. of physiological salt solution be mixed in a narrow
test-tube (6-7 mm. diam.) and a drop of weak methylen-blue solution
added, the colour is discharged in a short while. The tube is closed
and placed in a thermostat. If, however, the leucocytes be damaged at
all by leucocides, heat, chiuin, &c, the fluid will remain more or less
blue, and the amount of damage may be roughly estimated from the
colour.

New Method for Making Collodion Bags.* — Dr. M. A. Buffer and
Dr. M. Crendiropoulo describe a new procedure for obtaining the dif-
fusible poisons of micro-organisms in an ordinary culture tube. The
apparatus (fig. 17) consists of an ordinary test-tube A filled to any
required level with bouillon or some other fluid cultivating medium,

and plugged with cotton wool at b. Through this
plug b is introduced another smaller glass tube a,
to the lower extremity of which is attached a col-
lodion sac d. This inner tube is filled to any
required level with some cultivating fluid, and is
plugged at the upper extremity e with cotton
wool. The collodion bag is made as follows : a
small test-tube is rapidly dipped bottom down-
wards into a vessel filled with collodion until 2 or
3 in. are covered with collodion. The layer is
allowed to dry, and then the process is repeated
twice or thrice. In order to free the collodion
from the tube, the whole is dipped alternately in
strong spirit and then into water. After a few
minutes the bag is loosened and can be slipped
off the tube. A small glass tube is then inserted
into the bag and the whole incubated at 37° C.
The bag is by this means shrunk firmly on to the
tube. In order to sterilise the collodion bag tube,
it is fixed in an empty test-tube in the manner
shown in the illustration, and the whole is steri-
lised at 150° C. by dry heat on one or several
occasions. When this has been done, the inner
tube a, together with the plug b, is transferred
aseptically to a tube of sterilised bouillon or
gelatin of equal size, the plug b now serving to
close the tube of bouillon into which the inner
tube is dipped. The bouillon in tube a is now
inoculated with the micro-organisms to be studied, and the whole placed
in the incubator. After a time the inner tube a is withdrawn ; the
outer tube contains the diffused products. This method may, of course,
be used for other purposes — for example, for testing the action of
microbes on fluids, or the antagonism of two different microbes.

The Plague.f — It may be useful to mention that the British Medical
Journal for October 27, 1900, contains a series of original articles
dealing with the plague from its clinical, pathological, bacteriological,

* Brit. Med. Journ., 1900, ii. pp. 1305-6 (1 fig.).
t Tom. cit., pp. 1229-58 (16 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 99

and historical aspects. Among these may be mentioned ' Bacteriology
of Plague,' by Mr. D. C. Rees, and ' Methods of making Antitoxic and
Preventive Fluids,' by Dr. C. B. Stewart.

Progress in Metallography.* — T. K. Rose treats this subject with
special reference to Le Chatelier's suggestions in the Bulletin de la
Societe a" Encouragement for September last. These relate mainly to the
best methods of obtaining graduated polishing powders, of illumination,
and of making alloys. In examining the alloys of two metals, much
time is consumed in making and suitably preparing a series of typical
specimens. Le Chatelier proposes to shorten the search by melting to-
gether two superimposed layers, each consisting of a pure metal, the
lighter one being on the top. If no alloys are formed of greater density
than the heavier metal, and the crucible is allowed to cool undisturbed,
a culot can be obtained which, oh being sawn through vertically, shows
a complete graduation from one pure metal to the other, passing through
the whole series of alloys, which can then be studied in one specimen.
Figures are given of the aluminium-copper series obtained in this way.

Crystalline Structure of Iron and Steel.f — J. E. Stead describes
an elaborate investigation of this subject. He arrives at ten conclusions,
of which the following is a condensed summary : —

(1) That granules and crystals should not be confused ; for although
a granule is built up of crystals, its external form is not that of any kind
of crystal, as it takes its shape from its surroundings. It is better to
replace the term granule by grain.

(2) That grains formed in the solidification of liquid metals are
large or small, according to whether the freezing is rapid or slow.

(3) That in practically carbonless pure irons, and in steels of fine
grain produced by either forging or certain heat treatment, the grains
increase in size slowly at 500° C, and more rapidly at between 600° and
750° C. ; and it is possible, by heating at about 700° for a few hours, to
develope granular masses of exceeding coarseness. When pure iron made
coarsely granular by long heating at a dull red heat is heated between
750° and 870°, as a rule the structure is not materially altered ; but
at 900° the granules again become small, and heating to 1200° C. does
not apparently produce any difference in their dimensions.

(4) That when steels containing 0*20 to 1-20 p.c. of carbon are sub-
ject to prolonged heating at 700° C, the grains do not increase in size ;
but they do increase if the temperature is raised above 750°. When,
however, this coarse steel is reheated to between 700° and 750°, the
coarse structure vanishes and the grains become very fine.

(5) That in steels with 0-10 to 0-15 p.c. containing the pearlite in
widely separated areas, on heating and quenching from 750°, the large
ferrite grains are not broken up, and the carbon apparently does not
expand or diffuse beyond the original areas, as previously demonstrated
both by Osmond and Arnold ; yet, when the heating is raised to near
850° and the steel allowed to cool down naturally, the carbon areas are
found far beyond their original positions, and exist in a number of
smaller segregations.

* Nature. Jan. 3, 1901, pp. 232-3 (3 fisrs.).

t Metallo^raphist, Oct. 1898, pp. 289-341 (26 Hers, nn.l 3 diagrams).

II 2

100 SUMMARY OF QUERENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

(6) That good open-heartli steel with 0*23 p.c. carbon maybe heated
to close upon its burning-point without becoming brittle, and that it
only becomes truly burnt when intergranular separation is effected.

(7) That when solid steel is partially decarburised by oxidising
agents at between 700° and 800°, an envelope of pure iron forms at the
surface, and the grains in this layer assume a columnar structure radiating
from the outside to a point below where there is carbon.

(8) That by strongly etching pure iron, or iron containing much
phosphorus, aluminium, or silicon, the cubical crystals of pure iron are
readily developed.

(9) That by mechanically testing micro-sections of pure iron by the
method of fracture, it seems to follow that the smaller aud finer the grain
the safer the structure.

(10) That soft steel plates treated under certain conditions develope
a most peculiar crystalline structure, whose cleavage lines are invariably
at an angle of 45° to the direction in which the plates are rolled. This
extraordinary development is sometimes destroyed by close annealing
for 36 to 48 hours; but it is invariably destroyed by heating to 900° C,
and the steel then becomes exceedingly tough.

Constitution of Steel considered as an Alloy of Iron and Carbon.*
— Albert Sauveur argues that the formation of a cryohydrate and of an
eutectic alloy are analogous phenomena ; the only difference being that
the former takes place at ordinary temperatures, and the other at high
temperatures. The result in each case is a mechanical compound in
which the constituents are juxtaposed in minute crystals and in definite
proportions. He illustrates his reasonings by the solubility curve of
sodium chloride in water, and by the cooling curve of the alloy of iron
and carbon (Le. steel). A plate of 16 figures reproduces the microstruc-
ture of the alloy. He quotes Ponsot's opinion f that the name " cryo-
hydrate " should be abandoned, as being inapplicable to a mechanical
mixture, and should be replaced by " cryosel."

Allotropic Iron and Carbon4 — E. H. Sauiter's researches are in-
tended as an unbiassed contribution towards the controversy encircling
the cause of the glass-hardness of quenched carbon steel. His results
were obtained by hot-etching on specimens of metal selected for their
freedom from mechanical treatment — in other words, specimens in which
the normal structure would be as perfect as possible. His investigations
were arranged in three sections : — ■

i. The structure of pure carbonless iron at a bright red heat. (The
cubical crystals of cold iron became replaced by rhombohedral crystals
in the hot specimen, showing that iron is dimorphous.)

ii. The structure of pure carbon-iron compounds at a bright red
heat. (There was a marked reduction in the size of the amorphous
carbon grains, as compared with their cold state.)

iii. The effect of moderate quantities of sulphur, phosphorus, and
manganese on the structure of carbonless iron at a bright red heat.

The dimorphism of section i. and the reduced amorphism of section ii.

* Metallographist, 1898, pp. 210-29 (1 pi. and 3 figs.).

t 'Kecherches sur la congelation des solutions aqueuees etendues,' Paris, 1896

t Metallographist, 1S98, pp. 251-8 (7 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 101

seem to point to allotropy, which is found to be modified by the impurities
in section iii.

Notes on the Microscope in the Drug- Store.* — Dr. H. M. Whelpley
describes the value of even a low power cheap Microscope to a pharma-
cist. Among articles which are readily discriminated by such an
instrument are : the different grades of hydrargyrum cum creta, leaves
of senna and long buchu, short buchu and uva ursi ; adulterations of
lupulin ; powdered rhubarb ; distinction between fruits of hemlock and
anise, &c.

Rice, F. S. — Microstructural Characteristics of Steel.

Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc, Aug. 1897.

Molderke, R. — The Microscope in the Study of Iron.

Iron Trade Review, Oct. 28, 1897, p. 19.

Renard, A. F., & F. Stober— Notions de Mineralogie.

[A j noticeable feature of the short section on chemical crystallography is the
inclusion of a number of micro-chemical tests, with figures of the crystalline
products.] Ad. Hoste, Gand, 1900, x. and 374 pp., 732 figs.

The Metallographist. A quarterly publication devoted to the study of Metals, with

special reference to their Physics and Microstructure, their Industrial Treatment

and Applications. Boston, U.S.A.

In addition to the articles abstracted in our Journal, the following possess

microscopical interest : —

Jan. 1898. Microstructure of Steel and the Current Theories of Hardening,
pp. 27-51, numerous tables and figs. Albert Sauveur.

Jan. 1898. Microscope Accessories for Metallograpbers, pp. 82-3 (2 figs.).
J. E. Stead.

[The author applies a method of fracturing to determine the locality of im-
purities in a metal.]
April 1898. Bibliography of the Metallography of Iron and Steel, pp. 168-78.
[Arranged alphabetically under authors' names; too long to quote; apparently
a very complete list; nearly all the citations seem to bear on microscopy;
some sixty authorities (English, French, German, American), covering the
last twenty years, are given.]

* Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., 1900, pp. 305-8; quoted from Bull, of Pharmacy.

102

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

MEETING

Held on the 19th of December, 1900, at 20 Hanover Square, W.
The President (W. Carruthers, Esq., F.E.S.) in the Chair.

The Minutes of the Meeting of 21st of November last were read
and confirmed, and were signed by the President.

Notice was given on behalf of the Council that at the next Meeting
of the Society the name of Dr. C. T. Hudson, F.R.S., would be submitted
for election as an Honorary Fellow of the Society.

The President said that Dr. Hudson had, on account of his age and
his removal from London, expressed a desire to retire from the Fellow-
ship of the Society. The Council thought it would be very undesirable
that the name of one who had been so long associated with them, and
who was so distinguished for his work as a microscopist, should be
omitted from their roll of Fellowship, and they therefore proposed to
elect him as an Honorary Fellow, and in this way still to retain his
name upon their list.

The List of Donations to the Society received since the last Meeting
(exclusive of exchanges and reprints) was read, and the thanks of the
Society were voted to the Donors.

From
P. Chalmers Mitchell, Thomas Henry Huxley. A Sketch 1

of his Life and Work. (8vo, New York and London, > Tlie Publishers.

1900) |

Dukinfield Hy. Scott, Studies in Fossil Botany. (Svo, j ™, Publishers

London, 1900) J

A Powell and Lealand Microscope, No. 1 Stand, with Appa-1 Miss A. Whittell, of

ratus / Adelaide, S. Australia.

The Microscope received from Miss Whittell was a very valuable
instrument by Powell and Lealand, with a complete set of objectives
and accessories, the property of her late father, Dr. Horatio T. Whittell,
of Adelaide, Australia, one of the Fellows of the Society, who had
expressed a wish that his memory might be perpetuated by the Society's
possession of his Microscope and whatever pertained to it. The instru-
ment, together with the case of apparatus, &c, was placed upon the table
for the inspection of the Fellows present, and their special thanks were
voted to Miss Whittell for forwarding this valuable donation.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 103

Mr. E. M. Nelson exhibited a small pocket Microscope which had
"been lent for the purpose by Mr. Freeman. It was a brass tube carrying
the eye-piece at one end and the objective at the other, the focussing
being by means of a sliding tube. At the objective end a cap with a
glass top was fitted, another similar cap fitting over this. The object
to be viewed was placed between these two caps, which, when brought
together, formed a sort of compressorium, and retained the object in
the centre of the field, where alone it could be clearly seen. He
thought this was a very valuable little contrivance for taking into the
1:1, as it ^euld be used for exairir'rg oWtd if jn w&for whVn a drop
was placed between the glasses of the two caps. There was one draw-
back to its usefulness, which was rather a serious one, viz. that unless
the object was in the centre of the cap it could not be properly seen,
because there was no means by which the object could be moved
laterally in the field. A diagram was exhibited showing the construc-
tion of the instrument, enlarged four times linear (see p. 82).

The thanks of the Meeting were, on the motion of the President,
voted to Mr. Freeman for sending this Microscope for exhibition, and
to Mr. Nelson for explaining its use and construction.

Dr. Hebb reminded the Fellows that their next Meeting would be
the Annual Meeting, and that in accordance with the bye-laws he now
presente i the list of those who had been nominated by the Council for
election at the next Meeting as Officers and Council for the ensuing
year, as follows : —

President — Mr. W. Oarruthers.

Vice-Presidents — Messrs. Braithwaite, Michael, Nelson, and Sir Ford
North.

Treasurer — Mr. J. J. Vezey.

Secretaries — Dr. Dallinger and Dr. Hebb.

Council — Messrs. Allen, Beck, Bennett, Browne, Carr, Dadswell,
Disney, Karop, Plimmer, Powell, Dr. Pritchard, and Mr. Rousselet.

Curator — Mr. Rousselet.

Auditor on behalf of the Council — Mr. J. M. Allen.

It being necessary to elect Auditors that evening, the Fellows
were asked to appoint some one to act in that capacity on their behalf
with Mr. Allen. Mr. G. E. Mainland was thereupon proposed by
Mr. C. L. Curties, seconded by Mr. Freshwater, and unanimously
elected.

The President then called upon Mr. Barton, who, he said, did not
want to give a lecture on lantern demonstration, but rather to exhibit
and explain some new apparatus for the purpose made by Messrs.
Ross.

Mr. Barton expressed his regret if any misconception or dis-
appointment had been caused through the form of announcement as
to what he proposed to do, which was merely to show some new forms
of lanterns which could be used for ordinary projection purposes either

104 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

with or without the Microscope. The first of these was an ordinary
projection lantern made with a small body, but so constructed as to
exclude all light from the room except what passed through the lenses.
The manner of using this in connection with a Microscope was also shown.
The other lantern was a larger and more complete article, which could be
used for all purposes, including enlargements. The fine definition given
by this lantern was then demonstrated by the exhibition on the screen
of some photomicrographs of mounted preparations of insects, and by a
further series of whole insects mounted in balsam, all of which were
defined with remarkable sharpness and brilliancy.

In addition to the foregoing, Mr. Barton also exhibited and de-
scribed several new forms of Microscope, with detachable circular
stage, &c. ; a new form of electric arc lamp for lantern use, with
vulcanite milled head for ensuring perfect insulation to the operator - y
also an arc lamp of ordinary construction. A new form of lime-light
was also exhibited, which attracted much attention, from its extreme
brilliancy and the perfect steadiness and silence with which it burned,,
with a consumption of from 5 to 1\ ft. of gas per hour.

Mr. E. M. Nelson thought Mr. Barton was to be highly congratulated
upon the successful demonstration which he had given them. He was
very much struck with the perfection to which the lamp had been
brought, and inquired how so intense a light had been obtained, and
if the gas had been enriched in any way by ether or by the admixture
of some hydrocarbon, and how it was produced with such complete
absence of noise.

Mr. Barton said that nothing whatever was used but the two gases
themselves, the effect being produced by the particular way in which
the gases were caused to impinge upon one another previous to their
entrance to the mixing chamber, and by the construction of the chamber
itself through which they were passed.

In reply to other questions, Mr. Barton said that this form of lamp
required the gases to be used under pressure, although this could, at
the expense of light, be reduced to a consumption of 1\ ft. per hour.
The heat was intercepted by a water-trough in the usual way, and the
projection with the Microscope could be successfully carried out with
objectives as high as \ in. or even T \r in., but for all-round purposes
a ^ was about the best, provided that the lenses were properly
corrected for the purpose ; everything depended upon the quality of
the lens and the nature of the object to be shown.

The President was sure that the Fellows of the Society present
would feel grateful to Messrs. Boss, and to their representative,
Mr. Barton, for the Microscopes and lanterns which had been sub-
mitted to their inspection, and especially for the extremely inter-
esting exhibition on the screen, which was a remarkable illustration
of perfect definition. The photographs did not appeal to him so
strongly as the natural objects. He had great pleasure in proposing
that the hearty thanks of the Society be given to Mr. Barton for what
he had shown them, and to Messrs. Boss for the instruments and
apparatus exhibited.

The vote of thanks, having been put to the Meeting, was carried by
acclamation.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 105

The President announced that the Annual Meeting of the Society
would be held on January 16th, 1901, and that the Library would be
closed from December 22nd to January 2nd inclusive.

The following Instruments, Objects, &c, were exhibited:—

Mr. E. M. Nelson : — A Pocket Aquatic Microscope by Henry

Gilbertson.

Mr. J. H. Barton : — The following instruments, &c, by Messrs.

Eoss: — No. 1 Petrological Microscope. No. 1 Standard Microscope.

Now Combination Lantern. " No. 1 Model " Projection Lantern, fi ed

with lime-light. The " Eadiant " Jet. The Boss Arc Lamp "A."

The Boss Arc Lamp " B."

New Fellows. — The following gentlemen were elected Ordinary
Fellows of the Society : — Dr. Arthur M. Edwards, Messrs. Geo. Hy.
Godwin, John Atmore Knights, Henry Taverner, and Benj. Wm.
Williams.

106 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

ANNUAL MEETING

Held on the 16th of January, 1901, at 20 Hanover Square, W.
The President (W. Carruthers, Esq., F.E.S.) in the Chair.

Minutes of the Meeting oi 12tn December, 1900, were read
and confirmed, and were signed by the President.

On the motion of the President, Mr. C. L. Curties and Mr. Radley
were appointed Scrutineers of the Ballot for the election of Officers arid
Council of the Society for the ensuing year.

The following Donation was announced, and the thanks of the
Society were given to the donor : —

From
An old Pocket Field Microscope, by H. Gilbertson Mr. H. E. Freeman

The President called attention to the small Microscope presented to
the Society by Mr. Freeman, as being the same which was exhibited at
the last Meeting, and then described by Mr. Nelson.

Mr. Hugh M. Leake, of Cambridge, exhibited a new form of micro-
tome which he said was the result of many attempts ,to produce a
machine which would cut perfectly flat instead of curved sections, as
cut by the ordinary Cambridge rocking microtome. The rocking move-
ment was caused to take place at right angles to the feed, and was
capable of cutting If in. of material into a continuous series. It was
also supplied with an additional clamp for holding hard objects, and
with a spray apparatus for freezing (see p. 92).

The President said Mr. Leake had taken great pains to bring this
instrument to perfection, and it appeared to be very efficient and likely
to be of great service to those whose studies required the use of anything
of the kind.

The thanks of the Society were unanimously voted to Mr. Leake foi
bringing this microtome before the notice of the Society.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL FOR 1900.

Dr. Hebb then read the Report of the Council for the year 1900, as
follows : —

FELLOWS.

Ordinary. — During the year 1900, 26 new Fellows were elected,
whilst 9 have died, 16 have resigned, and 15 have been removed from
the list for non-payment of subscriptions and other causes.

PEOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 107

Honorary. — The number of Honorary Fellows remained the same as
for last year.

The list of Fellows now contains the names of 456 Ordinary,
1 Corresponding, 46 Honorary, and 83 Ex-Officio Fellows, being a total
of 586.

FINANCES.

Subscriptions. — Though the amount received for Subscriptions is
rather less than that in last vear's account, this is due to the fact that
there were less arrears to collect. The sum received for the current
yea* » subscriptions is rather larger tL«,n ihut tor tne previous year.

During the year the sum of 60Z. 12s. 6d. was placed on deposit at
the Bank, bringing up the total to 373Z. 12s. 6d. This amount has
now been invested in India 3 per cents. The present investments of
the Society, therefore, more nearly approach the figures at which they
stood a few years ago, than they have for some time past. The Council
hope that by economy and proper management this improvement may
continue.

The Council desires to remind Fellows that prompt payment of
their Subscriptions, which are due at the commencement of the year, is a
great assistance in arranging the financial affairs of the Society.

The sale of Journals for the year shows a small improvement on
that for 1899 ; and as some new features are being introduced which
will add to its value, the Council look for a steady increase in its sale.

JOURNAL.

The Journal has been conducted through the past year on the same
lines as heretofore. In addition to the subjects already included, it is
intended to commence with the new year furnishing the Fellows with
brief abstracts of papers on the microscopic structure of metals and
minerals, which it is hoped may be useful to those engaged in metallurgy
and in mining operations.

CABINET.

The Society's collection has been enriched by the donation of the
cabinet and microscopical specimens, some 1014 in number, belonging
to the late Treasurer, Mr. W. T. Suffolk.

INSTRUMENTS AND APPARATUS.

During the past year the Catalogue of Instruments and Apparatus in
the Society's collection has been completed, and every item has been
furnished with a label and reference number. The Catalogue contains
all the information as to number of apparatus belonging to each Micro-
scope, date of manufacture, date of donation, name of donor, &c, which
it has been possible to discover.

The standard plug and ring gauges ordered last year have been
delivered, and may now be inspected on payment of a small fee.

Standard screw-chasers for cutting the threads of objectives and
nose-pieces are now ready for sale at the price of 2s. 6d. per pair.

The Society is greatly indebted to Mr. Conrad Beck for much valu-
able assistance and gratuitous work rendered in connection with these
apparatus and instruments.

108 PKOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

The following additions have been made to the collection during the
past year : —

February 21. — A Jones Most Improved combined Microscope and
apparatus. Presented by Mr. E. M. Nelson.

February 21. — A Powell and Lealand No. 1 Microscope-stand, with
a quantity of apparatus, belonging to the late Dr. Whittell, of Adelaide,
South Australia. Presented by Miss Whittell.

March 21. — An old Microscope by Benjamin Martin, dating about
1765. Presented by Mr. F. R. Dixon-Nuttall.

LIBRARY.

During the past year the Library has been thoroughly overhauled ;
a large number of useless journals and obsolete periodicals have been
disposed of, and the proceeds are being devoted to binding and repairing;
in this way over 250 volumes have already been dealt with.

A card catalogue, kindly undertaken by Mr. P. E. Eadley, one of
the Fellows, has been commenced, and is in a fair way towards com-
pletion.

A Library Committee has been formed, and from their supervision
and care it is hoped that the Library may be further developed and
rendered still more valuable to workers in Microscopy.

Mr. J. J. Vezey, Treasurer, then read the Annual Statement of
Accounts and the Balance Sheet for 1900, duly audited by Messrs. J. M.
Allen and G. E. Mainland.

Mr. Vezey said he did not think that the figures he had read called
for much explanation, but he might point out that the smaller amount
received as subscriptions was chiefly due to the fact that during the
previous year there had been fewer arrears to collect, and it would be
his care in the future to see that subscriptions were promply paid, and
he hoped Fellows would assist him to this end. One other matter he
wisbed to mention, viz. the Journal. A reference to the Balance Sheet
would show Fellows how large a sum was expended on it, more even
than the amount received for subscriptions. For many years the
Journal had held a foremost place among those issued by the various
scientific societies, and in view of the additional features announced in
the Annual Report, Fellows would see that it was clearly the intention
of the Council to maintain its high position. He trusted Fellows would
show their appreciation of this liberality on the part of the Council by
increasing the number of Fellows and the circulation of the Journal.

The Rev. A. G. Warner said he had great pleasure in moving that
the Report of the Council and the Treasurer's Balance Sheet be received
and adopted, and tbat they be printed in the usual way. He thought
both these were very satisfactory, and would speak for themselves.
The Report was a model of terseness, and although the Treasurer said
there was nothing particular in his Balance Sheet to call for attention,
he thought tbe fact that they had been able to add 60Z. to the amount
of their investments was one very well worth noting.

The motion, having been seconded by Mr. Freshwater, was put to
the Meeting by the President and unanimously carried.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

109

^ O 00 i.-. CO

©©©-*!©© ©co©co

CO

CO

jlOMlOO

w 11 r1

1Q CM © W © © CM CO ■* -*l CC

©

il rl

i— ( -1

H

— 1

(-H

,OiOO

© CO CO © CM 1^ ©

© 0O i

-+l

<M

^eooo-t

0>t»HH

CM ©

i

-

ta

rl I—) 1-1

CD CO

CN

oo

H

.... CN t> 05

: :

c+i

eo co oo

00

i-i

•*-» •

_

co

i-H

3 '

cd

.... •>*

•-3 00

rl

o

.... ^

03

&

'. '. I

CD :

CD

rH

.3

H :

c3

TO •

a •

M

03 ~

•

3 c3

60 i

CO

s,pq

QT!

H c

900.

Rent, &c.

Salaries and Reportii
Books, &c, purchase
Bookbinding ..
Expenses of Journal-

Print.ine

CO

CM *

:H5

t 00

a

o

c3

1

il

CD •
o • t

CO oo, cfc

j §2:2

' i *g

; .a o o

o
<0

I

1

i

■+i

° 53 u
to 2 *

3"a5.£

• Jl

• o
m a

to C4 _ o

.So 1 ?

cs _^h:
Oh^ c

<d o =

i!

. -

l e

1

>
>
1

P

-iMa

!feP-ifip:

i

i

rt >> - . . ,

pq - - - -

iqCO©

00 OS i—

l> © © © i-H TS1

C

© co

oo

. —I tN

tH © cc

"*l © ©

<* co -+

IC.

(M

-1

©

"» i—i

i-l i—l —

—

n

11

ii

^ Ci TfH

© CO i—

© © GO © © LO

CM

CC

©

(M

co co

CM © ©

r^

UO

i-H

t>

co

:-

CO

1

Cti

. . o coo:

ooc

5

■*(^u:

co co i-

4

• . r-H

-* co co

co

■* T-

4

CN ■*

CM (M

CO

to

:^

• ^3

o

o

O

pq

00

* +=

CD

00

c

-2 2-3

~

: : , :

00

. a .

c

oo =■
-h-» c.

3<
CD

►

a 3

• So,
' a S

CD p
..2 02

"O O r-
0Q i-l ^

00 "3 g

o°o.1
1.2 S

•r
1

at
> C

C

rom 1899
i Fees
ubsoriptio

S •"£

oo C

3 5

ournal
or Advert
, Sale of

A

' c
7

j

c

> .

1

> •

i ;

<•- oOQ

o c

^ « "

-

- e

JO "S —c l> CO o-

© ^h e

4

-U

=«-2

c

0D

o oo c3 OS Oi CT

©

© c

i

OS

O Oh

•c

900.

Balati

Admi

Annu

18

18

18

Oi

i— i

OS'O
i-l i-

CD
CD

3
rH

tVQpH

j: ~

i
3
02

- 1 o ~ -

Eh " "

5

OS

S

OS

***^

o»

U

■*»

'^
q

?

<u

•*a

o

"5

CO

c2 -♦"

3

cu

•s|

. ^

t.

00 *i

s

03 s

CD O

'

^

OO CJ

a

1M

O CD

0,-a

w «

-1 j

>

2 .2

^ CO

<1 »5

9^

t-s

3 g

"- 1 03

00

>-i

00 «

53 «

■**
3^
>5 3
r*t3

CD no

00

ja -

-*J

-*^ T3

a

'S CD

CD

^ 3

•O
03 ^^

CD .2

1 ^
O CD

i«

?»

rt CD
CD 9

<D C3

r3 CD

E-l CD
CD

30

+-i

3

CD
i3

CD
Pi

ri O

co "t;

03 00

9 00

-y b

"

O CD

OX]

CO

-*-i

O ;-«

° '-1

CO

m

(33

'O 'S

CO oo

d _03

3 3
CD

5 ^ci

CD

-w~C"*2

C3 — '
fe CD

-1 CD

cS j3

3 ,0

3 -w
O •<-<

2i CD

3 ^

3 CD

<q ca

r. D S

.3 >

J^

-4J

"Eh

P

|s

60 •

PQ

.

CD , — .

a "8

-3

^

T3 i—i

CO

t *-« O)

-f^

-(-J

® fe

-*»

rH

o »

o

H

.3.3
i-i CD

i-^» i^S

r-J

r*«

CD &
3

© lO ©

©

© rl

© lO

"* CO ■* CO

a ^

cS "g

X .3

CD O

-, O

g«2

03

©

OS

a
3

s

110 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

The Scrutineers having handed in their report of the result of the
ballot, the President declared the whole of the Fellows nominated to
be duly elected as under.

President— William Carruthers, Esq., F.K.S., F.L.S., F.G.S.

Vice-Presidents — Eobert Braithwaite, Esq., M.D., M.B.C.S., F.L.S. ;
A. D. Michael, Esq., F.L.S. ; E. M. Nelson, Esq. ; The Eight Hon. Sir
Ford North, P.C., F.R.S.

Treasurer — J. J. Vezey, Esq.

Secretaries— "Rev. W. H. Dallinger, LL D., F.E.S. ; E. G. Hebb,
Esq., M.A., M.D., F.R.O.P.

Twelve other Members of Council — James Mason Allen, Esq. ; Conrad
Beck, Esq.; Alfred W. "Bennett, Esq., M.A., B.Sc, F.L.S.; E. T.
Browne, Esq.; Eev. Edmund Carr, M.A., F.E.Met.S. ; Edward Dads-
well, Esq. ; A. N. Disney, Esq., M.A., B.Sc. ; George C. Karop, Esq.,
M.E.C.S.; Henry George Plimmer, Esq., M.E.C.S., F.L.S.: Thomas
H. Powell, Esq.; Prof. Urban Pritchard, M.D., F.E.C.S. ; Charles F.
Eousselet, Esq.

Curator — Charles F. Eousselet, Esq.

The President expressed his thanks to the Fellows of the Society
for again placing him in the position which he had occupied during the
past year, and congratulated them upon the Beport which had been
presented, and upon the improved conditions which this indicated. As
regards the Library, everything had been carefully gone through, and
much that was useless eliminated, and their thanks were heartily due
to Mr. Eadley for the great pains he had taken in the preparation of the
catalogue.

Their collection of instruments had been also put in excellent order,
and would in this respect compare well with those in any shop in
Eegent Street ; everything was properly marked, and arranged in such
a way as to make it difficult for anything to go astray. He also con-
gratulated the Fellows upon the state of their funds ; although the
income of the Society was not large, it was most economically expended
with very advantageous results ; but it would be a means of great good
to the Society and to science if the income could be increased during
the next few years by the addition of many more to the number of their
Fellows.

The President then read his Annual Address, which consisted chiefly
of an interesting epitome of the life and work of John Ellis, known at
the time as " Coralline " Ellis.

Mr. A. D. Michael said he rose to ask the Fellows of the Society
to give their hearty thanks to the President for the charming address
which they had just heard, in which he had unearthed one of those
attractive bye-paths of science which, when brought to light, so often
proved to contain lessons which all might learn with advantage. It
was certainly very interesting to see how history repeated itself, men
like Ellis being originally attracted only by the picturesque side of the
subject, but getting gradually drawn on towards the scientific side, and
then endeavouring to turn that scientific knowledge to the practical

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. Ill

benefit of the human race. There was no field of research more
enticing than that border land which lies between the animal and
vegetable kingdoms, and the steps by which the existing knowledge
in this subject had been acquired were always of the greatest interest.
It was still most imperfect ; but when they considered what kind of
instruments men like Ellis, who won that knowledge, possessed, it
was clear that he set an example which biologists of to-day would do
well to imitate ; it seemed that with the improved means at their
command they ought to be able to do so much, and that they really
did so little. Perhaps, however, one reason for the contrast was the
fact that these early naturalists had an unworked field before them for
discovery. From the growth of knowledge the gap between the lowly
Hydrozoa and the highly organised Polyzoa seemed a wide one, but the
keen insight into nature shown by the man or men who first appreciated
the difference between these very similar looking groups of creatures
deserved the greatest admiration, and went far to show how great an
observer Ellis really was. He had great pleasure in moving that the
best thanks of the Society be given to the President for his most
instructive address, and in begging that he would allow it to be printed
in the Journal.

The motion having been seconded by Dr. Braithwaite,

Mr. Michael said that as the President could not put this to the
Meeting himself, he would ask them to pass it.

The vote of thanks was accordingly carried by acclamation.

The President said he was much obliged to the Fellows for this
vote of thanks and for the manner in which it had been proposed and
carried. He was very glad to find they had been interested in this
narrative, which certainly had interested him very much in the course of
its preparation.

Mr. G. C. Karop moved a very cordial vote of thanks to the Honorary
Officers, Secretaries, Treasurer, and Curator. Their efficient services to
the Society were known and very highly appreciated. All would regret
the continued absence of Dr. Dallinger, caused by ill-health, and hope
for his speedy recovery.

The motion having been seconded by Mr. Dineen, was put to the
Meeting by the President, and carried unanimously.

Mr. Vezey, in responding for the Officers, said that he was entitled
to a very small portion of the vote of thanks, but Dr. Hebb had asked
him to reply for the Officers. This gave him an opportunity of telling
Fellows how much of the work of the rearrangement of the Library had
fallen on Dr. Hebb's shoulders. He had entirely undertaken the clearing
out of useless literature which had accumulated for years on the shelves
of the Society. This work may have covered him with glory, but it had
certainly covered him with dust. Mr. Vezey added that Fellows were
heartily welcome to the small services he had been able to render as
Treasurer.

A vote of thanks to the Auditors and Scrutineers, moved by Mr.
Disney and seconded by Mr. Ersser, was also put, and carried unani-
mously.

112

PKOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

The following Instrument was exhibited : —

Mr. Hugh M. Leake : — A new Flat-cutting Rocking Microtome.

New Fellows. — The following gentlemen were elected : —

Honorary Fellow : — Mr. Charles Thomas Hudson, F.E.S.
Ordinary Fellows : — Messrs. Wm. Geo. Albert Edwards, Jno. Hy.
Holland, Clarence J. H. Sidwell.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

APRIL 1901.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

II. — The President's Address.
By William Carruthers, F.R.S., F.L.S., F.G.S.

{Delivered January lfith, 1901.)

Some months ago I bad occasion to consult the works of John Ellis
in connection with an inquiry regarding some of our British sea-
weeds. I was so much impressed with the story of his investigations,
the care with which he prosecuted them, the instruments which he
used, and the simple and clear style of his writing, that at the time
it seemed to me that some account of him and his work might be an
entertaining and instructive subject for the Annual Address expected
from the chair at the January meeting. I have since made further
investigations regarding John Ellis — " Coralline Ellis " as he was
familiarly called in reference to his most important work ; and I
venture to hope that his story may secure your attention while
I attempt to tell it.

Ellis was a native of Ireland, probably of Dublin, where his sister
continued to live after he was settled in London. The day and year
of his birth are unknown, but he was considered to be sixty-six years
of age when he died in 1776. He was probably born in 1710. At
what time he came to London is likewise unknown. He was, when
he began in 1756 to correspond with Linnaeus, sufficiently known
that he asked him to address his reply to " Mr. John Ellis, merchant,
in London." There is no reason for supposing that he was not a
prosperous merchant. He nevertheless found time to prosecute his
studies in Natural History. In 1751 he received a collection of sea-
weeds and zoophytes from Anglesey, and another from his sister in
Dublin. He spread them out in fresh water and mounted them on
thin boards covered with white paper so as to form a kind of land-
scape, using the larger fronds of TJlva marina to represent hills,
dales, and rocks, and arranging the smaller sea-weeds and zoophytes
as little trees.

April 17 th, 1901 I

114 Transactions of the Society.

His friend, the Rev. Dr. Stephen Hales, who had some years
before published his essay on Vegetable Staticks, called on birn and
was charmed with the landscapes. He asked Ellis to prepare some
similar ones for the Princess of Wales, with the view of helping to
lead the young princesses to study natural objects. Ellis proceeded,
with his characteristic energy, to make collections with the view of
complying with Dr. Hales' request. He obtained the help of a
friend who was secretary to the Postmaster-General, and of his sister
in Ireland. In due time he was able to present several landscapes to
the Princess.

The large number of specimens that came into his hands in this
way raised in him a desire to determine the species and arrange
them systematically. Up to this time the Zoophytes, both Hydrozoa
and Polyzoa, were treated as plants, and these, with the calcareous
Algae and Molluscan egg-cases, were called Corallines. The early
herbaria, like those of Sloane, Petiver, &c, in the Botanical Depart-
ment of the British Museum, contain the oldest preserved specimens
of these zoophytes. They are included as plants in John Pay's great
and learned Historia Plantarum. Ellis arranged his collection
according to the then standard British Flora, Ray's Synopsis
Stirpium Britannicarum, the third edition of which, edited and
brought up to date by Dr. Dillenius, was published in 1721. The
result of his more careful study of the Corallines was communicated
to the Royal Society in June 1752. He grouped these objects into
three classes: — (1) those that were evidently the cells of animals;
(2) the branched Corallines ; and (3) the articulated Corallines. The
first group he considered to be animals, but the other two to be
plants. In the discussion that followed the reading of his paper,
opinions were expressed as to the probable animal nature of the whole
of the organisms which were called Corallines. Ellis had separated
one group which had hitherto been considered to be plants, and he
resolved to study with care the other groups in the view of the sug-
gestions made by the Fellows of the Society. Accordingly, in
August of the same year he went to Sheppey, taking with him to
make proper drawings, " Mr. Brooking, a celebrated painter of sea-
pieces." Here he made observations on the living Corallines under
a Microscope made by Mr. Caff, of Fleet Street, under his directions.
The first Coralline he investigated was the Hydrozoan which we now
call Laomedea genieulata, a small generally branchless erect stem,
giving off at each joint a short stalk supporting a single bell-shaped
cell in which the animal lives. Under the Microscope he saw the
animal. This observation led him to withdraw his paper from the
Society.

In June 1754 he persuaded Mr. Ehret, the famous botanical
artist, to accompany him to Brighton to continue his investigations.
Ehret's drawings are beautiful works of art, and singularly accurate
representations of the plants. A large collection of his drawings

The President's Address. By Wm. Carruthers. 115

is preserved in the Botanical Department of the British Museum,
and among them the original draft of Linnaeus's families of plants,
drawn by Ehret, and lettered by Linnaeus. This was executed when
Linnaeus was living in the house of his patron Clifford, at Hartekamp,
where Ehret went to make his acquaintance, and remained to make
drawings for the Hortus Cliffortianus.

At Brighton they found a Coralline with all its minute capillary
branches expanded, what we now call Antennularia ramosa. furthei
specimens of the Laomedea, and the Polyzoan, Flustra foliacea.
These he examined in salt water in a watch-glass under his Micro-
scope, and, in addition to the animals, he noticed little vesicles or
bladders (egg-vesicles of to-day) which were till then supposed to be
the seed-vessels of the plant, but which he concluded were the habi-
tations of young polyps.

In August of the same year he took a journey to the northern
shore of Kent, and had as his companion Prof. Oeder, of Copenhagen,
the original author of the Ieones Florse Danicse, the first volume of
which was published in 1751, and part after part has been issued
since, and yet the work is still unfinished. At Whitstable he got
some of the fishermen to collect the animals they found in their
fishing nets, and to place them at once in water. He found here for
the first time Alcyonium ramoso-diyitatum, &c, of Kay's Synopsis,
the large fleshy compound zoophyte which we still call Alcyonium
digitatum. The specimens, brought in buckets of sea- water, gradu-
ally expanded, and when the polyps were fully out, he took them
quickly from the water and plunged them into brandy, and thus
secured many of the expanded animals for further examination.

The study of the materials obtained in these excursions led to the
publication of Ellis's famous memoir, entitled ' An Essay towards a
Natural History of the Corallines, and other Marine Productions of
the like kind, commonly found on the Coasts of Great Britain and
Ireland.' London, 1755. In the copy presented to the Royal
Society by the author he inscribes in his own handwriting the more
definite date, " March 6, 1755. " The work has as its frontispiece an
engraving of one of his " Landscapes." It consists of 103 pages of
letterpress and 38 plates, to which is added an engiaving of " Mr.
Cuff's Aquatic Microscope, used in the Discoveries made in thir
Essay." The only aquatic element in the instrument is the stage,
which supported a watch-glass in which the objects could be examined
in water. Besides giving accurate figures of many species of marine
animals, Ellis settled the animal nature of many objects which had
been up to his time referred to the vegetable kingdom, and he
separated the Hydrozoa from the Polyzoa. He arranged the animals
described in the following classes : — 1. Vesiculated Corallines ; 2. Tu-
bular Corallines ; 3. Celhferous Corallines ; 4. Articulated Coral-
lines; 5. Keratophyta; 6. Eschara ; 7. English Corals; 8. Sponges;
9. Alcyonia; and 10. Other marine substances. The Vesiculated

i 2

116 Transactions of the Society.

Corallines, Tubular Corallines, Keratopbyta (Gorgonia), and Alcyonia
are Hydrozoa ; tbe Celliferous Corallines and Escbara are Polyzoa ;
while tbe Articulated Corallines and tbe Englisb Corals are Vege-
tables. Ellis detected tbe pores of tbe conceptacles in tbe Articulated
Corallines, tbe modern genera Corallina and Jania, and interpreted
tbein as tbe cells in which the animal lived. It is unfortunate that,
in separating the different groups, the name Corallina, whicb suggests
animal affinities, has been retained for tbe group that belong to the
vegetable kingdom. The English Corals are Nullipores. On this
essay rests the fame of Ellis. He had in contemplation a greater
work on Corallines, and had prepared a series of plates for illustration,
but be died before the work was ready for the press. Dr. Colander
prepared descriptions of the species, but before bis work was com-
pleted he suddenly died in 1782, and the volume was not published
until 1786.

The value of Ellis's work on tbe Corallines was recognised by tbe
Royal Society, and for it he received from them the Copley medal in
1768.

But Ellis did not confine himself to these marine animals. He
communicated twenty-four papers to the lioyal Society, which were
published in the Philosophical Transactions, and one to the Academy
of Sciences at Upsala.

His position as King's agent for the American colonies gave him
excellent opportunities for obtaining specimens, and urged him to
secure the introduction into them of useful plants, and the transmis-
sion of their products into Britain. He was appointed agent for
West Florida in 1764, and for Dominica in 1770. He gave much
attention to the transmission of seeds in conditions that would
preserve their vitality. He began by coating them with gums, var-
nishes, and paints, but as the result of many experiments be found
that a coating of beeswax and then completely investing them in
molten wax produced the best results.

He was very anxious to introduce the tea-plant into Britain. It
was thought it might grow freely here, and he was convinced that it
would be a great gain if it could be carried alive to Florida and tbe
other southern States. He sought out plants that would yield
useful textile fibres.

Ellis had an extensive correspondence with Dr. Alexander Garden,
and from him received many new plants and animals, and transmitted
many to Linnaeus.

Among his many friends may be included Dr. Stephen Hales,
Peter Collinson, John Fothergill, Daniel C. Solander, Eichard Warner,
and George D. Ehret. But he had relations with men who through
jealousy were far from friendly to him. Microscopes have greatly
improved in these hundred and fifty years, but men's tempers appear
to have been little altered. Philip Miller, tbe well-known Superin-
tendent of the garden at Chelsea of the Apothecaries' Company, and

TJie President's Address. By Wm. Carruthers. 117

author of the Gardeners' Dictionary, was not friendly with him.
He attacked his paper on the animal nature of Corallines by submit-
ting a reply to the Royal Society, and Ellis answered it at the next
meeting. Ellis had a final word about Miller when he told Linnaeus
of his leaving the Chelsea Gardens. He wrote, " Poor Miller,
through his obstinacy and impertinence to the Society of Apo-
thecaries, is turned out of the Botanical Garden of Chelsea. I am
sorry for it, as he is now seventy-nine years of age ; they will allow
him his stipend, but have chosen another gardener. His vanity was
so raised by his voluminous publications that he considered no man
to know anything but himself ; though Gordon, Aiton, and Lee have
been long infinitely superior to him in the nicer and more delicate
parts of Gardening." Gordon was held by Ellis in high esteem, and
he showed his appreciation by dedicating to him the genus Gordonia.
Ellis was always desirous of connecting a new genus with the name
of a friend who had done creditable work in his favourite science. And
in choosing new plants he was singularly happy in finding unde-
ecribed types, so that his genera are acknowledged to the present
day. Halesia, after Dr. Hales ; Gardenia, after Dr. Garden ; and
Gordonia, after Gordon, whose nursery was at Mile End, were new
forms, and they were so clearly described that they have been easily
recognised.

But to return to those who were not his friends ; it was to be
expected that he could not be cordial with Dr. John Hill, whose folio
volumes are as worthless as they are huge. His botany was of the
same quality as his physic, of which Garrick, in reference to a farce
written by Hill, said, —

" For physic and farces Ids equal there scarce is ;
His farces are physic, his physic a farce is."

Prof. Buttner, of Gottingen, was guilty of the most barefaced plagia-
rism, supported by falsehoods. Having heard Ellis's account of the
nature of Corallines at the Royal Society, he palmed it off' as his
own, and then asserted that Ellis got his knowledge from him. It
is no wonder that Ellis thanks Linnaeus " for supporting my character
against that insolent plagiary Buttner."

- I should not overlook his introduction of the Venus's Fly Trap to
science and to cultivation. His figure and description " of that most
rare and singular plant, than which certainly nothing more interest-
ing was ever seen " (Linnatus), are admirable. He gave it the name
of Dionasa muscipula, which it still retains.

Linnseus held Ellis in high esteem. He says of him, " You are
still the main support of Natural History in England, for your atten-
tion is ever given to all that serves to increase or promote this study
Without your aid the rest of the world would know little of the
acquisitions made by your intelligent countrymen in all parts of the
world. For my own part, I acknowledge myself to have derived

118 Transactions of the Society.

more information through your various assistance than from any other
person."

Of the extensive correspondence carried on between Linnaeus and
Ellis a portion only is preserved by Sir J. E. Smith in his Selection
of the Correspondence of Linnseus and other Naturalists ; sufficient,
however, to manifest the mutual benefits derived, and the general
gain to science. I cannot detain you any longer than to give an
illustration, I fear somewhat lengthy, of this correspondence. I
select passages from several letters referring to phenomena observed
in the germination of the spores of Fungi.

The first mention of this subject is in a letter to Linnaeus, dated
December 5, 1766. Ellis writes, " Peter Collinson spent the even-
ing with me, and showed me a letter you wrote to him about funguses
being alive in the seeds and swimming about like fish. You mention
something of it to me in your last letter." This letter is missing,
unfortunately. He continues, " If you have examined the seeds of
them yourself, and found them to be little animals, I should believe
it. Pray what time of the year, and what kinds ? I suppose they
must be taken while growing and in a vigorous state. I intend to
try. I think my glass will discover them, if they have animal life in
them. The seeds of the Equisetum palustre appear to be alive by
their twisting motion, when viewed through the Microscope ; but that
is not animal life."

Linnaeus replied in the following month, January 1, 1767 : —
" With regard to Fungi, you may pick up, in most barns or stacks
of corn, spikes of wheat or barley, full of black powder, which we
call ustilago, or smut. Shake out some of this powder and put it
into tepid water, about the warmth of a pond in summer, for three or
four days. This water, though pellucid, when examined in a concave
glass under your own Microscope, will be found to contain thousands
of little worms. These ought first to be observed to prevent ocular
deception. In mould, Mucor, you will find the same, but not so easily
as in the larger Fungi, If, in the course of from eight to fourteen
days, the water has been kept up to the same temperature, you may
observe how these minute worm-like bodies become fixed, one after
the other, and acquire roots. I have just printed a dissertation on
the Invisible World,* which shall be sent you by the first opportunity.

* This dissertation was published in 1767, and is contained in the seventh volume
of the Amcenitates Academical. It is chiefly devoted to the discoveries of Baron
Munchausen, who held that the dust (spores) of the Fungi were the ova of animal-
cules. Linnseus at first adopted this opinion, as appears from the above correspond-
ence with Ellis. He states it somewhat hesitatingly in the Systema Naturx (p. 132G).
The experiments of Ellis induced him to suppress this view in his subsequent pub-
lications, though he does not appear to have repudiated it. Linnaeus closes the
dissertation with a discussion of the nature of the animalcules which appear in
small-pox, anthrax, and similar diseases. There is an interesting practical fact
recorded in the treatise as to Baron Munchausen's treatment of his seed wheat. He
washed it with a lye made of lime and salt water, and for twenty years his crops
were free from smut, while it was destructively prevalent in his neighbours' crops.

The President's Address. By Wm. Carruthers. 119

These chaotic worms are nearly akin to the last species of animals
which 1 have placed in my Systema under the genus Chaos. ... I
have long been well acquainted with the elastic or jumping seeds of
Equisetum described by Staehelin in the Paris Memoirs, and still
longer with the elastic seeds (or rather capsules) of ferns in general,
known for above a century. These having no real vital motion, are
totally different from the vermicular bodies of Fungi, which are truly
alive."

The subject seems to have been laid aside for a while ; for in August
of the same year Ellis writes : — " I have not had time to try yours and
Baron Munchausen's experiments on the animalcules in the origin of
mushrooms and smut in corn ; but have recommended it to the public
to try the experiments. As soon as I do I shall communicate my
thoughts to you on the subject." Then in his letter dated September
8, he says, " I have lately been trying experiments on the seeds of
the Fungus called by you Agaricus campestris, and also on those
called the Agaricus fimetarius. The minuteness of these bodies
obliged me to make use of the first magnifying glasses in the dcuble
Microscope. This plainly showed to me that these seeds, though put
into water according to your directions, have no animal life of their
own, and are only moved about by the animahiila infusoria, which
give them such a variety of directions, both circular as well as back-
ward and forward, that they appear as if alive."

" The animalcula are so numerous, and at the same time so
pellucid, that without good glasses the most accurate observer may be
mistaken. I wait for an opportunity to try the seeds of the Lyco-
perda and the dust of the Ustilago in corn."

Linnaeus still holds to his opinion that fungus spores " are alive
in the seed," and in his answer to Ellis, dated October 1767, he
says : —

" I received yours, in which you speak of the living seeds of
Fungi, asserting that you have only seen the animalcula infusoria
moving the powder of these vegetables.

" I am not able rightly to understand whether you have actually
seen the animalcula or not. If really so, they ought, at the end of
fourteen days, to begin to attach themselves to the bottom of the
glass, first a solitary one, then several more adjoining to it, till almost
all of them are thus become fixed, after winch they grow up into
Fungi.

" With respect to the animalcula infusoria themselves, unless I
am totally mistaken, I think I have seen these to be the living seeds
of mould, Mucor. But before I venture to put forth such an opinion,
I beg of you to lend me your lynx-like eyes ; and you will see in the
vessel or glass, where there is so little water that it may soon evapo-
rate, whether these bodies do not change to plants of Mucor. This
point is of the greatest importance, and if my ideas be correct, we
shall no longer be surprised at the quantity of such animalcula in

120 Transactions of the Society.

common water, any more than at the mould itself on decaying
food, &c.

" I beg and intreat of you not to slight my request. You will
find it worth your while to look closely into the nature of these minute
beings, as they are related, though remotely, to your own marine
animalcula. Everybody wonders at the animalcula infusoria being
produced by an infusion of pepper, and such substances ; whereas the
difficulty vanishes if they belong to Mucor ; for pepper, if long kept
moist, is as liable to grow mouldy as anything else.

" Having once discovered the little worms in the Ustilago, by the
help of the Microscope, I can now see them with my naked eyes,
though less distinctly ; and I showed them a fortnight ago to some of
my pupils."

Ellis replied at the end of the month to Linnaeus : —
" I have received your obliging letter about the seeds of Fungi
being animated. By your letter you seem to think that the seeds of
the Fungi are animated, or have animal life, and move about ; my
experiments convince me of the contrary. I must first let you know
that I am convinced that in almost all standing or even river water
there are the eggs, and often the perfect animals, of those you call
animalcula infusoria. As soon as these meet with their proper
pabulum, they grow and increase in numbers equal to the Musca
vomitoria. I often have examined river water and pond water, and
scarce ever found it without some species of these animalcula, espe-
cially in summer and autumn ; besides, the same animalcula that
attack, eat, and move about the farina, or seeds of the Fungi, do
the same with other vegetables, as I have lately been convinced of by
a fair experiment. I have tried, at your request, my experiments
over again, and showed them to D. C. Solander. I will keep these
infusions, according to your desire, fourteen days, and examine the
particulars you desire of the animalcula fixing themselves, first one,
then many more, to the bottom of the glass, and will endeavour to
find out what you mean by their growing up into Fungi. If you
mean that animalia infusoria, when they are dead, are a proper
pabulum lor Mucor, I agree with you ; for I have many animal sub-
stances that are covered with Mucor, even between the Muscovy talcs
used on purpose for microscopic animals in the Microscope. But
what appears to me most difficult to comprehend is, for instance — I
have now a Lycoperclon Bovista, which 1 received from our good
friend P. Collinson four days ago. 1 put part of it into river water,
and in two days I perceived the seeds or farina of it moving about
distinctly. The fourth day I perceived the figure of the animalcula
that moved them. Are these seeds or these animalcula (for they are
evidently distinct bodies) to turn into Fungi, Mucores, or Lycoperda ?
This is what I do not comprehend in this new discovery. If the
animalcula that moved the seeds of the Lycoperdon [turned into
Fungi] it would be amazing ; and again, it would be as surprising

The President's Address. By Wm. Carruthers. 121

that the seeds of one genus should produce another ; for instance, that
the seeds of Ly coper da should produce Mucores. However, 1 have
determined to go through these experiments with precision, and to
call in witnesses of the several appearances.

" I have not yet got any of the Vstilago. If you will be so good
as to send me a spike of corn infected with it, proper for trial, you
may depend on me in carefully going through the experiments
properly."

Linnasus soon replied to this letter, though, as wo see, under a
misapprehension : —

" I am beyond measure delighted with your observations upon the
Lycoperdon in river water; that its powder moved about, and was
transformed into that species of Mucor which I have named Mucedo.
I have long suspected this Mucedo to belong to Lycoperdon ; but my
suspicion has never before been confirmed."

Ellis wrote again very soon, January 1768 : —

" In your letter of the 8th December, you seem to misapprehend
the meaning of the letter which I wrote to you the 30th October. I
find, on looking over the copy which I have of it, it runs thus, or
much to this purpose " — and he repeats the statements he had already
made. He then continues, " Thus far I thought it necessary to
quote from my former letter of 30th October, as my real opinion. I
have kept a regular journal of my observations in making experiments
on the seeds of the Fungi, which I have shown often to Dr. Solander,
to prevent any mistake ; and do assure you I have convinced him that
they do not move of themselves when kept in water ; but it appeared
evidently to him, and many more gentlemen who saw my experiments,
that the motion which they had proceeded from animalia infusoria,
whose shape we plainly saw, and observed distinctly the particular
motion, with some attention, which these little creatures had while
they were eating the seeds of the Fungi, and which they communi-
cated to the seeds of the Fungi, so as to make them appear alive."

He records the results of further experiments on animalcules in a
letter written in the following March : —

" I have now discovered why putrid vegetable substances yield
volatile alkaline salts, the same as animal substances. I put a rotten
potato into water about ten days ago, in a glass, and covered the top
with a card, having a weight on it to keep it close, and placed it on a
shelf in a room over the fire-place. In four days the water was full
of small animalcules, so that, I believe, for every particle of the
potato there were ten minute animals, as in the experiments with the
Fungi. In order to know for certain whether these animals came
from the potato or the water, I boiled a small potato till it was
ready to fall to pieces. I likewise boiled some water for half an hour,
and then put the mashed potato and the boiled water together in a
glass, and they were placed in the same warm situation with a card
over it. I examined a drop of the liquor four days after, and could

122 Transactions of the Society.

perceive millions of animalcules, of a tadpole shape, turning about the
crystalline round particles of the potato in all directions, just as I had
observed them turning the seeds of the Fungi last autumn. I must
inform you I used the largest magnifiers I had, which were the first
and second of Wilson's Microscope. I wish you would try the same
experiments : you will find many new scenes in nature will be dis-
covered by this hint. I have shown the experiment to Solander and
a very few friends, but have not yet made it public. I wish Baron
Munchausen would try the same."

One cannot fail to be impressed with the thoroughness and care
with which Ellis carried out his experiments, or to accept the conclu-
sions at which he arrived. On the other hand, Linnaeus was touching
the fringe of a great question in the life-history of Fungi which a
better Microscope would have probably led him to discover, but which
our more perfect instruments are only now fully developing.

123

III. — On Tube Length.
By Edward M. Nelson.

{Read 20th February, 1901 )

The subject of tube length has been but imperfectly treated in
microscopical literature, and nearly twenty years have elapsed since
anything has appeared about it in our Journal, although promises
were at the time made that it would be dealt with more fully. The
object then of this paper is to lay before the Society a brief account
of the subject in such a way that it may be understood by any micro-
scopist, whether he has any previous knowledge of mathematical
optics or not.

At the outset we may point out, that which nearly every rnicro-
scopist knows, that there are two tube lengths, viz. a mechanical
and an optical. The Mechanical Tube is measured from the end of
the nose-piece to the end of the draw-tube. The standard length
for the English tube is 8| in. (222 mm.), and for the Continental
160 mm. (6*3 in.). The mechanical tube does not in any way re-
present the distance by which the lenses of the eye-piece are separated
from those of the objective, as that obviously will depend upon the
manner in which those lenses are mounted, as well as upon the length
of the mechanical tube. In brief, the mechanical tube is the length
of the Microscope-body when in use.

We now come to the Optical Tube. This in the nature of things
should be nearly as easy to describe as the mechanical tube, but, owing
to the fact that there are two optical tube lengths, a detailed explana-
tion of some length will be necessary. Most microscopists are aware
that every lens and every combination of lenses have what is called
an equivalent lens. This equivalent lens is a mathematical abstraction,
for it can neither be made nor always drawn ; its position on the axis
need not necessarily be coincident with that of the lens to which it is
equivalent, so that it may be found sometimes inside and sometimes
outside the actual lens. Now the bearing this has upon the matter
before us is very important, as will be realised when it is understood
that two lenses are in optical contact when their equivalent lenses
are in contact, and not necessarily when there is physical contact
between the actual lenses themselves. For the benefit of those
unacquainted with this subject, fig. 18 shows a plano-convex in
optical contact with a converging meniscus, and it will be noticed
that the actual lenses are not touching one another. The actual
lenses are represented by continuous, and the equivalent lenses by
dotted lines. When two lenses are separated from one another, the
optical distance of their separation is not the distance between the

_ _9

124 Transactions of the Society.

actual lenses which could be measured by a foot rule, but it is

the distance between the equivalent lenses, and it is this distance

which may appropriately be termed the natural optical tube length.

When two lenses are in optical contact (tig. 18), the focus of the

combination is determined by dividing the product of

•piO 10 ff

their focal lengths by their sum ; thus, F = *'., where

F is the focus of the combination and/,/' the foci of

the plano-convex and the meniscus. For example, in

fig. 18, if / the focal length of one lens, is 2, and /'

2x3 6
that of the other, 3, then F = ^ -3 = 5 ; = H- When,

however, the equivalent lenses are separated by a distance d, which we
have called the natural optical tube length, it is necessary to subtract
this quantity from the sum of the foci in the denominator. For
example, let the same two lenses be separated by a distance 1, then

F = H- = 2 X 8 = H.* It must be pointed out that, in

f + f'-d 2 + 3-1 2 .

this case, F is positive and the image is erect ; but if the distance d,
the natural optical tube length, be increased so that it is greater than
the sum of the foci, F will become negative, which indicates that the

2x3
image will be inverted. Example: — let d = 8, then F = 9 , ._> _ o :

This is the condition which prevails in the compound Microscope.

One more little piece of elementary arithmetic, viz. that p, the
combined magnifying power, is determined from the focus by dividing
the conventional quantity 10 by the focus ; thus, in the last example,

p as — _ = — 5, the negative sign indicating the inverted image as

before ; conversely, if the magnifying power is known, the focus F

can be found ; thus F =- - = —^ — - 2. So far for the natural

p — o

optical tube length for the present; but we have another optical
tube length, viz. one which was introduced by Prof. Abbe, and
which may be called the conventional optical tube length A, to dis-
tinguish it from the one we have just been considering. Prof. Abbe's
tube length is the distance measured between the foci. Fig. 19
illustrates the two kinds of optical tube length, where the natural
optical tube length d is measured from e to E, and the conventional
A from / to F ; the plano-convex lens in the figure represents the
lens that is equivalent to the objective, but the eye-piece has both
lenses drawn. It will be noticed at once that A is equal to d less
the sum of the foci (e f+EF); in other words, A is the denominator

. ff ff

in our fraction above, viz. F = - • / -;, ^ = =^-r.

J + J — a — A

• This formula is given by Coddiugton (1830), part ii. p. 34.

On Tube Length. By Edivard M. Nelson.

125

Some of you will perhaps be wondering why the subject should
he complicated by the introduction of a new optical tube length.
The reason for it is that p, the magnifying power, is directly propor-
tional to the optical tube length A, but it is not proportional to that
of d. Thus, with the same objective and eye-piece, if we double A

Fig. id.

/

we double the magnifying power ; but this obviously will not be true
with regard to d.

Now, in order to ascertain practically the optical tube length
called d, we must find the position of the last surface of the lens
which is equivalent to the objective, and the first surface of that
equivalent to the eye-piece. (The terms first and last being referred
to a movement from the object towards the eye.)

Very often in Microscope lenses, both in objectives and eye-
pieces, we find the surfaces of the equivalent lenses crossed over,
i.e. the front surface lying behind the posterior surface ; and for this
reason it was previously stated that the equivalent lenses could be
neither made nor drawn. In the Huyghenian eye-piece, for example,
this inversion of the surfaces takes place, and the front surface E of the
equivalent lens of this eye-piece lies as far beyond the eye-lens as
the diaphragm is in front of the eye-lens ; and this is the point from
which the tube length d should be measured.

As to the objective, the position of the back surface of its equivalent
lens varies, so that it cannot be assigned once for all to any definite
place with regard to objectives generally ; sometimes it will be found
in front of the front lens, and sometimes behind it. So too in the case
of tube length A, the position of the back focus of the equivalent
lens of the objective cannot be defined generally ; but in the Huy-
ghenian eye-piece the front focus is situated half-way between the
diaphragm and the eye-lens. With Kamsden and positive eye-pieces,
the position of the front focus is at the diaphragm, or if there should
be no diaphragm, it can be easily found by turning the eye-lens
towards a window and by focussing the image of the window bars
upon a piece of paper.

We have now found a point in the eye-piece from which the
optical tube may be laid off, when its length is known ; and the
length of the optical tube may be determined in the following manner.

126' Transactions of the Society.

Place the Microscope in a horizontal position, and by means of the
objective to be measured, but without any eye-piece, project the image
of a stage micrometer on to a ground-glass screen,* making the distance
of the screen from the micrometer exactly 100 in. Divide the size
of the image on the screen by the size of the ruling on the micro-
meter, the quotient giving of course m, the magnifying power. Add
2 to m and move the decimal point one place towards the left hand,
and the result will be the initial magnifying power of the objective.

Look out this initial power in a table of reciprocals, and move
the decimal point one place to the right, the result will be the precise
local length of the objective. We see, therefore, that when once the
magnifying power for a projection distance of 100 in., measured
from the object to its image, is known, the focal length of the objec-
tive may be accurately determined, and that practically without calcu-
lation.

The next step is to select an eye-piece, of about 1-in. focus, or
10 power, and treat it exactly as if it were an objective, project the
image of the stage micrometer upon the screen at the distance of
100 in. (the eye-lens being used as the front lens of an objective),
and determine its precise focal length as above. One more measure-
ment is required, viz. the magnifying power of the objective when
combined with the eye-piece upon a fixed mechanical tube length ;
this also is better measured by projection than in any other manner.
The distance from the screen to the point beyond the eye-lens, where
the window bars would be brought to a focus, if the field-lens of the
eye-piece were pointed to them, should be exactly 10 in.| ; this com-
bined power we will call p. Returning now to the formulae, viz.

ff 10

F= , JJ ., = and F = — , previously mentioned, if these two are

f+f'-d .-.!>.

combined and simplified (p being negative changes the sign in

front of the fraction in which it occurs) ; the equation becomes

V ff
d = 2 J - +/ + /'• Now, as p the combined magnifying power,

f the equivalent focus of the objective, and / ' that of the eye-piece,
have all been determined, d the natural optical tube length is found.
By omitting to add the two last terms of the expression, the value of
A is obtained.

The following Table, which comprises a heterogeneous selection of
objectives, illustrates not only the variations in the lengths of the two
different optical tubes d and A, but also the effect these variations
have upon the power.

* It is convenient for this kind of work to have a scale engraved upon a glass
slip ; this, when held in the hand in contact with the ground-glass, may be moved
about until the lines of the projected image cut those upon the ruled scale.

t The precise spot from which the measurement shoul i be made is the posterior
focal point of the entire Microscope, but this is very close to the posterior focal point
of the eye-piece.

Objective

Powell 4 in. (1876)
Zeiss a* closed . .

Ross 3 ill

Powell 2 in. (1840)
Powell 1 h apo. . .
Powell 2 in. (1876)
Powell li (1876)
Zeiss a a 26 mm.
Zeiss 24 mm. apo.
Powell 1 in. (1840)
Powell 1 in. (1857)
Ross 1 in. (1836)
Ross 1 in. (1S40)
Zeiss A A 18 mm.
Beck ^(1850) ..
Powell | (1876)
Powell h (1840)

Zeiss 12 mm. apo.

Powell } (1876)

Ross % (1840) . .

Reicbert 8 mm. . .

Powell T + B (1876)

Powell J (1840)

Leitz P. 7 mm.

Powell i apo. ..

Ross $ (1840) . .

Powell J (1876)

38-3 4 03

42 -5 4 • 45

45 4-70

54 5 -60

(JO 6 . 20

63 6-50

77-5 7-95

: 96-7 9-87

10S 11-0

110 11-2

117 11-9

118 12-0
127 12-9
145 147
145 14-7
160 16-2
200 20-2
205 20-7
210 21-2

lei
° J.

o +

s

is v

■f ~

o o

I! "

215

21-7

225 22-7
310 31-2
370 37-2

390
395
395
460

39-2
39-7
39-7

46-2

2-481
2-247
2-128
1-786
1-613
1-538
1-258
1013
■909
893
840
S33
775
680
680
617
■495
■483
•472
•461
•441
•321
•269
•255
•252
•252
•216

E

+
+

So

II
1

G

oh

30
15-5
47
56
75
65
82
105
130
110
128
120
138
1G0
163
179
220
238
244
250
267
367
433
463
483
463
550

9-69

6-08

11-61

11-19

12-80
10-93
10-97
KV95
11-85
10-15
10-87
10-23
10 76
10-82
10-99
10-90

6-36
2-97
S-63
8-55

10-33
8-54
8-86
9-08

10-09

47
52
55
66
73
76
93

w

K

Si-e-

- 36

- 70
-14-5

- 15
+ 2-7
-14-5

- 12

115;- 8-7

129

+ 0-8

8-40 131 - 16

9-18 139 - 8-0

8-54 140 - 14

9-13 151 - 8-6

9-29 172 - 7

9-46 172 -5-2

9-43 190 - 5-8

29

+ 3 3

10-66

9-31

11-16

9-82

11-16

9-83

11-16

9-S4

11-36

10-06

11-24

10-06

10-78

9-96

11-19

10-08

11-51

10-40

11-08

9-97

11-22

10- 15

242
248
254
265
364
435
459
464
464
542

- 1-6

- 1-6

- 1-6
4-0-8
+ 0-8

- 0-5
+ 0-9
+ 4-1
-0-2
+ 1-5

39

+20-5

58

- 3-4

78

- 3-8

58

4- 12

78

+ 5-1

114

- 7-9

106

4- 23

117

- 6

117

+ 9-4

117

4- 2-6

117

+ 18

165

- 3

175

- 7-4

17<j

+ 1-7

234

- 6

212

+ 12

234

+ 43

234

4- 6-8

317

- 16

292

+ 26

468

- 7-5

425

+ 9

468

4- 3-2

468

- 11

468

+17-5

128 Transactions of the Society.

Let the initial magnifying power of an objective whose focus is

f be N, then N = -> ; and let n represent the initial magnifying

power of the objective calculated according to its designated focus <j>,

then n = - - ; and let ri be the initial magnifying power of the eye-
9

piece whose focus is /', then ri = ,., .

Column A contains the power m of the objective alone, measured
by projection upon a screen placed 100 in. from the object upon the
stage, no eye-piece being used.

B. The initial magnifying power N of the objective. This is ob-
tained by adding 2 to the figures in column A and dividing the sum

by 10.

C. The true focal length. This is found by looking up the figures
in column B in a reciprocal table, and moving the decimal point
one place to the right.

1). The combined power of the objective and eye-piece (the
mechanical tube being kept at 8f in.) measured by projection at a
distance of 10 in.* from the posterior focal point of the eye-piece.
The focal length of the eye-piece used was ■ 854.7, and ri its power

11-7.

E. The length of the optical tube d. This is found by multiplying
the product of the figures in columns C and D by • 8547, the focal
length of the eye-piece, dividing by 10, and adding the focal lengths
of the objective and eye-piece to the quotient.

F. The length of Prof. Abbe's optical tube A. This is the same
as E, omitting the adding of the focal lengths of the objective and
eye-piece.

G. In this column, p' is the calculated combined power of the
objective and eye-piece, assuming that A = 10 in. The focal length of
the objective /is that given in column C, and that of the eye-piece/'
is 0-8547 as before, p' = N»', or figures in column B X 11*7.

H. The percentage of error in the actual measured power in
column D, compared with the calculated power in column G. In
brief, it is the percentage of error due to the deficiency or excess of
the tube length above or below 10 in.

K. The calculated combined power p" of objective and eye- piece,
assuming that A = 10 in., and that 9 the focal length of the ob-
jective is true to its designation, i.e. that the 4 in. is a 4 in. and not
a 2^ ; that the ^ is a £ and not a ^, &c. p" = 11 ri.

L. The percentage of error in column 1) compared with that in K.

The figures in column K show what the magnification ought to
be, and what we ought to expect it to be. In the first lens, the lowest

* As a matter of fact the distance web 20 in., and the magnifying power was
halved. This plan ensures greater accuracy.

On Tube Length. By Edward M. Nelson. 129

power in the list, it will be noticed that the percentage of error is not
large, Powell having got over the difficulty of the loss in magnifying
power owing to the shortening of the optical tube (see column F), by
increasing the power of the objective ; the lens is nominally a 4 in.,
but in reality it is a 2^ in. In the second lens the nominal focus is
not given, so the values in K and L could not be filled in.

Ross 3 in. is rather overdone. It has 2 in. more optical tube than
Powell's 4 in., and so the reduction in its focal length has been too
great.

Powell's 2 in. (1876) is likewise overdone.

Zeiss 24 mm. apo. is also overdone. A in this instance is very
nearly 10 in.

Eoss 1 in. (1840) is another example of a lens with too short a
focal length ; his earlier objective, however, is about right.

The Zeiss 12 mm. apo. is also overdone, the tube length being
slightly less than 10 in. ; and so to a greater extent are Powell's
^ and l, the former being a ^ and the latter nearly a ^. Keichert's
8 mm. is an example in the other direction, the lens with a correct
tube length being considerably underdone. The Ross £ (1840) is
almost exactly right, both as regards focus and tube length.

If the figures in column F and H are compared, it will be seen
in F that in those cases where the tube length A is less than

10 in. there is a — sign in H, and vice versa ; but if a comparison
is made between the figures in E and H, a very different result will
be noticed; e.g., with a tube length d of 11*61 in E there is an
error of — 14 • 5 in H ; but with one of 12*8 there is an error
of 4- 2 • 7 ; another of 11*85 yields an error of 4- ' 8, and one of

11 "51 gives 4- 4*1 in error. These results bear out the statement
above that the combined magnifying power is not proportional to the
tube length d.

With regard to the formula for the initial power and the focus
in columns C and D, some explanation of their derivation is necessary.
Let a be the distance of the object from the lens, and a the distance
of the screen from the lens upon the other side. The relations of these
quantities to one another and to / the focus is fixed by the well-
known formula, which is given in every elementary text-book, viz.

- = — 4- -. a and a are both positive as they are measured
fa a

from the object to the lens, and from the lens to the image respec-
tively. There is one other common formula, viz. that the size of
the object bears the same proportion to the size of the image as
the distance of the object from the lens does to the distance of the

image from the lens. Thus, if o is the object and i its image, - =

—7 : but - is the magnifying power m, therefore m = — „ and a = — .
a o l a m

April 17 th, 1901 K

130 Transactions of the Society.

Putting this value of a in the equation ahove, we have — = — -f-

- = , and a = f (m + 1). This last expression is all we

should require if we could measure a, the distance of the ground-glass
screen from the equivalent lens, but this is just what we are unable
to do, because we do not know the position of the equivalent lens ;
we can, however, measure the distance of the object from its image,
and this distance, viz. a + a, we have made 100 in. Now, when
the image of an object is projected to a distance which is consider-
able in comparison to the focal length of the lens projecting it, the
object will be situated very close to the principal focus of the lens,
and therefore we may write f for a, without introducing any great
error.

We have then a +/ = 100, and a = f (in + 1) ;

therefore / (m + 1) + / = 100

100

and / =

m + 2

The error of which we have just been speaking increases as the

focal length of the objective increases, but is practically of no moment

provided that the distance of the object from the image remains

100 in. ; as we have in the Table no objective with as much as 3 in.

of focus, it might be as well to examine what the error will amount

to if a 3 in. objective is calculated by the above formula. Let m =

100
31-3, then/ = 7^T~h = 3*0. If the focal length is calculated by a

longer though strictly accurate formula, / = 2 '99713; the error
therefore is only + 0-00287. If a higher power is taken, the error

will be less. Let m = 48, then / = _ = 2*0; the longer

4o —J— Jj

formula makes / = 1-99917 ; the error is + - 00083, and quite
insensible.

The formula in column B is derived from this one ; for as the

initial power is equal to — , it is therefore equal to We

may therefore infer that in using these simple and convenient
formulae no error worthy of our consideratiou has been introduced
into the Table.

In fig. 19, the objective and the curves of the lenses of the eye-
piece are diagrammatic, but the position of the lenses of the eye-piece,
as well as the surfaces E E' and the foci F F' of its equivalent lens.
are correctly placed. It will be seen that the front surface E of the
equivalent lens is behind the back surface E', but the front focus F is

On Tube Length. By Edward M. Nelson. 131

in front of the back focus F'. The front surface and focus are repre-
sented by long lines, while the back surface and focus are indicated
by shorter lines. The tube A should be measured from F, a point
situated between the eye- lens and the field-lens, at a distance from
the eye-lens equal to one-fourth of the distance between the eye-lens
and field-lens. The tube length d is measured from E, a point lying
a littie further beyond the eye-lens than the diaphragm does in front
of it.

The point F', the back focus of the eye-lens, is important, because
close to it lies the back focal point of the entire Microscope. This
point can be readily found by using the eye-piece as a simple lens and
focussing the window bars on a piece of paper, the field-lens being,
of course, turned towards the window. It is important that the point
F should be kept in a certain fixed position with regard to the
mechanical tube, and manufacturers should be more careful in this
respect. The great bulk of Microscopes have Huyghenian eye-piece3,
and the common practice of makers, both here and on the Continent,
is to let the eye- lens rest on the top of the tube ; the two exceptions
to this rule are Powell's, which have been ringed since 1839, and Zeiss'
new compensating Huyghenians.

Every microscopist wishes to be able to determine the magnifying
power of his Microscope, by merely multiplying the initial power of
the objective by that of the eye-piece.

Let c be the conventional distance of accommodation, p the power
of the entire Microscope, while N and n' are the initial powers of
the objective and eye-piece respectively ; then, as we have seen above,

G G C

F = ,f===, and/' = — ; inserting these values in the first equa-
tion F = =4? , we have p = •, so that, when A is made equal

Ac

to c, jp = N ri, the condition desired by every Microscopist.

Now if we turn to old works on the Microscope, we shall find
various values assigned for c. Baker in 1743 makes c = 8 in. ; both
Brewster and Pritchard in 1837 make it equal to 5 in. ; but Pritchard
in 1838 and Ross in 1839 increase it to 10 in. So, too, if we examine
old Microscopes, we shall find corresponding differences in the length
of the mechanical tubes. Old non-achromatic Microscopes had short
objective mounts, but the eye-piece was screwed to the top of the body,
so that the value of A for all except very low powers was just about
8 in., and therefore the formula j) = N»' gave a fairly accurate idea
of the magnification. An early achromatic Microscope by Hugh
Powell (a compound and single Microscope, dating about 1839) had
a mechanical tube of 7^ in. ; this reduction of ^ in. allowed for the
increased length of the mount of the achromatic objective. A little
later we find that c is increased to 10 in. ; and then we meet with an
increase of 1 ^ in. in the mechanical tube ; the objective mount is also
lengthened to about the size it is at the present time ; and the eye-

k 2

132 Transactions of the Society.

piece has a collar or ring fitted to it which raises its front focus to
about the level of the top of the tube.

In column F the result of such a mechanical tube length upon
the value of A is clearly seen. Column H shows the percentage of
loss or gain in power, owing to the difference between the actual optical
tube length A and a theoretical one of 10 in. It will be seen that
there is an error of 8 per cent, with a 1 in. objective ; but with powers
higher than that it quickly vanishes. The error with very old ob-
jectives is necessarily greater, because they have shorter mounts.

In a Microscope with a short tube A = 6 in., consequently if we
want p to equal m m' we must adopt an optical fiction, and assume for
the same objective a different initial power when it is used upon a
short tube than when upon a long tube. Thus the initial power

of a £ in. is _— ■ = 20 ; but if we wish to use this lens upon a short
tube we must consider it as - or 12 ; moreover, we must treat the

2

eye-piece differently, and leave it the same value as it had before ;
then, when we have assigned these values to m and m', the power
p of the short tube Microscope will be represented by their product.

The firm of Messrs. Zeiss treat the subject differently, and cata-
logue the power of their objectives as calculated for the long tube,
and give a fictitious value to the magnification of their eye-pieces ;
thus, for example, the same eye-piece is catalogued as an 8-power
for the short and as a 12-power for the long tube.

In 1860 the Wenham binocular was invented, and the effect of its
introduction was to lengthen the tubes in order to avoid too steep an
angle of convergence for the eyes ; to this may be traced the origin of
those Microscopes one occasionally sees, with enormously long bodies.
Powell's tube length was hardly affected by the Wenham binocular,
because a separate monocular body was provided.

If, in conclusion, these few remarks should induce any maker to
lengthen the mount of his low-power objectives and shorten those of
high power, and at the same time make his Huyghenian eye-pieces so
fit the body tube that the front foci will all lie at the top of the tube,
they will not have been written in vain.

Note. — If any one wishes to obtain hypercritically approximate results, when
dealing with very low-power objectives by the formula in column C, be may apply a

100
correction by subtracting -, — r~T\5 from the values given there. But this correc-
tion should be applied only to very low-power objectives, where m is less than 50.
This correction, like the principal formula, may be found without calculation in
Barlow's Tables (Spon), a book indispensable to all microscopists interested in
optical science. The Microscope lens of lowest power is nominally a G in. (actually
a 4 in.) ; but when the correction is applied, the formula is applicable to photographic
lenses up to 15 in. of focus, a distance of 100 in. between the object and image being
maintained.

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES

RELATING TO

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY

(principally invertebrata and cryptogamia),

MICROSCOPY, Etc.*

ZOOLOGY.

VERTEBRATA.
a. Embryolog-y.f

Can Extract of Sperm act as a Fertilising Agent Pj — Dr. Hans
Winkler put the sperm-material of Sphserechtnus granularis or of Arbacia
pustulosa into distilled water, left it with repeated shakings for half an
hour, filtered five or six times through three folds of filter-paper, ad-
justed the salinity to that of normal sea-water, and added unfertilised
eggs of the same species. In some cases a small number of the ova
showed signs of segmentation (apparently with mitoses), regularly for
one or two cleavages, and then irregularly. In another experiment he
placed the sperm-material in water with about 20 p.c. of salt (to kill
them), and with this method he had similar results. What the nature
of the stuff is that passes through the filter remains quite obscure, nor
does the author regard his work as more than tentative. He reviews
some analogous experiments by others.

Does Nutrition influence the Determination of Sex?§ — Dr. J.
F. Gemmill has extended and confirmed some previous observations ||
bearing on this problem. If it be granted that high-level limpets and
mussels are relatively starved when compared with low-level forms,
it might be expected that this would be seen in some disproportion
between the sexes. But the author's results show that there is not a
greater relative proportion of males in the upper zones or of females in
the lower zones.

Reaction of Developing Sea-Urchins to Environment. IF — Dr. H.
M. Vernon kept the impregnated ova of Strongylocentrotus lividus for

* The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial " we," and they do
cot hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers noted,
nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of this part of
the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually published, and to
describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, &c, which are either new or have
not been previously described in this country.

t This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so called,
but also those dealing witli Evolution, Development, Reproduction, and allied subjects.

X Nachricht. Ges. Gottingen, 1900, Heft 2, pp. 187-93. •

§ Commuuications Millport Station, i. (190U) pp. 32-6.

| Cf. this Journal, 1897, p. 27.

i Proc. Roy. Soc., lsvii. (1900) pp. 85-101.

134 SUMMARY OF CUEEENT EESEAECHES RELATING TO

various periods during development at an abnormal temperature, and
compared the size of the larvae with that of others allowed to grow
normally. He was thus able to prove that the permanent effect of tem-
perature on the growth diminished rapidly and regularly from the time
of impregnation onwards. Exposure to about 8° C. for an hour at the
time of impregnation ju'oduced an average diminution of 4*1 p.c. in
the size of the larvae measured after eight days' growth ; by exposure
during the 4th hour after impregnation a diminution of about 1*2 p.c.
was brought about; during the 15th hour about 0-2 p.c. Exposure to
about 22° produced an increase in size, about 1*1 p.c. for each hour's
exposure in the 4th hour; to 0*4 in the 14th; to 0*13 in the 46th;
and to 0-01 in the 120th hour.

Exposure to a temperature of 26° during the first few hours of
development produced a diminution of from 20 "8 to 7 - 4 p.c, but in
the later hours an increase of 4*3 to 11-0 p.c. The reaction of the
organism to a constant environmental condition was thus a variable one.
Tins is probably explicable by the fact that the temperatures necessary
to kill the organisms, and presumably also those which cause an un-
favourable effect on growth, rise steadily during development. Thus
the death temperature is about 28 '5° for unsegmented ova, 34° for
blastulae, and 40° for plutei. The impregnated ova were also found
to be much more sensitive to changes in the salinity of the water during
the early stages of development than during the later ones.

Accelerating Effect of Heat upon Growth.* — Prof. T. W. Gallo-
way has experimented with developing ova of Rana sylvestris, Ambly-
stoma jjunctatum, and Bufo americana, which were subjected to three
different temperature conditions, but without other food than that con-
tained in the egg and the surrounding albumen. He sought to discover
whether the increased growth due to raised temperature is brought about
by accelerated imbibition of water or by increased anabolic metabolism.
So far as the results go, they point to the conclusion that it is chiefly
the imbibitory process which is accelerated by heat.

Production of Double Embryos from Newt's Eggs.f — Dr. W. Ton-
koff has done tor the ova of Triton tseniatus what O. Schultze and
G. Wetzel have done for frogs' eggs. The artificially fertilised ovum
is placed in a drop of water on a glass plate, with glass bars of suitable
thickness on each side; the animal pole comes as usual to the top; a
covering plate, fixing the egg, is laid on ; and the whole is turned
through 180°, bringing the animal pole to the underside. In a variable
number of cases this results in dvijlicitas ventralis or lateralis, as the
author describes in detail.

Experimental Embryology.* — Dr. G. Cutore finds that by varnish-
ing the eggs of the common fowl, in whole or in part, it is possible
to produce anomalies of development, especially as regards the central
nervous system. He describes in detail the various malformations pro-
duced, compares them with similar appearances noted by various authors
in incubated eggs, and assigns as a common cause the insufficient aera-
tion of the eggs.

* Amer. Nat., xxxiv. (1900) pp. 949-57 (6 figs., 4 tables).
t SB. Preuss. Akad. Wisa., 1900, pp. 794-7 (1 tig.),
j Anat. Anzeig., xviii. (1900) pp. 391-414 (12 tigs.X

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 135

Maturation and Fertilisation.* — Dr. P. Poljakoff, in the course of
his studies on the biology of the cell, has directed his attention to the
sexual elements of the much-investigated Ascaris megalocejphala, and, as
the result of his work on this and other forms, puts forward some new
conclusions. He finds that the head of the spermatozoon consists
chiefly of nucleolar substance, the middle piece contains the lininogen
corpuscles, and both are surrounded by an envelope of linin substance,
which also forms the tail when this is present. The germinal spot of
the egg-nucleus is regarded by the author as a nucleolus (= nuclear
corpuscle). He opposes the usual view that the chromatin is of supreme
importance in fertilisation or cell-division, and regards the nucleolus
(nuclear corpuscle) as the important central organ of the cell. To the
linin substance he assigns the power of taking up nutritive substances
from the surrounding medium, and believes that the phenomena of fer-
tilisation, as well as of cell-division, can all be satisfactorily explained
in terms of the cell-physiology, as the result of the nutritive processes
within the cell. He re-describes these phenomena from this point of
view, some parts of the descriptions, e.g. the emphasis laid on the differ-
ences as regards food-material between egg and sperm, following lines
already made familiar by others.

Germinal Vesicle of Amphibian Eggs.f — The late Prof. J. B.
Carnoy and H. Lebrun made a series of observations on the nuclei of
the eggs of various Anura (species of Bufo, JRana, Ac.), which are pub-
lished by the latter author as the second part of a joint memoir on the
general subject. In default of a general summary of results by the
authors, details may be given for Bufo vulgaris. In it the nuclear coil
of the oogonium disappears rapidly to form a number of primary nucleoli,
which fuse to form a large nucleolus. This large nucleolus then breaks
up (undergoes " resolution ") with the production of " bottle-brush "
and plumose figures in the caryoplasm, as well as of scattered secondary
nucleoli. These nucleoli become vacuolated, and are resolved with the
formation of rods and threads, which give the nucleus temporarily its
original reticulated appearance. The resolution of the nucleoli is fol-
lowed by the vacuolation of the nucleus, which gradually disappears.
Of its nucleoli some eight or nine only are left; these become converted
into the chromosomes at the time of the formation of the spindle. The
chief points of contrast with the eggs of Urodela, no less than the
minor differences occurring among the Anura, are in regard to the exact
method in which the process of " resolution " is accomplished.

Pluriovular Follicles in the Rabbit.; — Ch. Honore has found in
the same ovary a number of follicles containing more than one ovum.
Cases where two, three, four, or even nine ova were present were seen.
The general aspect of these follicles seems to the author to cast doubt
upon Stoeckel's explanation that the phenomenon is due to division of
an originally single ovum. The occurrence of so large a number as
nine is in itself against the hypothesis, and further, the ova contained
within one follicle were in such various stages of development as to

* Arch. Mikr. Anat., lvii. (1900) pp. 9-54 (3 pis.).

t La Cellule, xvii. (1900) pp. 201-b'o.

X Arch. Biol., xvii. (1900) pp. 489-97 (1 pi.)

136 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

make a common origin very doubtful. On the other hand, the author
believes that the appearances are readily explained on the hypothesis
that in Pfliiger's tubes in the embryo the primordial ova, instead of
being isolated with their follicular cells by the ingrowth of the con-
nective-tissue, were left in groups round which the sheath of connective-
tissue formed.

Peripheral Nervous System of Salmo salar.* — Dr. E. G. Harrison
finds that in the development of the nerves of the salmon, the nerves
clearly originate from single cells, there is no indication of the occur-
rence of chains of cells. The spinal ganglia arise from wandering
cells which separate themselves from the medullary cord, and, migrating
ventrally, arrange themselves in little clusters which form the ganglia.
These are therefore not primitively metameric. For a long period the
cell-clusters remain undifferentiated, the cells then become bipolar, and
send one of their prolongations upward to the medullary cord. The
medullary cord consists chiefly of epithelial cells with a central zone
of "germ-cells" (His), and a peripheral zone of neuroblasts. The
medullary canal arises by the fusion of intracellular vacuoles which
arise within the central cells. Most of the neuroblasts become pear-
shaped, and send out a long process which forms a nerve-fibre. The
" posterior cells " (giant-cells of Bohon) arise in the dorsal part of the
cord, give rise to one or two prolongations, and migrate towards the
centre of the cord, the prolongations remaining in the original position.
Of these prolongations or fibrils certain become metameric peripheral
nerves, the majority are confined to the cord. The posterior cells de-
generate as the yolk-sac disappears, and are to be regarded as the
homologues of the spinal ganglion-cells, which in the later stages of
development take over their functions. They are to be compared with
the " transient ganglion-cells " of Beard in Rata.

Development of Peripheral Nerves.t — Prof. F. Eaffaele has studied
the structure of the nerves in embryos of Lophius and in larval Am-
phibians. He finds that the evidence clearly points to their origin
from a chain of cells united by their extremities, or perhaps rather from
continuous protoplasm in which the cells are represented by their nuclei.
He figures the developing nerves showing the nuclei imbedded in the
protoplasm. Elongation of the nerves is produced by the mitotic divi-
sion of the nuclei, followed by an increase in length of the cells. A
striking figure shows the bifurcation of a developing nerve ; in it the
products of nuclear division lie side by side instead of end to end, and
the protoplasm has split into two threads.

Development of Sympathetic System. J — Dr. C. K. Hoffmann has
investigated the development of this system in Acantliias vulgaris, as a
type of Selachians. Like Balfour and Van Wyhe, he finds that tbe
sympathetic ganglia originate as little swellings on the rami ventrales
of the spinal nerves. These swellings become differentiated into two
parts, of which the one consists of large nerve-cells and forms the sym-
pathetic ganglion proper ; while the other and larger part, which

* Arch. Mikr. Anat., lvii. (1901) pp. 354-444 (3 pis. and 7 figs.).

t Anat. Anzcig., xviii. (1900) pp. 337-44 (11 figs.).

X Verh. K. Akad. Wet. Amsterdam, vii. (1900) pp. 1-80 (3 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 137

■consists of " chi'omaffiue " cells, forms with its fellows the supra-renal
body. Of the ganglia as first formed, the first five (I-V) disappear
during the early stages of development ; the next ten or eleven (VI- XV
or XVI) fuse to form one large ganglion, with simultaneous degeneration
of the first five of them (VI-X). From the fifteenth or sixteenth ganglion
onwards, the ganglia persist as definite structures. In regard to the
question of the existence of a sympathetic nervous system in the head,
the author points out that a difficulty in the comparison of cranial and
spinal nerves seems to lie in the non-applicability of Bell's law to the
former. He suggests that an explanation of this apparent anomaly may
be found in the supposition that the cranial nerves, no less than the
spinal, have arisen by the union of sensory and motor elements ; but
while in the latter case the union takes place outside the central nervous
system, in the former it takes place within. In consequence, the large
peripheral ganglia of the dorsal cranial nerves must be supposed to
contain sympathetic elements, and the nerves must contain sensory,
motor, and sympathetic elements. Where, as in the higher Vertebrates,
special " sympathetic " ganglia exist in the head, the ganglia must con-
tain cerebro-spinal in addition to sympathetic elements. In Selachians the
interrenal organ arises in connection with the tubules of the mesonephros,
and is thus contrasted with the suprarenal ; but the author is not per-
fectly convinced that it can be regarded as completely homologous with
the cortical part of the adrenal of Birds and Reptiles. In Selachians
the interrenal arises entirely behind the developing genital organ ; in
Birds and Reptiles the cortical part of the adrenal has a close relation to
the genital organ ; a distinction to which considerable importance is
attached.

Post-Larval Changes in Vertebral Articulations in Salamanders.*
— J. Percy Moore notes that in Spelerpes ruber, for instance, the verte-
brae are both osteologically and physiologically "amphiccelous during
late larval life and for a time after the metamorphosis ; that during the
prime of life they are still amphiccelous as far as the strictly bony
portions of the centra are concerned ; but if, as seems more logical, the
cartilaginous structures also are considered, they cannot be characterised
otherwise than as opisthoccelous ; and that in old age they are opistho-
ccelous. There is thus a progress throughout life from a primitive to
a more specialised type. Similar changes occur in Desmognaihus fusca
and other forms.

Development of Teleostean Vertebral Column f — S. Ussow con-
trasts the Teleostean vertebral column with that of Selachians and
Holostei. In Selachians the vertebra arises entirely at the expense
of the cartilaginous elements of the bases of the arches, the fibrous
sheath of the notochord serving as the locus of development. In
Holostei it developes similarly from the cartilaginous elements of the
arches, and also at the expense of the intercalaria and an independent
ossification of the perichordal connective-tissue, which unites the arch-
bases with the intercalaria, and covers with a bony layer the peripheral
portions of the fibrous notochordal-sheath in the parts free from the
cartilage of the arch-bases. Thus the vertebra rises not in, but over aud

* Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1900, pp. 613-22.
t Bull. Soc. Imp. Nat. Moscou, 1900, pp. 175-240 (4 pis.).

138 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

around, the fibrous notochordal-sbeatb, and the notochord atrophies
early, playiug little part in the formation of a vertebra. In Teleostei
(Gasterosteus, Leptocephalus, Cyclopterus, &c), the vertebra developes out-
side tbe notochordal-sheaths, exclusively at the expense of the cells
of the perichordal connective-tissue. The cartilaginous arch-bases are-
in the majority of cases passive, whilst the notochord and its sheaths
are more important, especially in the inter-vertebral spaces. In short,
the vertebra of Teleostei is a specialised form of the vertebra of
Holostei. But this is only a suggestion of the author's main results.

Ear-Bones of Opossum. * — E. Weil finds in a study of Dklelphys
murina confirmation of the conclusion that the malleus is a derivative of
the mandibular arch, and that the incus is likewise. The continuity of
incus and malleus is clear, and it is plain that the incus has absolutely
no relation with the hyoid arch.

Two Hearts in a Pigeon. j — C. I. Constantinescu gives a descrip-
tion of a rare abnormality — two complete and normally formed four-
chamhered hearts in a pigeon. The larger was ventral, the smaller
dorsal; theie was no communication between them; there were abnor-
malities in the arterial trunks and veins, but the heart had been cut
out before the author got it. There must have been a complete duplicity
in the development of the primitive cardiac tubes. A few — somewhat
vaguely recorded — analogous cases are referred to.

Origin of Lymphoid Elements of the Thymus in Teleosts. + —
Prof. J. Nusbaum and Th. Pryrnak find that in Salmo fario and Caras-
sius vulgaris large numbers of lymphoid elements ("lymphoid nuclei"),
which are to be observed in the earliest stages of the thymus, originate
from the (endodermic) ejnthelium of the pharyngeal mucous membrane
in the branchial region — a conclusion of importance. It seems to the
authors that this is the real source of the lymphoid elements of the
thymus. In later stages they also observed a marked migration of
leucocytes from the thymus into the surrounding tissue — a fact of im-
portance in connection with the functional role of the thymus in fishes,
and in accordance with Dr. Beard's results as to Selachians.

Pseudobranch of Amia calva.§ — Mr. E. P. Allis has made a detailed
study of the pseudobranchial circulation in embryos of this Ganoid.
He finds that the nature of the blood-supply shows that the pseudo-
branch is the homologue of the spiracular clemibranch of Selachians.
There is some uncertainty as to whether it belongs to the mandibular or
the hyoidean arch, though the comparison with Selachians suggests the
former arch as the region of origin.

b. Histology.

Histological Study of Crystals. || — Pi of. 0. Biitschli has already
extended his detection of alveolar structure from cytoplasm, to sub-

* Ann. New York Acad. Bci., xii. (1899-1900) pp. 103-7 (2 pis.).
t Hull. Soc. Sci. Bucarest, ix. (1900) pp. 403-5.
X Anat. Anzeig., xix. (1901) pp. 6-19 (-1 figs.).
§ Zool. Jahrb., xiv. (1900) pp. 107-34 (1 pi).

|| ' Unter&uchungen iiber Mikrostrukturen dcs erstarrten Fchwefels, etc.,' Leipzig,.
1900, 4to, 96 pp., 4 pis., 6 figs. Sec Amer. Nat., xxxiv. (1900) p. 976.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 139

stances like starch, cellulose, and chitin ; and lie finds hints of it in
crystals of sulphur and of certain salts. In the forming crystal he also
■finds radial lines proceeding from a centre, structurally like the radia-
tions of asters, both being due to a central pull exerted on an alveolar
structure. The work is of biological interest, not only in regard to the
point here noted, but for the discussion of the growth and polymorphism
of crystals, and the determination of the polymorphic form by external
conditions.

Intestinal Mucous Membrane of Lota vulgaris.* — Profs. E. Yung
and 0. Fuhrmann note several important features in the intestine of
Lota. Comparing the distribution and structure of the elements of
the mucous membrane with those in ScyUium, they observe : — (1) The
buccal cavity contains distinctly fewer goblet-cells, while on the other
hand there are many " sacciform glands " which have no homologue in
the dog-fish. (2) The oesophagus has the same structure as the mouth.
It is completely devoid of ciliated epithelium, which is abundant in
ScyUium. This region is therefore not homologous in these two types
of fish. (3) The peptic glands of the stomach, uniformly tubular and
covered with pepsin-cells in the two types, are in Lota grouped into
sets of tubes opening into a common neck, while in ScyUium they are
simple and uniformly distributed in the mucous membrane. (4) The in-
testine is characterised by the presence of solid glands (glandes pleines)
over its whole extent. These glands are wanting in ScyUium. (5) The
stratified pavement epithelium resembles that of the buccal cavity. In
ScyUium it covers the whole of the cloacal region, while in Lota it is
limited to the edge of the anus. The last portion is thus not a cloaca,
and although separated from the middle part of the intestine by a valve,
yet undoubtedly belongs to it.

Alimentary Canal of Birds.f — Dr. K. E. Schreiner has investigated
the minute characters of the oesophagus and stomach in a number of
families of birds. He finds that while in Larus the oesophageal glands
are of great simplicity, those of the duck are of a complicated character.
But he has been able to draw up a list of transitional forms, and finds
further that the difference between the glands of a reptile such as Testudo
and those of Larus, is hardly greater than that between Larus and the
duck. In regard to the stomach, the point of most interest is the
relation of the so-called " blind-sacs " of the proventriculus to the com-
pound glands of that region, and to the glands of the gizzard. As in
some birds (e.g. Uria, Tringa) the blind-sacs possess cells similar to
the secretory cells of the compound glands, the author concludes that
sacs and glands have a common origin in the simple tubular glands of
reptiles, and have both arisen as the result of a concentration of glandular
surface, rendered necessary by the division of the stomach into two
parts. This conclusion is supported by the comparative morphology
of the blind-sacs in the different families of birds. It is probable that
the glands of the gizzard are the homologues of these proventricular
blind-sacs, but this is not quite certain. This paper includes a descrip-

* Arch. Zool. Exper., viii. (1900) pp. 333-51 (2 pis.).

t Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., lxviii. (1900) pp. 481-581 (6 pis. and 11 figs.).

140 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

tion of the musculature and connective-tissues of the gut in the families
of birds studied.

Micro-Chemistry of Nerve-cells.* — Mr. F. H. Scott supports the
view that all iron-holding nuclein compounds are derived from pre-
existing ones, and that in mitosis all the iron-holding substance of the
cell is in the nuclear chromatin. The Nissl granules are morpho-
logical elements of the nerve-cell, of a nucleo-proteid nature, containing
" masked " iron and organic phosphorus, and are derived from the
nuclear chromatin of the germinating cells. The nucleolus of the nerve-
cell has an oxyphile centre with a basophile covering. The latter seems
to correspond to the original kinetic chromatin of the germinal cells,
and, like the oxyphile nuclear substance, contains iron and phosphorus.
All the three nuclein compounds of the adult nerve-cell are derived
from the mitotic chromatin of the primitive nerve-cell. It follows that
the Nissl granules are constituted of chromatin that has diffused from
the nucleus into the cytoplasm.

Relation of Nerves to Muscle.f — Dr. Chr. Sihler has studied this
question in the frog, and finds that the terminal fibrils of the motor
nerves lie upon the sarcolemma, and are invested by Schwann's sheath
and by nuclei up to their ends. Whether or not these membranes
actually separate the nerve and muscle substance at the points of contact,
is still undetermined, but the author considers that more stress should
be laid on these points of contact than on the nerve-endings. In the
frog, and in certain muscle-fibrils in the snake, Henle's sheath is open
and fuses with nothing, whereas in the typical end-plate it covers the
terminal fibrils like a cap. In the frog there is no " sole," so that this
structure can form no necessary part of the stimulating apparatus of the
muscle. The " sole " substance when present must be regarded as the
protoplasm of the endothelial cells forming the terminal swelling of
Henle's sheath ; the nuclei of the end-plate belong partly to these cells,
partly to the terminal part of Schwann's sheath. In unstriped muscles
there are no end-plates, but merely a terminal network of nerve-fibrils.
In connection with the capillaries in the frog there is an even richer
supply of nerve-fibrils than in the muscular tissue, the fibrils ending as
in unstriped muscle. Their function is complex, for they are connected
both with the sensory nerves and with the nerves which surround the
arteries and veins, and so influence the capillaries as to produce an in-
creased transudation of lymph, and not a mere widening of the lumen.
This active change in the walls of the capillaries the author compares
to the contraction of muscle.

Histology of the Blood, f — Profs. P. Ehrlich and A. Lazarus have
made a very important contribution to hseinatology in this treatise on
the cellular elements of the blood in health and disease. That lympho-
cytes and leucocytes are quite distinct types of white blood-corpuscles ;
that the cell-granules are of great importance ; that chemiotaxis plays
an important part in the emigration of cellular elements from marrow to

* Trans. Canadian Inst., vi. (1890) pp. 405-88 (1 pi.).
t Zcitschr. wiss. Zool., lxviii. (1900) pp. 323-78 (2 pis.).

t ' Histology of the Blood: Normal and Pathological.' Edited and translated
by W. Myers. Cambridge, 1900, 8vt>, xii. and 216 pp.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 141

blood and from blood to tissue, are tbree characteristic tbeses of what
some experts have already called an epoch-making book.

Blood of Rabbit.* — Dr. N. Tschistowitscb and Dr. W. Piwowarow
have studied the morphology of the blood in embryos and new-born
young of the rabbit. They tind that the following kinds of leucocytes
occur: — (1) Polvnuclear leucocytes, with nuclei which appear to be
intermediate between those of neutiophilous and eosinophilous leuco-
cytes in man ; (2) large polynucleated leucocytes with non-granular
protoplasm, which form a transition to (3) large, mononuclear leucocytes
with large oval nuclei ; (4) lymphocytes, small leucocytes with rounded
nuclei. The total number of leucocytes was always small. In both
embryos and new-born young, many nucleated erythrocytes occurred.
The paucity of leucocytes in foetal blood the authors explain as due to
the peculiar method of life, the maternal leucocytes acting as a means of
protection against the risk of attack by micro-organisms. After birth
the leucocytes rapidly increase in number.

Nomenclature of Connective-Tissue Elements, f — Prof. W. Wal-
deyer considers that all the following— connective-tissue proper, elastic
tissue, mucoid tissue, cartilage, bone, dentine, pigmented connective-
tissue, adipose tissue, and lymphoid tissue — should be classed as "ground-
substance tissues." All possess (1) " ground-substance cells " ; (2) " inter-
cellular substance," which usually consists of basophilous amorphous
ground-substance, and scattered ground-fibriHa*, which do not form
bundles and are often invisible in fresh preparations ; (3) " intercellular
fibrilla?," differing from the above in that they are visible in fresh
preparations, and are of various kinds, such as elastic fibrillae, white
fibrilla?, and so on.

Fat Absorption.^ — Prof. Julius Arnold finds that when fatty sub-
stances are introduced into the dorsal lymph-sac of the frog, or beneath
the skin of the back in the guinea-pig, the wandering cell may take up
the particles of fat by a phagocytic process. The cells then display
droplets of fat lying between the structural elements of the cell. It is
otherwise with the fatty granular cells which also make their appearance.
In them the fat is contained in granules which originate from the modified
plasmosomes of the cell. That these fatty granules are modified plasmo-
somes is shown clearly by their position in the cell and their relation to
the cell-constituents, no less than by their staining reactions. It is not
impossible that fat absorbed by a phagocytic process may be capable
of conversion into granular fat.

Glands of the Eye.§— Dr. A. Alt has endeavoured to remove some
of the vagueness which he finds in previous descriptions of the glandular
structures appertaining to the human eye and its appendages. He
describes the orbital, palpebral, and conjunctival lachrymal glands, those
situated in the tarsal tissue of the eyelids, those in the tissue of